HINDUSTANI - Digital Library

THE TEACH YOURSELF BObKS

EDITED'BY "LEONARD CUTTS"

HINDUSTANI

fe^fec=aj6s^

First printed i^$o

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Printed ifJ Great Bntain for ihe EngHsh Universities Pre^s, Limit/d, by Jiichard Clay and Company, Ltd.. Bungay, Suffolk,

CONTENTS

PREFACE . . . . .

INTRODUCTION :

The Spelling and Pronunciation A Graphic Representation of Hindustani

tion . . . . . The Persi-Arabic or Urdu Alphabet The Devanagari or Hindi Alphabet

GRAMMAR: Nouns Adjectives Numerals . Pronouns -

Pronominal Adjectives The Verb .

Transitive Verbs The Object

Irregularities in Verbs Causal Verbs . The Infinitive Compound Verbs Conjunct Verbs

Adverbs . Postpositions Conjunctions Interjections Necessity, Advisability, Duty Habit Continuance

PACE

ix

XI Intona-

xxxvii xxxviii . x\

1 16 20 26 36 38 49 52 56 57 67 71 77 84 88 91 93 95 97 98

vi CONTENTS

Conditional Sentences Some Participial Constructions' . Special Points:

The Use of ne h9y, hota hay, hota tha, tha, hua mylna, mylana Idgna, Idgana cahna Jwxu ksrna, Jwru hona, xetm korna

xatm hona . . . . kehna, bolna, betana , (bstlana), j»tana

(jatlana) . pana and mylna . marigna and cahna gyrna, letna, pa^na

To Have . To Wear . To Know . Particles . Motion Repetition of Words Ceremonious or Respectful Speech Expressions of Time, O'clock, etc.

LESSONS :

1. Declension of Nouns, Adjectives, is, are, was were, ke, Postpositions: Questions

2. Present and Imperfect Indicative, Present Participles, Interrogative and other Pronouns

3. Future . . ' i. Imperative, Past Tense . . . . 5. Conjunctive Participle:. Imperative and Past

Continuous . . . . . . . 6. Compound Verbs, Verbs compounded with

l,ena and dena; Comparison 7. Causal Verbs

99 101

106 108 109 110

112

114 116 115 116 117 119 119 120 128 130 133 134

137

139 140 142

144,

146 148

CONTENTS

8. Further Compound Verbs

/ 1 Present Subjunctive or Conditional

11. Past Conditional . 12. Necessity, Duty, etc. . . . .

15. Necessity, Duty, etc. [continued) 14. Necessity, Duty, etc. [continued) . 16. sakna = to be able; cwkna = to finish, to

have finished . . . . . 16. legoa = begin; and other uses of logna 17. dena = permit; pana = manage to 18. Habit . . . . : . 19. Continuance, Doing a Thing at the Moment

• Habit 20. Special Numbers and Time . 21. The Passive . . . . _ . 22. mylna, mylana . . ' . 23. Repetition . . - - • -24. Present and Past Participles .

" 25. Present and Past Participles {cotiUnued) . 26. Conditional Sentences . . . . 27. Conditional Sentences [contimted) . 28. How to Express " Have, Possess " 29. Various Details Alternative Forms

GLOSSARIES : Hindustani-English Engbsh-Hindustani . . . .

150

151

154 156 159 160

162 163 164 166

170 174 178 182 186 190 198 206 210 214 218 224

226 276

PREFACE. THIS book is based on material left by the late Dr. Grahame Bailey, the well-known Indianist, who died in 1942. Among his posthumous papers there were at least two versions of what he intended should become a grammar and language course of Hindustani.

With the assistance of Mr. A. H. Harley and others, I have collected what seem to have been his last intentions, and, with certain changes and additions mentioned below, present the result as an introduction to one of the principal languages of the world to-day by the most distinguished -European scholar of Hindustani in recent times.

The romanic orthography employed is the outcome of my own work on an All-India alphabet,* and was substituted for the transcription which Dr. Grahame Bailey used throughout. We have introduced the Persi-Arabic or Urdu script from Lesson 18 to the end, since students normally expect to begin reading in the language. The transition lessons are adequate and should enable any serious student to read the lessons wliich follow, and thereafter simple Hindustani in tlie Persi-Arabic script.

I am responsible for the Introduction to the spelling and pronunciation, wliich should promote ease and speed of learning, make for early fluency, and pave the way for the transition to the Indian systems of writing, both Persi-Arabic and Devanagari. Transition to Devanagari instead of to Persi-Arabic, with all the consequent alterations, could be provided if there should be a demand for it.

The romanic orthography is thoroughly Indian, both phoneticallyand Iinguisticaily,as every speakeroi Hindustani will at once recognize, and serves as a grammatical spelling

* Also applied in A. H . Hariey's Colloquial Hinduslani (Kegan Paul) and in Miss H. M. Lambert 's Maralhi Language Course (Oxford University Press, Bombay).

X PREFACE

which Indians themselves could use, parallel as it is with their own scripts.

The alphabetical order of the Hindustani-English Glossary departs to some extent from the Roman order, as indeed it must, but will soon be understood.

I should like to acknowledge the generous assistance of Mr. Munib-ur-Rahmah, Miss E. M. Evans and other colleagues, the skilled work of my secretary, Mrs.'Newman, and the technical help and patience of the printers and publishers,

'J. R. FIRTH. School of Oriental and African SfiiMes.

INTRODUCTION The Spelling and Pronunciation ;

THE romanic speUing used in this book is similar to that previously employed in Colloquial Hindustani, * but improved in the direction of making it more representative from the Indian point of view. It is more 'phonet ic" than the spelling of Italian or Spanish, but the reader must not expect to leani how to pronounce Hindustani from this or any other hook without the help of a teacher or of a Pakistani or Indian speaker. The spelling does, however, indicate all the minimum essential differences tliat have to be systematically maintained in speech; not one of the .distinctions can be ignored, and they all correlate with the essentials of Indian systems of writing, Devanagari and Persi-Arabic.

In attempting pronunciation remember especially that what may be described as " the demobilization " of non-Indian sounds in your own speech is just as important as establishing those characteristic of Hindustani. The practice drills which follow are based on this advice, for you are only allowed six " near-English " vowel sounds out of the twenty-one a Southern English speaker normally uses, and out of twenty English consonant sounds you may use only ten towards the minimum of thirty-one (not including the semi-vowels y and v) essential to Hindustani. After the first drill, which uses only the six near-English vowels and the ten near-English consonants, all the rest, gradually added in subsequent drills, are foreign, and they are' presented in ascending order of difficulty for English-speaking learners in suitably small doses.

You are advised to work steadily through the eight * Colloquial Hindusiani, by A. H. Harley, with an Introduction

by J. R. Firth (Kegan Paul, London, 1944).

xii INTRODUCTION

practice lessons in pronunciation with a teacher, preferably an Indian or Pakistani speaker, before beginning the grammatical lessons proper. At least an hour should be given to each practice, and two hours would not be excessive.

If you are fortunate enough to have an Indian or Pakistani hstener, pronounce a single word once only, and ask him to tell you the meaning in English. If he can recognize that you are saying ata not ata, gse and not gae or gai, naw not nao, you are maldng progress. Similarly you should be able to recognize his word after hearing it once, and to give him the number or translation of the word in the exercise. Ask your Indian teacher to dictate the words, one at a time, and to repeat them as often as you may find necessary, so that you can estabUsh a relation between the spelling and pronunciation. Correct your exercise from the text.

The phonetic backbone of the language is the consonant system given opposite in Tablel.' Though Hindustani is on the whole an easy language to learn, the pronunciation of the consonants is difficult for aU foreigners, and not only for Englishmen.

The most important set of consonant distinctions for European foreigners to learn are those between the retroflex series (;, ^h, 4> AM {including the very difficult j;) and the dental series t, tli, d, dh. These are precisely the ones which Englishmen habitually ignore. They usually fuss over what are called " the difficult Arabic sounds " x, y and q, for which millions of Indian speakers substitute kh, g and k without dire consequences, though in good northern Urdu, courtesy requires x, y, q. They occur much less frequently than the tjîcal Indian sounds t, l;h, ^ , ^h , ]; and t. th, d. dh, and are not so very difficult to acquire. Again the differences between the aspirated and unaspir-ated series (the first and fourth horizontal " columns " in Table I) must be maintained. Enghsh spealêrs will have considerable difficulty at first in satisfying an Indian listener that they can pronounce the unaspirated series k. c. t'. t. P-

INTRODUCTION

s <

w c (4 c 0 C

u ^M t i l «

Mi

•

o-

- i j

- 4 — '

o

^

1 •p

J 3

^

<

SS3\

-33C0A

rJ3

•a

TT-

.-,

bo

C 0

13

rCi T3'

E.

a

'

Xi

ft

pSDlOA

SaAIS07(J

'

'

1-1 < - 5

•+4

1 (It in

'

. -

in en m

'

N

'

b

>•

1 >

S 3 A H

'

U

!-•

1

'

T3 - 4 - *

-a !-•

^

I.

•a

a.

R tti

in T J ' O aj a D . 3

1

s

^:2

>'

1-H

—:

'1

>,

j i

i P

l i y INTRODUCTION

The principal difficulties for the great majority of foreign learners are:—

'(i) The two so-called "t" and " d " sounds, t- t ;

(ii) The five unaspirated voiceless plosives, especially c and t.

(iii) The five aspirated voiced plosives, gh, jh, ^h, dh, bh.

(iv) Double consonants. (vj The retroflex flapped r. (vii The two simple un-diphthongized vowels e and o.

(vii) The so-called diphthongs ey and aw.

TABLE II

Vowels

Normal

Nasalized

h-coloured or

aspirated

9 a y i w u e 9 y o s w 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

sg ag ig ug eg syg or) owg

{•ah ah (ih) uh eh oh '

PRACTICE I

A. Vowels: ©, a ; y, i ; w, u. Consonants: g9, be, ne, ma, Ja, sa, za, fa, ha, ya.

The first six vowels fall into three pairs which present very little difficulty to the English-speaking learner, y and i are similar to the English short and long vowels in bid and bead and w and u to those in full and fool or hood and food. The important difference between the members

INTRODUCTION ,xv

of each pair is difference of vowel quality, not difference of length. . -

Between the obscure, weak or neutral vowel in the first syllable of arise and the vowel of but. The Hindustani word sab is more like the first syllable of subject (verb) than of stibject (noun), but in Hindustani the vowel B occurs in all positions and not as in English only in unstressed position,

a. Similar to the a in father, k a m (work) sounds like, fhe

Yorkshire or I-ancashire pronunciation of caUn.

y-Not very different from the y in system or mystery or

the i in bid, sit.

Like the vowel in seem or cease or the second vowel in immediately, without trace of diphthongization.

w.

Like the vowels of put, foot.

a. Not very difierent from the Received English pronuncia

tion of the vowel in too, root, moodily, without trace of diphthongization. , The consonant sound J is like the English sh in ship, but usually without lip-rounding. Since the sequence s plus h occurs in Hindustani and since h is associated with aspiration, this special letter J is an advantage,

1. 9b. now . 6. g&i, letter " g " . 2. S8b, all 7. ana, to come 3. gsz, yard (measure) 8. SAtnaa, linage 4. ssbab, cause 9. yn, these 5. /am, evening 10. ys, this

i v i INTRODUCTION

11. hysab, account (M.) 19. bwna, wove {ftt.sg) 12. ynsan, human being • 20. mwbani, founder (w.) 13. si, like (adj./.sg.) 21. un, wool 14. sin, scene 22, nun, letier " n " 15. î^g, glass 23. roRyus, pessimistic, hope-16. Z9hin, quick of memory kss 17. wn, those 24. namuna, sample (t.) 18. ws, iAfl(

B.i. Vowels Nasalized: ag, aij, ig, ug. .', The mark of nasalization for vowels is q inunediately -following the vowel. Thus ag and og stand for a and 6, being rather like the French syllables an and on. T h e g ssmibol is not a consonant and must not be pronounced l&e the " ng " in hang. It indicates that the preceding vowel is nasalized and nothing more.

ii. Semi-vowels: y», va.

y-A very short " consonantal" form of the vowel y, but

not so close or tense as the " y " of English, and never fricative. Indians do not properly pronounce Uie " y " sound after the " b " which distinguishes beauly from' hooiy. The Hindustani loan word «Jjmti is in fact very different from the English pronunciation of duty.

V.

Similarly the Indian v is much more of a vowel than a consonant. It has all the back or " oo " quahty of " w ", but is without Up-rounding. The middle only of the lower lip barely touches the middle of the upper teeth. Contact is often with the inside of the lower lip. There is rarely any contact with or closing of the sides of the lower lip. The Indian v is in a sense the reverse of the English " v ".

1. hag, ês 5. vshag, there 2. bayan, description 6. bags, bamboo 3. sai|s, breath 7. barjg, crying out 4. yahag, here 8. nshig, not

INTRODUCTION KVii

9. yahii), in t!m very place 10. gsig, went (f.pl.) 11. sigg, horn 12. higg, asafcelida

Note; ©g without a following k or occur in hagsna, to laugh. iii. Vowel Junctions:

1. nsi, Mfw U-sg.) 2. ggi, iPfiMi (/.s^.) 3. gsii), w«i (/.^/.) 4. miai), sj?" 5. sais, g?-0(Mn (w.) 6. banal, wjarfe (/.sg.) 7. aing, mirror

C. Differentiation: 1. saf, row, &»e 2. hgm, ice 3. ssbab,-cdJtse 4. jTi, iAese

. 5. afys, opce. 6. memnun, thankful 7. saman, luggage 8. zghin, ^JcA o/JM^ffory 9. nun, iertef " « "

10. nsj, new {f.sg.) 11. hags, laugh 12. hans, le an

13. hug, am 14. hugga, will be 15. gugga, (fMMjJ (nt.sg.) 16. miag, SJV

is rare, but it does

8. na-ynsafi, injustice 9. hua, liappened (nt.sg.)

10. sui, needle 11. auT), jMflvcoffie 12. gaog, village 13. swnaugga, sAu// (eii ..•

saf, clean Jam, evening ssbab, causes, luggage sin, scewe afim, opium mwna^b, proper yahag, here nahig, not hug, am nahig, not sags, firîiiA hags, /awÂ

PRACTICE 2

A. Consonants: ^9, da.

a. The main thing in the production of this and the other

retroflex sounds is not wjiere you touch the teeth ridge or just behind it, but how you touch it. The point of articu-

Kviii -J INTRODUCTION

lation, is about where English speakers make the d of dry or dôop, but the contact is-'made not with the upper edge of the tip of the tongue in the English manner, but with the' very edge or rim of the tip, which is curled back sHghtly, almost as when you try to prevent an elusive pill from rolling off the tip of your tongue. As one would expect, English d is replaced by ^ in loan-words such as; 4yu, socla, 4rama, propagsmâ, (laynyng hal.

Unlike 4> " is pronounced with a f!at tongue spread out, the tip touching the cutting edge of the front teeth and the edges touching the inside of the upper teeth all round, Some English people use a dental d of this type in width, breadth, on account of the following i/i-spund. Compare the English d in dry, which is nearer to 4i with the d in breadth, which is nearer to the dental d. Dental d is usual in French and other Romance languages.

n followed by 4 ^^d d takes on the articulation of the following consonant, h is retrofiex in aniâ but denial in band.

1. 4ubna, toswA 13. das, few, 2. 4ub, dip (M.) 14. dam, price. 3. c ayon, witch 15. dyn, day 4. c ag(li, dandy [n) 16. din, religion 6. c irig, boasting 17. defa, turn («.) 6. qa-T}^, stick («.) 18. madad, help 7. m9n4.i> market-place 19. Jaysd, perhaps 8. 43"4i' 5'*^* [f-^S-) 20. sndaz, manner 9. 4^114*. s' ' ^ (w-s^.) 21. damad, son-in-lam

10. gniâ, egg 22. wmds, nice 11. sar)4, JuU 23, dir), gave {f.pi.) 12. hag4i. cooking-pot 24. dabna, to be suppressed

B. Consonants Doubled: The doubling of consonant sounds is not very common in

English. We must, however, do so in such words as unnecessary, unknown, in which there are doubled " n "

INTRODUCTION xix..

sounds. In the following practice list the two consonants together are to be held, the first one of the pair closing the first syllable", and the second opening the next syllable.

1. bsggi, carriage 2. t^ybba, box (m.sg.) 3. bwnna, to weave 4. banna, to pretend 5. zymms, fesfonsiUliiy 6. hammani, hamniam 7. 3ssi, eighty 8. hyssa, share (w.) 9. mwazzyn, muezzin

C. Differentiation: 1. < 3s, sting {v) 2. bas, only 3. din, religion 4. din, religion 5. sar)4, bull 6. 9ndaz, manner 7. swnna, to hear 8. dwmba, ram 9. bwna, wove {m.sg.)

10. zsmin, earth 11. saman, luggage 12. hysab, account («,}

10. Jaffaf, c/^/' 11. mv/syy^n, fixed 12. h344i. ^ « ^ 13. gscfî' bundle 14. 344a, cBMfrii/ /ace • 15. gw44a, doll {m.sg.) 16. zyddi, stubborn 17. naddi, nj;e>' 18. ihwddai, plaintiff

dss, few bad, after dyn, liay duj, g< '6 (f.pl.) band, sftwi 3n4a. ^ g bsnna, to pretend 4ubna, to sink bwnna, to weave zymms, responsibility hammam, hammam' hyssa, sAii»-e

PRACTICE 3

A. Vowels: e, o, eij, og. e.

A pure or simple vowel like Italian ^nd other continental values of e. A vowel quality between the Scottish and North of England vowels in such words as made, gr^, ace; not at all like the Southern English vowels in those words. In Southern English some people approach it in the slight diphthong represented by the a in cessation.

x\ INTRODUCTION

o. Another pure vowel of continental, Scottish or Northern

English type. Some people use a short o of this type in such words as November or phonetics. Keep the tongue and lip positions steady and the lower jaw steady when practising e and o long—no chin movement, no lip diphthong.

eg; og. Nasalizations of the above vowels. There is no final

nasal consonant sound of any. sort.

1. 6e, give! (sg.) 8, dedo.îve 2. se,from 9. d^ti, gtve (Isip.pl.) 3. mez, fable 10. dedei}, give (pi.)

' 4. dm&,iogive 11. hoxj.be 5. do, give! {pi.) 12. donoi}, both 6. so, correlative conpmctimt 13. hoifge, wUl be {pi.) 7. bona, to sow 14. gaog, village

B. The five voiced plosives exemplifying the five points of articulation for plosives:

ga. J9, 4». da. ha. Note that j is pronounced with the tip of the tongue down,

behind the lower teeth, j is rather like a "dy " sound pronounced with the tip of the tongue down. English j is not a good beginning for this sound, it has too much affrica-tion or friction on release and is nearer to Hindustani jh.

eng, 9nj, on^,, end, amb, The above syllables close with a nasal homorganic with

the stop or plosive immediately following. Both nasal and stop" share the same point of articulation.

1. gsz, yard (measure) . 6. jahaz, ship 2. age, infront 7. janna, to know 3. gae, went (m.pl.) 8. snjan, engine 4., nsnga, naked 9. das, siing (vb,) 5. jo, that which 10. qayan, witch

INTRODUCTION

ubna, to sink ' 17. bsja, o'clock aiKâ, stick 18. bsjna, to sound

11. c

- • 13. des, country 19. bab, rfoor 14. wdas, Sflif 20. badmaj", rogue 15. damad, son-in-law 21. bambei, Bombay 16. ganda, diriy

C. CoKSOMUM s: re, 1».

r. May be fricative or tapped. There is a special difficulty

for English speakers when afinal r is preceded by i, u or e. Jer, der and dur are not at all like Southern English share, dare or doer. The title Amir in Hindustani is qûite unlike "the sound of a mere in English. In Hindustani you mus't hang on to the pure undiphthongized vowel i, e, o or u, to the very instant the r is made. There must be no neutral or glide vowel between the i, e, o or u and tiie final r, which is always to be clearly pronounced.

1.

Always clear like the / at the beginning of such words as lee, leaf, as pronounced in Soutliern English. Never as in feel, or field. The so-called " thick " I of Glasgow or certain American dialects does not sound well in Hindustani.

1. roz, day 13. ^\,fioweT 2. rahe, were {m.fl.) 14. gol, round 3. raddi, waste-paper 15. bolna, to speak 4. d.9r, fear 16. <\3.lna., to put in 5. gyr, fali {vb.) 17. isrraj", servant 6. /er, lion 18. rozmarra, daily routine 7. zgrur, certainly 19. bylli, cat 8. wrdu, Urdu 20. wllu, owl 9. lena., to take 21, dei, delay

10. lagega, will affect (»J.sg.) 22. dur, distant 11. logog, people 23. amir, Amir 12. mel, re-union

xxii INTRODUCTION

D. Differentiaiion: 1. gQz, yard (measure) des, country . 2. das, ten mez, table 3. hs]a., o'clock Ta.]3,, rajah 4. gv!l,fiower gol, round 5. bwnna, to weawe bolna, to sfeak 6. ser, seer, (wetght) Jer, /(OM 7. hug, am hot), fte 8. hugga, / will be hogge, (h^ will be &. myli, met (f-sg.) bylli, caf

10. dsdexi, give {pi.) daaoi},.boih H, farraj, servant zara, SMW^ quantity 12. wrdu, CJ-^H raazdur, labourer

PRACTICE 4

A. Vowels: ©y, a w ; ayij, awg.

ay-There are two types of pronunciation of tiiis vowel, one

diphthongal and the other a simple half-open front vowd like the Southern English vowel in hatn. In fact, the common word hsy (is) sounds rather like southern had or northern head stopping short just before the " d ". This is the pronunciation recommended. The diphthongal pronunciation may perhaps be approximately arrived at by taking the two vowels of amiss or amid, and coalescing tiiem, " a " and " y ". This diphthongal pronunciation is

. difficult for EngUsh speakers who habitually perpetrate the Enghsh word high for the Hindustani word hay. It is of high grammatical importance that the following Hindustani sounds be kept distinct; ai, ae, ai, ae, ay,

The nasalization of ay. No nasal consonant of the English " ng " type must be heard.

ayg must be kept distinct from aig, aeq and aig

INTRODUCTION , xxni

9 W . I

Foreigners liabitually mispronounce this sound when a diphthong is attempted. It must never be pronounced to rhyme with the English words how, now, neither should it resemble'the vowel in the Southern English pronunciation of gnawed. Attempt to isolate the vowel in Southern English nod without lip-rounding. If you stop short before the " d " of nod, you may get something Uke iiaw, the Hindustani word for nine. If you say the English now, it will suggest Hindustani nao or nav (boat).

9wr). The nasalization of aw. No nasal consonant must be

heard. Care must be given to the distinct pronunciation of 9W, ao, 9v; ewg, aoq and aug, which are grammatically differentiated.

1. hay, is 10. mayri, / 2. may, fiôr 11. hue hayg, Iiave been 3. ssyr, visit to a place • (m.pl.) 4. rasyl, dirt 12. rahehayg, are 5. jsw, barl^ 13. lowgg, clove 6. saw, hundred 14. âwgga, canoe 1. 3wr, and 16. jaysa, so 8. faw], army _ 16. aysa, so 9. hayg, are

B. Consonants: kha, cha, ^ha, tha, pha. • These strongly aspirated consonants are sometimes com

pared with the rapid succession of final plosives with a following " h "-sound in such sequences as blockhouse, blockhead, bulkhead, hothouse {X,h), tophat. Such aids are only helpful if some violence is done to English pronunciation and stressing in such'a word as bulkhead, for instance, dividmg it thus: hul-'khead, with the incidence of stress in the " k ". ^

ph is not really like the junction of p arid h in iophaty w ^ It is one effort, a " p " sound with a good pressure of " c'--"'^ air " behind the stop so that when the lips ate eeie

^ ^ - <

xxiv INTRODUCTION

there is a sudden escape of breath. These consonants must be sharply distinguished from the unaspirated correlates which are much more difficult for Enghsh speakers (see Practice 5}.

1. kha, eat 2. kh^yI, open (vb.) . 3. rskhni, pai (f.sg,) 4. rakh do, put! 5. cha, cover {vb.) 6. chsy, six 7. chuna, io touch 8. mugch, niouslacka 9. than^, coldness

10. fhayrna, to wait 11. wthna, to rise 13. sath, sixty

C. Phrases:

1. m35'r| kha roha tha. • 2. mayg kha rehi thi.

3. hsm kha rahe the. 4. vahi lahawr gaya lisy. 5. yshi bambei gai hsy, 6. ham dylh jaegge.

•D. Differentiation: 1. mel, re-union 2. mD}?!), / 3. so, conjunclion 4. S3wda, goods 5. log, people 6. sath, wtth 7. thsyli, purse 8. ssval, question 9. vahag, M<e?'e

10. jaj.ywffee 11. ph}^, (Aen 12. ajob, wonderful

13. raha tha, le-as (wi.se.} 14. rahi thi, was (f-sg) 15. robe the, were (m.pl.) 16. sath, with 17. pbal,/*-?*!* 18. -phnl.fiower 19. phulna, tofiower 20. ophorna, o siceW «^ 21. vahi, that one 22. vala, eminent 23. vsbar), (/jej-e

/ (m.) was eating. I (/.) was eating. We were eating. He has gone to Lahore. She has gone to Bombay. We mil go to Delhi.

msyl, dirt meg, in saw, hv/ndred scM a, soda lâter) Iswgg, clove sath, sixty thayma, to wait savar, rider yahag, here mugch, moustache phul, fiower azad, free

INTRODUCTION

13. -gae, cow gai, she went 14. gse, they went ai, she came 15. naw, nine nao, J oai •

PRACTICE 5 A. Consonants:

ka, C3, ta , ta, pa. ank. anc, an];, ant, amp.

This series of unaspirated consonants is much more difficult for English speakers to establish in their habitual pronunciation of Hindustani than the aspirated or voiced correlates. The five points of articulation are similar to those of g, j , 4> d and b (see Practice 3), The place for the retroflex contact oft is about where most Englishmen make the - 1 " of true. Some English people use a dental articulation similar to that of the Hindustani dental t in the word at in such phrases as at the theatre, at three, at thirty, spoken quickly, or in eighth.

The English consonants " p " and " k " in such words as pack, hick and keep, occurring in stressed position at the end of a sentence, are all aspirated, both initially and finally in those words. Indians mispronounce such words in speaking English, and even for the pronunciation of final " k " and " p ", sound much better if they think of them as nearer to their own kh and ph, than to k and p. It will be realized at once, therefore, that such Hindustani words as pi j , kaj , t"t» ^^^' <^wp, kuc are, on the other hand, extremely difficult for English speakers to pronounce, An almost uncomfortable restraint of " chest a i r " is necessary in learning to pronounce these soimds. Northern Englishmen find them less difficult'than southerners,

The most difficult of this series is c, which is rather like the " t y " combinations in the Enghsh word tumultuous, but pronounced with the tip of the tongue down, i.e. behind the lower teeth. The " ch " in church will do for the aspirated ch of Hindustani, but is a bad beginning for the unaspirated c.

sxvi INTRODUCTION

Hindustani k, c, [, t, p are released with a minimum of breath. .There must be no audible outward puff of breath from the lungs. To understand this, practise p and k while holding your breath. You may produce a sort of "popping" explosion of " p " . That is the basis. Eliminate the audible " pop " and you have an unaspirated p. The opposite action of leaving your throat open for freely flowing breath is what you do in English and more 30 for aspirated kh and ph in ffindustani.

The syllables ank, snc, an^. ant and a m p illustrate each one of the unaspirated stops immediately preceded by the nasal consonant homorganic with it—that is, pronouiiced in the same place, at the same point of articulation. The four nasals represented by n are different, each one being as closely associated with the following plosive as m is with p (compare Practice 3, E).

. 1. kam, work 11. tykst Hcket 2. kal, to-morrow 12. i^{, brick 3. ksrna, to do 13. tab, strengUt 4. ( gnlc, sting 14. tez, fast 5. ca., lea 15. ^.{a,, flour 6. cax, four 16. savani, brave 7. caca, paternal wtch 17. pani, water 8. ync, tnch 18. ap, self

' 9. tm, break 19. upsr, upon JO. tota, loss 20. laymp, lamp

. B. Consonant Junctions :

The distinction between single and. double consonants must be maintained. The double k in pakka is rather like the long " k "-sound in bookcase, and the junction of J w i ^ t h in pat^ha is suggested by the long " t "-sound in hot tea. The junction of the retroflex (; and [hwith the dental t is common in such participial forms as baythta, wthta;ka(;ta. Tlie verbal forms baythta tha, ka^ta tha. are difficult sequences and good exercise,

INTRODUCTION

1. pakka, ripe 2. mafckhan, btiitcr 3. tak-na, to stare

tak-ta, staring tak-a, stared

i. lykh-na, to write lykh-ta, writing lykh-a; wrote

5. kscca, raw • 6. sccha, good

7. bac-na, io avoid bac-ta, avoiding bsc-a, avoided

8. puch-na, io ask puch-ta, asking puch-a, asked

9. tsfti. hedge 10. cyttbi, letter

C. Phrases." 1. acchi bat hsy. 2. adrai ata tha. 3. 9\vr3t ati thi.

4. bat twm ko yad hay? 5. kys ke pas hay? 6. bscca dekbta tha. 7. bacca cytfhi lykhta tha. 8. kwch kam karo. 9. ws ka ek befa tha.

10. cwp raho, twm kya kya bakte ho.

D. Differentiation: \. savant, brave 2. khata, eating {vb) 3. kuc, departure 4. khwl, open {vb.) 5. pir, Monday

11. p9l-n&, to be ihatc/ied, etc. pat-ta pat-a

12. wth-na, io rise w^h-ta, rising wth-a, rose

13. patta, leaf 14. patthar, stone 15. ytna, this much 16. cappu, oars 17. tap-na, to warm oneself,

etc. tap-ta tap-a

18. baythna, io sH bayth-ta, sitting bayfh-a, sat

19. wtna, that much

That's goody""'^ The man came or was coming. The woman came or was

comii^. Do you remember it ? \_^--—' Who has got H ? *_ • The child was looking. The child was writing a letter.'.-Do some work!\^—• /;•''•-He had one son. .'/ '' Be quiet, what nonsense yoii;^

talk I ''••• ••

kanl;h, ikroal cata, licked kwch, sOTne kal, to-morrow phyr, then

viii INTRODUCTION

6. pith, back ' phat- bursl (vb.) 7. pwl, bridge phal, jiower 8. ap, you cwp, quiet 9. -phal^k, gate patta., Imf

10. kaptan, captain abdar, water-carrier 11. wtarna, to bring down wthana, to raise 12. varzyj", exercise bardajt, patience 13. sath, with sat, seven 14. a^li, eight ka);, cut

PRACTICE 6

A. F{W«'s." ah, eh, oh, uh, ©h.

The ten basic vowel sounds of Hindustani given in Practice 1 are pronounced with a " bright " or " clear ". voice quality using a minunura of breath. We have seen in Practices 1 and 3 that eight of these vowels are commonly nasalized. There are four further vowels having similar basic formation but pronounced either with a following voiced " h " sound like the " h "• in behind or alternatively with a breathy or " h "-coloured voice quality at the end, rather like the " sighing out " of ah! The exclamatory syllables ah! and oh ! in English can be pronounced either with " bright" voice using a minimum of breath, or breathily quite in the Indian manner.

N.B.—In the syllables ah, eh, oh and uh, the basic formation of the vowels is similar to that of the correlated simple vowels. Special attention must, however, be given to the breathy vowel sh immediately followed by a consonant, in such words as rohna, rshta; kshna, kshta. In all such cases the vowel quality is similar to that given in Practice 4 for the non-diphthongal pronunciation of sy. That is to say, the above four words sound as if they might be written reyhna, rayhta; ksyhna, koyhta. But that would be grammatically inconvenient and would make such verbs irregular, besides being unnecessary. In the past tense forms r^ha, ksha, no opening or " fronting " of

INTRODUCTION xxix

the vowel takes place, since the syllabic sequence is ra-ha, k9-ha.

The " h "-colouring of 9 always produces a quality rather like the Southern EngUsh vowel in man when immediately followed by another consonant. Certain words like pehyla, pahyle, have two phonetic possibilities. The first is straightforward, suggested by pa-hy-le. In the second case there is reduction to two syllables which may be regarded either as coalescence payhle or as elision pshle. This pronunciation suggests the possibility of eyh as an alternative pronunciation. It will not, however, be taken as a basis for spelling.

Similar coalescence takes place in the common word bahwt, which, if immediately followed by a word beginning with a consonant, is a two-syllable word ba-hwt as in bahwt gsrm. But in normal rapid colloquial, especially when immediately followed by a word beginning with a vowel, it is pronounced as one syllable, e.g. bawht accha. This common alternative pronunciation provides an instance of a breathy vowel awh, but it wiU not be regarded as the basis of speUing.

- There is an interesting parallel in the case of yeh and voh, both of which are spelled according to the sound, recognizing the effect of " h "-colouring on the vowels y and w. yeh, or more commonly ye, is really yyh, and voh, or vo, is vwh. In final position the " h " of the Indian traditional spelling of certain numerals, for example, is disregarded, and the resulting open vowel a considered sufficient; e.g. gyara, bara, tera, and similarly in many other words. This changed spelling affects the grammatical treatment especially of gender. See p. 20 and footnote.

1. cah, affection 8. zslir, poison 2. cahna, lo like 9. mshram, conjidant 3. mahtab, moon 10. sahna, to bear 4. yeh, this sahta, bearing 6. behtar, belter 11. rshna, to remain

.. 6. mehman, guest rahta, remaining 7. mehr, kii^ness • 12. voh, that

XXX INTRODUCTION.

13. mobk^m, strej^gthejied 18. âhyls, first {adv.) 14. koh, mountain 19. mehtsr, sweeper 16. niohr, seal 20. kahna, to say 16. bahwt, very much • kahta, sayhig 17. nuh, Noah 21. mthrbzay, please B. Consonants: ghe, jha, <lh», dha, bha.

These are the voiced correlates of kh, ch, jh , th and ph (see Table I), and are produced Jn a similar way only with. the forcible expulsion of voiced breath. When they occur between vowels as in ydhar and wdhar, they are not diiiicult to pronounce. For such positions the usual method of learning is by running together the middle consonants oi log-house, road-houBe (for ^h) atvd cab-horse for bh . But the Enghsh syllable division and incidence of stress is' entirely unsuitable. To approximate to the Indian bh, for instance, you must divide the syllables in a very un-; English way, e.g. ca-hkorse. A variant method is to begin saying hah-hab-hab and then speed up the repetition, change, over from hab-hab to ha-bha and continue repeating bha-bha, etc. Another device is to regard the b part of bh as a closed lip position from which you proceed to pronounce. ha, which you have all ready inside under pressure, so to speak. The ha part begins with a voiced h.

1, ghar, house . 11, ^harip, cover (vb.) 2, ghi, clarified butler 12. ^hugt^na, to find out 3, gholna, to mix 13. dhup, sunshine i:-aij^h, drowsiness 14, dh.oka., fraud 5.' jhst, quick 15, dhobi, washerman 6. fhut, tie («.) 16. dudh, milk 7. ]hsn(â,, fiag 17. bhat, minstrel 8. bujh, comprehension 18. bhari, heavy 9. (^her, heap 19. bhitar, inside

10. 4hit, obstinate 20. labh, profit

C. Phrases: ^^''' • ' 1. mayo ghar ghar gaya. ^'IweHtfrom house to house. -2. mayri ghar par tha. -.^was at home. 3. do pahr ke bad. \Â'ft^ twelve noon.

INTRODUCTIO.N-'''^ xxxi

4. bahwt saman rah gaya. ""A great deal of luggage was left.

5. thik do pshr hay. U is exactly twelve noon. \^-'' 6. mwjhe hyndostani nahiif I don't know Hindustani.

ati. 7. hamei] sui dhaga cahie. We want needle and thread, L „ 8. mayri kwch karaa cahta / want to do something.,

hur). ^ ^

D. Differentiation: 1. ko, to, on, by 2. ca, tea 3. kor, blind

•'• ^ 4. car, four ' 'B.^her, heap

6! topi, cap 7. behtar, better

• 8. kapi, co^y (M.) 9. fawj, « w y

10. ghar, house 11. beva, widow 12. kana, one-eyed 13. bahai, se((i5n/il(/.sg.)

. 14. bahana, pretence 15. b9hao,/t)ie' 16. bahi, account book

koh, mountain cah, affection mohr, sea/ zahr, poison 49r, /ear dhobi, washerman bayfha, s/Wng (w.) khati, eaft'jjg (/.) bojh, burden gshra, liee^ bheja, S«M( khana, to eat bhai, brother bhana, to be pleased bhao, ^n'ce bhi, also

PRACTICE 7

A. Foife/s; whg , ehq, ahq,

Three vowel qualities combine aspiration and nasalization. The vowels are produced with breathy nasality. Asinthecase of ah (seep, xxviii) so also withshq, the quality is open and fronted rather like ayhq; e.g. mehqga sounds as though it might be written m3ytii)ga. In words Kke p»bwi)cna (p9-hwi)c-iia) there is often coalescence resulting in a pronunciation which sounds hke pawhgcna, i.e.

XKiii INTRODUCTION / • I

two syllables pawhgc-na, in which the first is nasalized f aspirated ew (awhri). But since this pronunciation is an > alternative provided for in the spelling, there is no need for / iwo spellings (cf. bahwt, p. xxix). _,-f:i

1. mwhg,/ac« 4. mshi|ga, exêîsive, 2. ehg, ok! («J.sg.) 3. TCiehxi, rain 5. pshwgcna, io reach

B, Consonants: 9^9, aj;; 9cha, a^h. It will be noticed from the above syllables that the

retroflex flapped p does not occur initially. It is In fact a medial and final form of 4,- If it were not for loan '^jjrds like soâ and pay^t a special letter would not be ne,cg.ssai:y. . However, both Muslims and Europeans have the impreSsjon , that it is a sort of " r "-sound. And indeed some English ,, speakers pronounce beUer and butter as though the middle-.-,-' t " were an " r ". One may hear something like " lerra"'' go ! " for " let her go I " That is in fact what Indians do. They turn the medial and final i , into a very rapidly flapped • sound which suggests a sort of " r " sound to foreigners. But it is quite distinct from r, and bears no resemblance '. either to Southern Enghsh or West Country " r " or "to . Scottish " r ". It is perhaps the most difiicult sound for. a. foreigner to acquire.

The body of the tongue is drawn baclcwards with the blade curled back as for ^ or t (see pp. xvii, xxv). Having your teeth apart, try to point towards the back of.yoiir '. mouth with the tip of the tongue, but do not touch any-' ' where. From that position the blade is rapidly flapped' forward and down, and wheri the sound is made a ve ry rapid flick of the under edge of the tip of the tongue catches ' the gums as it flaps past, finishing up behind the lower teeth. Since the blade of the tongue must he retroflexed for this sound, the quality of the immediately preceding vowel must obviously be affected, so that you can always hear it coming. It may help you to perceive it- and make it if you pay some attention to vowels immediately preceding J. It .also occurs aspirated, jh..

INTRODUCTION

1. bata, big (M.sg.) • 2. ghafi, clock

3. gafi, cari 4. ghaâ, eartheti vessel for

'• w.ater 5. bliii;, crowd 6. moj;, turning {ôad) 7. thappaf, slap, blow 8. taf, pakn tree 9. bai;hana, io increase

. 10. sithi, /tjAfe!' 11. t^fha, crooked 12. biiiha, o/if (w.sg'.)

C. Phrases:

. 1. yeh kamra jhaf do. 2. yeh camija rakh do. 3. voh p9i;h raha hay. 4. voh p8i;ha ksrta hay. 5. yeh§hoi;atezdawi;sskta

, hay. 6. voh khafi rahi. 7. darvaza kholo awr

khyxki band karo. 8. jab majT) vahag pah-

wrica voh pai;hna/wru kar cwke the.

13. anpath, iUiierate 14. 4ei;h, twe and a half 15. bai;h, increase [pb.) 16. ga[h, citadel 17. tofna, to fej-efift 18. I9[ki, gi'rf 19. pagfi, turban 20. caini:a, leather 21. pafhna, to ;'e«ii 22. bai;hna, to increase 23. papaf, wo/e/ 24. pay4,^(i« 25. soâ, so^rt icdtor

C/eaJt this room! K--'" Put this leather away! \., - — He is reading. ^ He's always reading, y This horse can run fast, u--^

She remained standing.' Open the door aiid sltul ike \-

window. When I got there, they had i-

slarted reading.

D. Differentiation:

1. kanira, room , 2. bwtjt^ha, old man

3. pbyr, then 4. wthna, to rise 6. bwra, bad 6. gaiha, ditcli 7. gora., fair-skinned 8. larza, trembled 9. kah do, say

B

canii;a, leather bufha, old {m.sg.) bhix, cfoieiif w^na, tojly baija, 6tg ghafa, earthen vessel ghoâ, horse lafka, boy k^.of

INTRODUCTION

10. do, give dho, wash 11. dhajji, rag 9cchi, good (f.) 12. pahwgcna, to reach pogchna, to wipe

PRACTICE 8 (Necessary for Urdu only.)

A. Consonants: x», ya, qs. These consonants occur only in loan words of Arabic

origin, most of which reached Hindustani through Persian. Though they are really foreign to the typical Indian consonant system as shown in Table I, they are used by more than fifty miUion Pakistanis and Indians, and are essential for a good pronunciation of northern Urdu, For Hindustani as a lingua franca they are not really necessary, and most Indians substitute kh for x, g for y, and k for q.

X.

This is sometimes described as the " clj "-sound of loch, or the, " ach "-sound of German. It is similar to these,, but further back and more " scrapy ".

Y-Though this is pronounced slightly further back than x,

it may be treated as the voiced counterpart of x. I t is similar to the fricative or " rubbing " pronunciation of the " g " in Wagen by some Germans, or to the intervocalic " g " of Spanish. It is further back than the " back r " of German waren or French aurons, but it must not be rolled or trilled.

q-A good nonsense word in which to practise this sound is

aqa, with a back kind of " a " sound. Keep the mouth fairly wide open, that is, with the lower jaw well down, and make the furthest back " k " sound possible. The back of the tongue has to close the arches or fauces at the

INTRODUCTION xxxv

back of the mouth, including contact with the uvula. To make this easier, it is necessary to squeeze the sides of the throat nearer together to narrow the opening which has to be stopped by the back of the tongue.

1. X3t, leiler 2. xw/, happy 3. xydmat, service 4. xubsurat, beatttiful 5, 9xbar, newspaper 6. tarix, date 7. saxi, charitable 8. dsrxast, application 9. yalyb, Iriumphant

10. yarib, mj?" H. ywssa, anger 12. yalybsn, perhaps

B. Phrases: 1. qwH bsta saxt kam

karte ha}^). 2. mahigir qysss kah raha

tha. 3. voh X3t pafh rsha hay. 4. yeh ek ysrib awrat hay. 5. voh yalybsn kamyab

hoga. 6. yeh zaruri kayszog meg

natthi kar do. 7. yeh xat meri prayvaf

fayl meg Isga do.

C, Differentiation: 1. khari, brackish 2. xal, mo e 3. khana,/oorf 4. ghol, Miiar (nfi.) 5. ywrra, pride 6. gali, abuse

13. bay, garden 14. daroY^, police inspector 15. mayryb, icesi 16. xwdyaraz, selfish 17. qwli, coofe 18. qysmat, /weft 19. qarib, near ' 20. qalam, ^6» 21. faqir, beggar 22. yaqin, certainty 23. nwqsan, /oss 24. farq, difference

Coolies do very heavy work, \—

The fisherman was telling a >.-story.

He is reading a letter. She is a poor woman. Perhaps he will be successful.'

•

cup it together with the im- I-portant papers.

File this letter in my private file.

xar, thorn khal, skin xana, house yol, crowd ghoâ, horse yalyb, triumphant

INTRODUCTION

7. koli, embrace qwli, coolie 8. qamet, slaiure ksmgnd, noose 9. kwmhar, poU^ qamis, shirt

10. qarz, /OAM y^'^^, purpose 11. xwlus, w«ce?'ii:v qwsur, /«w 12. hwqqs, hookah pskka, ripe

THE ACCENT

Englishmen cannot fail to notice the effect of Indian languages on the English spoken by most Indians, especially in the matter of accent. The effect of the strong stress accent of the Englishman on his Hindustani, coupled with his usual pronunciation howlers, is incredible distortion of the language,

Hindustani ordinarily moves evenly, within a narrower range of intonation tiian English and without strong stresses. The prominence of Hindustani syllables in the sentence seems to be partly due to a slight increase of force coupled with a change in the direction of intonation which may be up or down, but which is usually down followed by ' a rise, somewhat like Welsh.

A rough idea of the intonation of a simple phrase may be indicated by the following arrangement of syllables:

voh ,. rs ^^ J^ hay.

He go " stayed " (m.) is. i,e. He is goirt^.

Notice the relative pitches of the prominent syllable ja- , and one of the weakest syllables -ha. It is almost the antithesis of an English pattern with a stress on the first syllable oi going. To assist students to observe the intonation patterns for themselves, the following short graphic representation is given as an individual example of one good style;

INTRODUCTION vxxix

The following are alternative forms for sin and Jin: Cursive Forms

b

^ ^

Din

Jin

•HE 4»Vl V

a

tr' cr-

4 C

0^

iT ^

^ a -. •o V

a

-^

i-

r l a *i •H R M

^

J>

s e • sin " and " s v a d ' ze " t e " and " toe ^ " z o e " and " z v a d " are not differentiated in pronunciation. " z e " , " z o e " , " z v a d " and " s e " are often pronounced like " jim ". The five unnecessary letters are partly responsible for the foreigner's failure to distinguish " te " and " {e ", which is a cardinal error.

Vowels are as follows : [reading from right to left): mul TsHl mil myl mal wal

IBStliVi.

iS^r

mol neyl mel

^•^ <y- -y-'ayn

The letter 'ayn in the Urdu script is not realized as a consonant in any form of spoken Hindustani. Syllables in which "ayn occurs in Urdu spelling are pronounced with the vowels a, a or e, according to derivation and stracture, and are so represented in the romanic spelling. See footnote on p. 152, and various examples on pp. 4-6, 12, 14, 155, 259, 274, 276, 298, 302, 309. I t wiH be noticed that some words have more than one romanic form, e.g., dafa and dsfa, mwamyls and mamla, mwaf and maf.

xl INTRODUCTION

THE fiSViWAaAfll OR UINDI kLFIUBEl'

(Cr. Table I)

Its

go

13 (Wis)

V» (gs)

50 (ks)

lis

ohe

IT

[3^1 •

5

4= 5

5

t h s

' da

dhe

23

PS

X

13

P3

phs

T5

be

bh9

Did

ta

V3

INTRODUCTION xli

1, Voael S y l l a b l e s :

> :5 a y 1 w hj e sy o sw &r) ah

2. Cor^scuisnl-vc-.vsl S y l l a b l e s :

ka kfl liy 1 1 k™ ku ke

^ w fe ^ ^ ^ ^ kaj ko ke-K ksi; ksh

S i :n l l a r ly througftout. tin? s y l l a b a r y .

GRAMMAR

NOUNS

It will be sufficient at first if the beginner leams one case in addition to the nominative—viz. the oblique or postpositional, which is used with all postpositions. The vocative can be learnt a little later.

Nouns have two declensions and three cases. The cases are : (a) nominative, (b) oblique, postpositional or locative, and (c) vocative. See Notes on Cases, p. 8.

FIRST DECLENSION

This contains a few mascuhne nouns ending in -a, all masculine nouns not ending in -a, and all fenunine nouns whatever their ending. All these nouns are indeclinable in their singular. In the plural they are declined alike, except in the nominative, which is formed in three ways, as follows:—

(i) Masculine nouns nominative plural ho change (ii) Feminine nouns nominative plural add-aq (or-eg

ending in -i in conversation)

(iii) Other feminine nominative plural add -ei) nouns

Examples:— (i) Masculine nouns ending in -a or -a.

Singular Plural Nominative: raja raja Oblique: raja rajaog Vocative: raja rajao

2 • TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

Nominative; Obijque: (Vocative:

Sitûlar dliobi, washerman dhobi dhobi

Plural dhobi dhobiog dhobio)

So:— ghar, house : ghar, gharog (ghgro) bycdiu, scorpion : bycchu, byccliuog (bycchuo)

(ii) Feminine nouns ending in -i. Nominative: batti, lamp bsttiai) (or battieg in

conversation) Oblique: bstti battiog (Vocative: batti battio) Note that dhobi and batti, though both ending in -i,

differ in the nominative plural because one is masculine, and the other feminine.

In speaking, but not in writing, feminine nouns in -i very often make their plural in -erj, as Isfki, i3|;kieT|.

Feminine nouns in -ia make their plural as if the singular ended in - i : —

cyjia, sparrow, little bird; pliiral: cyi;iti9, cypog (voc. ; cypo)

(iii) Other feminine nouns. Singitlar Plural

Nominative : mez, table mezeg Obhque: mez mezog Vocative: mez mezo

So:— mala,/., necklace : malaeg, malaog (malao) jhapi,/ . , broom : jhajTieg, jhaûog (jhapio)

Note once more that all nouns of this declension are identical in declension except in the nominative plural.

Urdu speakers dislike declining nouns ending in -ao, -aoi), -ae or -aerj, sometimes eveii those ending in -o, and adopt various devices to avoid doing so.

gaot), «(.,"village; paog, m., foot; daog, m., trick primarily in wrestling, are kept unchanged.

NOUNS 3

bhao, m., rate, price, is coniined to the singular; ghao, m., wound, makes plural oblique ghaoi), but is often replaced by zsxm,»»., plural oblique zsxmoi).

For nao, / . , boat, the pluralformsnaveq,navog,may be heard occasionally under Hindi influence, but in Urdu nao is used even in the plural nominative, More often kyfti, also meaning boat, is substituted for it.

For gae, cow, the forms gaeg or gayeg andgayoq would be correct according to rule, but as far as possible they are avoided. Sometimes they say gae t»yl, cows and bulls, etc., to avoid saying gaeg.

rae, /., opinion, is always kept singular. foJ;o, m. {= English photo}, photograph, is either kept

unchanged or altered to foj;u, which may easily be declined; oblique plural, fo(;uog.

souiîo is not declined,

Under the First Declension, masculine nouns, come the following:—

A. Some nouns ending in -a or -a, (a) Words denoting relatives of a generation older than

one's own. abba, father mswsa, mother's sister's bapdada, m.-pl. ancestors husband csca, fattier s younger nana, mother's father

brother pordada, dada's father dada, father's father aja, dada's father kaka, father's elder brother p9mana, nana's father lala, father, etc. (Hindu phwppa, phupa, phupha. '

word) . father's sister's husband mama (mamui)), mother's taya, father's elder brother

brother Exception: swsra, father-in-law; oblique, swsre.

To these must be added aka, elder brother; bhoiya, respectful word for brother; l9i;aka, m. oifem. .person of combative disposition,

4 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

xwda, God baba, bava, old or holy man mwlla, Muslim priest raja, rajs, king mawlana, learned Muham- rana, kind of rajah

madan hymalia, the Himalayas derya, river x^lifa, xalifa,* vice-regent, gyrja, church (building, title given to barber, tailor

service)

Examples:—

. caca: plural, caca, cacaori (cacao) dsrya : ,, darya, daryaog (daryao) xahfa : ,, xaliia, xalifaog (xalifao)

bapdada, ancestors, usually does not decline at all, but occasionally it is like dada, making bapdadaori, etc.

B. xansamai), cook, steward, has all singular and nominative plural xansamaQ; oblique plural, xansamaoQ (vocative plural, xansamao).

C. Nouns ending in -go, -jo, such as yezalgo, writer of ghazals (lyrics); ^ybjo, over-critical; jsngjo, bellicose, insert y before og or o of the plural oblique or vocative, as yazalgoyog.

iii (a) Feminine nouns ending in -3 change -a to -a and add eg in the nominative plural:—

faxta, dove, plural faxtaeg; xala, mother's sister, xalaeg; dsfs, a time, a section in a book, d»faer|.

Arabic feminines ending in -a, not oftei* found in the plural, are declined in the same way. Such are;—

valda, mother; fatyha, first sum in the Quran (sometimes masculine); malka, queen.

{b) The sufhx -sahybs, lady, never used alone, takes

* x$lifa is a. word of Arabic origin and is feminine in form, b u t is masculine in use.

NOUNS 6

the Persian plural -sahyban. In actual use the word is almost always sahab. Thus the poet Anis speaks of valyds sahsb, a mother,

(c) Feminine nouns in -a ('9, i.e. ^n, see p. 6} usually change -a to -ei) in the plural:—

V3za, fashion, etc., vszeg.

bhai, probably shortened from bhai, is used only in the vocative singular. It differs in meaning from bhai, which means brother, cousin, man of the same profession or race, etc. In the vocative it has a suggestion of respect; it would not be used by a master in speaking to a servant, but it is occasionally used to a sister, and very rarely even to a wife.

bhai is just as freely addressed to a woman as to a man. It means " m y good fellow", "my-good man" , " m y good woman ". It is very commonly used in addressing a wife or any girl. It imphes familiarity, not respect, and therefore would not be employed in speaking to a superior. A wife does not call her husband bhai, for by supposition he is her superior. An English lady who knew "Urdu well would rightly speak to her servants as bhai, and they would not even notice that she had done so.

SECOND DECLENSION

Almost all masculine nouns ending in -a or -a. There are no feminine nouns in this declension.

Nominative: Oblique: {Vocative:

Shiîdar bakra, goat bskre bakre

Plural bakre bakroT) bskro)

The ending -ah in Urdu script of some Arabic and Persian woroB is pronounced -a. The spelling -eh is not usual in Roman, for the h is silent. As the short vowels written a, y, w in Roman are rarely written at all in Urdu, bandah is in Urdu written simply ' bndh'. The oblique singular, vocative singular, and even the nomin-

8 TiACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

at ive plural are in Urdu script sometimes written exactly like the nominative singular, but never pronounced the same, for they change the ending -ah to -e,

Something similar holds of the words in the next section, those which end in -a (-»', i.e. 'syn, see supra, p. xxxix), such as mawqa. The oblique singular, vocative singular and nominative plural of mswqa are mawqe. When the short vowel of the second syllable in Urdu script is omitted, there is no difference in writing between the nominative singular and these cases. In Roman, however, they are written mawqe, and the nominative singular mawqa.

[See ako mazbah. p. 7.] Nouns in -a often have a feminine form in -!; as bakra,

he-goat; bakri, she-goat. Those in -a sometimes have a sunilar form, as bacca, male young one; bacci, female; bands, servant (of God}, your servant (ceremonious); feminine: bandi; another form, bandi, means maidservant.

Most masculine nouns in -a with final 'syn in Urdu script (i.e. a') belong to this declension. The commonest are :•—

mawqa, opportunity mawza, town nafa, profit mwrabba, square zyla, small section of the bwrqa, dress covering woman

country, part of a 'tshsil' from head to foot' matba, printing press mysra, line of verse

The last syllable of these is pronounced -a, as mawqa, zyla, etc., and they are declmed accordingly. The 'syn must' be inserted in writing the Urdu script. In Urdu script the nominative and oblique singular are the same, the short vowel of the second syllable liot being wiritten, but in Roman the oblique is mawqe.

mawqa, mawqe: mawqoi) (mawqo)

ilea, reading, studj t were mwtala. C

mwtalea, mwtale

mwtalea, reading, study, is often pronounced and declined as if .t were mwtala. Otherwise it is as follows :—

NOUNS 7

Actually the plural does not occur:—

vaqia, event, occurrence, has vaqe, vaqeog (vaqeo)

A noun ending in -aq is declined like one in -a, except that the final vowel is nasal, thus :—

kuag, a well; kueg, kuog (kuog)

Similar are dhuaq, smoke; ruaij, small hair on body. mazbah fprononnced mazba), place of sacrifice. As

spoken this word is declined like bskra—viz., mazba, mazbe, mazbog, mazbo. In Urdu script the nominative and oblique singular are alilce.

rwpia, rwpaya, rupee; rwpae, rwpaog kyrays, rent, fare; kyrae, kyrayog

When nouns of this declension are compounded with the Persian endings -ban, -flar, -baz, or -var, or, in the case of proper names, have the word Jab, xan, or lal added to them, they are put into the oblique singular, as :—

thekedar, contractor tâttebaz, jester galleban, shepherd sylsylevar, in order ryjtedar, relative

We also get nygebban (as well as nygahban), although nygah is feminine and belongs to the first declension.

Proper names :—

bute fah, swbe xan, pyare lal

Some Persian and Arabic nouns endmg in -a belong to the first declension (see pp. 4, 5). The following common ones, however, belong to the second. They are mascuhne.

tamaja, an efitertain- majra, remarkable event, ment wonder

masala, ingredients n9j"a, intoxication dava, claim rawsalla, prayer-mat mwjra, payment on account,

salutation, dance


mane, m.j>l., meaning or meanings. It is plural even when it means one meaning :—

ys ke ek mane yeh hayi) this is one meaning oi it do mane two meanings yn manog meg - with this meaning, with

these meanings

NOTES ON CASES

Accusative

The idea of the accusative is expressed in Urdu by either [a) the nominative, or (6) the oblique case with ko (to or for), or with some other postposition, ko is used when the noun or pronoun is thought of as definite. It is always' necessary with names of persons, with first and second personal pronouns, and also with third personal pronouns when they refer to animate beings. With inanimate or unimportant things ko often has the effect of English " t h e " , as:—

bylli dekhi, saw a cat* bylli ko dekha, saw the cat .

Oblique or Postpositional

This is used with all postpositions.

Locative or Instrumental

This case has the same form as the oblique or postpositional, and therefore has not been given in the declensions above. I t is used without postpositions; if a postposition occurs, the case is called not locative or instrumental, but oblique or postpositional. The locative or instrumental case is used :—

(m) to express at or in or to a place, {b) in time phrases, (c) as an instrumental case to show means or cause

or instrument. ,

• See p. S3.

/ NOUNS

Very often the oblique or postpositional case with a postposition may be substituted for it.

Examples of Locative or Instrumental Case ;—

voh syalkof rahta hay he lives in Sialkot V—" ,.-• voh gwjranvale gaya he went to Gujranwala^-"^ mere ghar aya he came to my house ~--'' dyn rat night and day, continuously \.. ek baje at one o'clock mangal ke dyn on Tuesday

Along with these should be given examples of an old locative, or perhaps oblique, case in -or) :— twm dudhog nshao bathe in milk, i.e., may you

prosper! hazarog man pani paâ rain fell to the amount of

thousands of maunds of water

saykfor) admi khai;e the hundreds of men were standing (men to the number of hundreds)

mayi) bhukhog mar raha hug I am dying of hunger

Nouns referring to a smgle person are often made plural" out of respect. They are always plural when connected with twm or ap, you, either expressed or understood. But the form of the noun remains singular except in the nominative of second declension nouns. The form for the oblique and the vocative remains singular.

twm b3cce ho you are a child, or you are children

ap ke sahabzade vahag the your son was there, or your sons were there

ap ke sahabzade ne,kaha your son said. This could not be sahsbzadog, for that would mean " sons"

ap ki sahabzadi kahti hayg your daughter says ap Id sahabzadiar) kahti your daughters say

hayg


ay lafke, kya ksr rahe ho boy, what are you doing? sy l3[ko boys!

Words denotmg pairs of things, such as scissors, spectacles, are in most cases singular in Urdu.

qsynci,/., scissors aynak,/., spectacles

Also all words for trousers, as : paejama, m., and patlon, / . Exceptions to the rule are dsstans, m., glove; dastane, gloves; hathkaî,/., handcuff; hathkecia^), handcuffs; also words for socks.

GENDER

Urdu has two genders, masculine and feminine. Though for many nouns it is impossible to give any rule that will help in determining then: gender, for many others useful rules can be given.

Preliminary Rule which must be Regarded as Over-riding all otiier Rules :

All nouns which mean males are masculine and those • meaning females are feminine. To this there is no real exception. The following peculiarities should be noted;—

qablld, m., family, and ghar, in.., house, family, are • sometimes incorrectly used for "wife". They are

always masculine. 9sami,/ , , vacancy, tenant. (When meaning " tenant"

is sometimes masculine.) S9vari, /. , riding; also means passenger in train, ship,

carriage, etc. sarkar , / . , government. When it means " his honour "

or "your honour" (to a man) it is masculine, but for " her honour " or "your honour." (woman) is feminine.

polls, pwlis, /. , the police as a body, raiyat,/., plural: ryaya, subject, tenant. mevayjfi,/., cattle.

Few words denoting animals have both masculine and

NOUNS 11 feminine forms in ordinary use. Most have only one. Thus we have :—

Masculine:— paryndo, bird wllu, owl kswva, crow wqab, eagle

cita, cheetah doryndo, ravenous beast hsyvan, beast bhefia, wolf {feminine very

rare) teijdva, panther, leopard

(femimne rare) bhaln, bear

]omi;i, fox mschli, fish mekkhi, fly gylahri, squirrel koel,'koel' (kind of cuckoo)

Feminine:— cypa, little bird cil, kite majTia, starling mwnia, amadavat baf;er, quail faxta, dove

Note :— cuha, m., rat, has feminine cuhia, cuhi, which means

mouse, not rat.

MASCULINE NOUNS I. Nearly all nouns ending in -a or -a are masculine. Exceptions:— Arabic nouns: most Arabic abstract nouns in -a are

feminine, as;— X3ta, fault dwa, prayer bsla, calamity Jyfa, |afa, healing kimia, chemistry

and six more mentioned lower down under Arabic infinitives.

Also some which are not abstract:— dwnya, world dsva (also davai), medicine hgva, air yyza, food


2. Practically every Arabic noun ending in -», i.e., -e with "silent h " (see p. 5), is masculine; e.g. inwaml3, transaction, etc,

Exce-plions:— tawba,/., repentance dsfa, /., a time, as in " three times ", section of a book martaba,/., a time, as in " three times ",

A lew Persian words common in Urdu are feminine. Only the following are worth nothing:—

saza,/., punishment daya,/., deceit psrva,/., caring karavansara, inn

A few Sanskrit words common in Urdu are feminine. Only the following are worth noting :—

ghata, black cloud mala, necklace puja, worship sabha, assembly jafa, matted hair sitla, smallpox dsya, mercy, pity kyrpa, mercy, kindness

A few common nouns in -a are feminine :—

Birds mayna, /., starling mwnia, /., female of small cypa, /., sparrow, little bird bird

/ama, /., pied robin

Geographical Names ganga,/,, the Ganges jamna,/., the Jumna • ajodhia, / . , name of a town lanka, /., Ceylon

Others are :—' gwiia,/., doll pwxia,/., folded paper for * pachva, /., west wind powder angia,/., bodice pwrva,/., east wind

janghia,/., drawers

Of nouns in -a, as distinguished from -a, hardly any are feminine apart from those which denote females. We have

NOUNS 13

already noted tawba, /., repentance; ddfa, / . , a time or section of a book; and mertaba, a time.

Words denoting feniales are :— xala,/., aunt faxts. /. , female dove Z8CC9, /., woman who has recently bome a child mada, /.; a female borra, m., lamb, can be feminine if mada, female, is added.

-a is a feminine ending in some Arabic noims used in Urdu, as molka, queen, valda, mother {see pp. 4, 5).

3. Nouns in -ao :— bsnao, m., making, etc. bhao, m., price

Almost all are abstract. Exception:—

nao,/. , boat

4. Nouns in -pen :— bacpan, m., childhood

All are abstract. No exceptions,

5. Arabic infinitives of the forms IV to VIII, and X are almost all masculine. The following are the details. The exceptions given are all that need be learnt except by advanced students. Urdu has about 950 nomis of these forms, pf which about 620 are masculine and 330 feminine.

All ending in -I are feminine. All ending in -at are feminine. All ending in -a (but not ra) are masculine,

Form IV yqtal; about 130 words, excluding those in -at and -a.

They are masculine, with four common exceptions :— yslah, / . , correction iza, /., pain ymdad, /., help ynja, /., literary composition

Form V taqattwl (in this form the second radical letter of

U , TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

the Arabic, is doubled); about 173 words, plus fourteen ending in -i which are feminine. They are masculine, except'three rather common ones :—

tsvsjjwh,/., attention tavaqqw,/., hope tsmanna,/., desire

Form VI taqatwl; sixty-six words, excluding twelve in -i and three in -a. The sixty-six are all mascuhne. except one :—

tanaswb, m., proportion tavazw, /., politeness

Form VII ynqytal; thirty-five words, all mascuUne, Form VIII yqtytal; 130 words, all mascuhne, with ten '

exceptions, of which seven are common, viz.:—

ybtyda,/., beginning yltyja,/., petition 3'ntyha,/., end yttyla,/., announcement ehtyaj,/., need ehtyat,/.,'care ystylah, /., conventional

usage in Hterature

Form X ystyqtal; sixty-eight words, all masculine with four exceptions, two of them common, viz.:—

ystedad,/., capacity, ability ystyda,/., request

Words of the type mwfaylat, mwfayla; these aU end in either -a and are masculine, or in -at and are feminine.

mwhasra, »»., besieging mwhafyzat,/., protection

mamle, m., affair, etc., omits the first and third vowels of the Arabic word, and thus has two syllables instead of four.

FEMININE N O U N S -

1. Nounsendingin -i. The only exceptions to be noted are:—

(a) The every-day words pani, ?«., water; ji , m., heart, etc.; ghi.w., akind of oily butter; tnoti, m., pearl; dahi, m., curds.

Vuvv--

NOUNS 15

(6) Names of months; janveri, January; jwlai, July; farvarl, February; may, May,

Some people make these feminine, others again give the feminine gender to English months ending in -i, but the masculine gender to Persian months with the same ending. .

ic) mazi, m. and/ . , past tense (sometimes feminine): mwtaoddi, m., transitive

Nouns of the second declension—i.e., nouns in -a or -a, which denote animate beings—usually change -a to -i to denote the female. See under Second Declension, page 5.

j^'^/^T Abstract nouns ending in -at, as ;— ^y yzzst,/., honour • hyfazat,/.. protection

See also under Arabic infinitives.

3. Abstract nouns ending in -yj. Most of these are Persian. No exceptions,

danyj", /. , wisdom malyj, / . , rubbing

4. Abstract nouns ending in -ha); and -yat- No excep-^ tions.

ghabrahsj;,/., distress, bsnavaf, /., making perturbation

5. Most nouns ending in -ah. For -gah, see next paragraph. Two common exceptions :—

gwnah, m., sin nykah, m., marriage ceremony

Between thirty and forty nouns end in -gah, place; all are feminine except:—

qyblagah, m., ceremonious word for father xa rg^ , m., royal tent or palace

tamajagah, place of amusement, and bandargah, harbour, are both masculine and feminine.

6. Arabic infinitives of the form taqtil (form II) are all feminine except one :— . •'

tasxir,/., conquest taviz,»»., amulet


There are approximately 230 of these nouns. In addition there are forty nouns belonging to this form which end in either -at (all feminine) or -9 (all masculine). See also page 13.

7. Words in -ah or -eh, with the h pronounced at least in deliberate speech, are nearly all feminine, as:—

J9g9h jageh,/., place - vajah vajeh,/., reason, cause

swish swleh, /,, peace

Letters of the Alphabet

There are, thirty-five letters in the alphabet (see Table supra), of which twenty-one are feminine, viz.:—

Seventeen ending in -e (including toe and zoe). Three ending' in -1 (dal, âl, zal). One ending in -o (vao).

The remaining fourteen are masculine,

ADJECTIVES

Adjectives, except most of those which end in -9, and some which end in -9 (see p . 17), are indeclinable.

Almost all adjectives ending in -a, and some ending in -9, are declined as follows :—

They end in -a or -» before or when connected with masculine nouns in the nominative singular, or in what we may call the objective or accusative case without ko,

They end in -e for any other part of the singular and for the whole plural of inascuKne nouns.

They end m -i with any feminine noun.

ugca m»kan, a high house ugce makan, high houses _ ugce makan meg, in a high ugcemakanoi) par, upon high

house houses

ADJECTIVES 17

Igmbi gafi, a long carriage Iambi gaîag, long carriages Iambi gaj;! mer), in a long Iambi gaîog se, from long

carriage carriages

Persian and Arabic adjectives in -a rarely change. Adjectives in -a do not often cliange. These are

generally Persian or Arabic.

meri maij abhi zynda hay my mother is still alive

The following is a fairly full list of those which change :—

fwlana, a certain manda (in thakamanda), ganda, dirty, foul tired xasa, pretty good, etc. becara, bycara, unfortun-kamina, mean, base ate, poor sada, plain, simple -zada, bom of, i.e., son divans, mad

The adjectival ending -zada, as in raiszada, gentleman's son, ischanged to -zadi to mean daughter, begana, foreign, not one's own, and taza, fresh, generally change.

jwda, separate, very rarely changes; zara, a little, etc., adverb or adjective, sometimes changed in former days, but now practically never changes.

ADJECTIVES AS NOUNS

AU adjectives can be used as nouns, and when so used are declined as nouns. I t follows that an adjective which does not change for the feminine cannot have a feminine form when used as a noun. Thus we can have bycari, meaning poor woman, but we cannot have a feminine form for bwzwrg, elderly, e tc , or zynda, living,

bycari ka koi ghar nahig the poor- woman has3.no house

hamare bwzwrgog ne kaha our elders or ancestors have \y said

dawlatmandog meg among the'rich yaribog ki roî poor people's food

http://has3.no


bwzwrg, yarib and dewlatmand have no feminine form.

ka, of, added to nouns and pronouns, forms an adjective. Being an adjective ending in -a, it agrees with the following noun:— _

bhailta beta brother's son s--"''^ ghsr ki khy'fkiag the house's windows v^ ~~ banie ki dukanka darvaza the shopkeeper's shop's door baje admiogka makan great men's house (house

suitable for great men) sukhi Iskpka ^her a heap of dry woodv-'

ADJECTIVES AS ADVERBS

Adjectives are often used as adverbs; when so used they agree with their nouns or pronouns like adjectives. To understand the rule for agreement, note the following cases:—

voh sccha gati hsy she ^ngs well accha lykhti hay she writes well

In .these two sentences gati, sing, and lykhti, write, have a transitive sense, and accha is a kind of object, meaning " a good thing ".

bapa, big, great, is sometimes, but not often, used as an adverb meaning "very" . For "very" , bahwt is commoner. The four-volume Urdu dictionary, nur wl lw\a t , under baâ or baê gives the following instances of the meaning " very " :—

bsî bhari yalti a very great error b9i;a zyddi very obstinate baâ zalym very tyrannical hs\e nek . very good or pious bafe pak very holy /

etc. ^

In these baf^ is declined like an adjective. Repetition of adjectives—see under Repetition of Words,

pp. 130-33.

ADJECTIVES 19

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

In Urdu there are no real forms for the comparative and superlative. Comparison is expressed by the postposition se, than, with the ordinary form of the adjective.

kwtte-se choâ, dog-than small, smaller than a dog U-' sab-se chofa, all-tlian small, smallest of all\^„-.

Sometimes zyada, more; swr bhi, more still; kahi;), much more; or the words mwqabyle, nysbet, comparison, are used.

byUi zyada (awr bhi) syani the cat is cleverer (still hey cleverer)

bskre-se bakri zyada kali the she-goat is blacker than \^„ hay the he-goat

Here we could say: awr bhi kali, still- blacker.

mah ki nysbst sals hojyar in comparison with the gar-hay dener, the groom is in

telligent, i.e., he is more intelligent

malise kahig hojyar much more intelligent than v - ' the gardener

hyndwstan ke mwqabyle in comparison with India. V--' meg ynglystan bshwt Englajid is very small chofa hay ,

A few Persian comparatives in -tgr, and superlatives in -tarin, are used in Urdu, t u t they can hardly be said to contain much idea of comparison. Thus :—

donog meg yeh behtar hay in the two, i.e., of the two, this is better

Here for behtar we could say: accha, good. Similarly, bahwt behtar means " very good", "all right".

kamterJn, your insignificant servant, is used in signing letters, but not for purposes of comparison. Literally it means "least" .

We do, however, sometimes find yeh behtarin tariqs


hay, this is the best method; and a few similar expressions.

Arabic comparatives, too, have lost their comparative meaning.

afzsl, excellent ala, exalted

1 ek 2 do 3 tin 4 car 5 page 6 che, chgy 7 sat 8 ath 0 naw

10 das 11 gyara * 12 bara 13 tera 14 cawda 15 pandra 16 sola 17 satra 18 atthara 19 wnnis 20 bis 21 ykkis 22 bais 23 teis 24 cawbis 25 paccis 26 chsbbis 27 sattais 28 atthais

NUMERALS CARDINAL NUMBERS 29 wnattis 30 tis 31 ykattis 32 battis 33 tetis, tegtis 34 cawr|tis 35 paygtis 36 chattis 37 saygtis, 38 a^tis 39 wntalis 40 calls 41 yk talis 42 bealis 43 tetalis, tegtalif 44 cswalis 45 paygtalis 46 chealis 47 saygtalis 48 a^talis 49 •wncas 50 pacas 51 ykyavan 52 bavan 53 trepan 54 cawvan 55 pacpan 56 chappan

57 satavan 58 attli - ®^* 59 wnsath 60 sath 61 yksath 62 basath 63 tresath 64 cawsal;h,

cawgsath 65 paygsath 66 cheasath 67 sarsath 68 atsath 69 wnhattar

i 70 sattar 71 ykhattar 72- bahattar 73 tyhattar 74 cawhattar 75 pacbattar 76 chyhattar 77 sathattar 78 athattar 79 wnasi 80 assi 81 ykasi 82 beasi 83 tyrasi

• Final s (for ah) has an open quality somewhat like tha t of a,

84 cawrasi 85 jwcasi 86 cnyasi 87 sstasi 88 athasi 89 nswasi 90 n s w e 91 ykanve 1000 (ek) hazar;

or ksjot

NUMERALS

92 banve 93 tyranve 94 cawranve 95 pycanve 96 chyanve' 97 S8ttanve 98 atthanve

21

99 nynnanve 100 S3W 101 ek saw ek 156 eksawchsppan 125 S9vas3w 250 (]_hai saw 375 pswne car saw

100,000 (ek) lakh; 10,000,000 (ek) karot

For S9va, âi and pawne in the above numbers, 125, 250 and 376, see below,

854,697,253 is pycasi kerO[, chealis lakh, sattanve hazar, do saw trepan.

1st pahyla (fern, pahyli)

2nd dusra

ORDINAL NUMBERS

3rd tisra (fern. 5th pagcvarj tisri)

4th C9wtha 6th chata, cha|;ha

Alter the first six -vag is added to the cardinal.

12th baravag 16th solavar) 42nd bealisvag lOOfh sawvai]

Ordinals are declined like adjectives in -a such as b3\;a; those ending in -vaij have the linal vowel nasalised.

tisri bar, the third time ' ' wnnisvig ' dafa, the nme-"^' teenth time

ek, one, is added to some numerals to express the idea of approximately, as : bis ek, about 20; car ek, about 4; saw. ek, about 100, do ek, however, means " a few ".

After the first few numerals only the tens (20, 30, 40, etc.), 100, 1000, and a few others are used with ek in this way.

ek adh means " a very few, one here and there ". do car and do car das pane mean " a few" :— • do car das pane admi jama a few people collected '•^

hue


1. Fractional Numbers

pawn, meaning " three-quarters ", is used with weights and measures, for tlie time 12.45 a.m. or p.m., and with ' karoc (kajo);), ten million. It is always smgular.

pawn mil three-quarters of a mile ' - " ' '.- -^ . pswn ser three-quarters of a ser (ser = 2 lbs.) '-' pawn bsje at 12.45 a.m, or p.m. v—^^ pawn bajahsy it is 12.45 o'clock w

pawne (but not pawn), minus a quarter, is used with all numerals from 2 to 99.

pawne car, 3-J pawne sola ane, 15 | annas pswne pycasi, 84 |

S9va, plus a quarter, is used with we^hts and measures, with all numerals except the numeral one, and for the time 1.15 a.m. or p.m. It takes the noun in the singular. .

sava man, a ma\md and a quarter (maund = about 78 lbs.) sava baje, at 1.15 seva calis, 40J

Note that when used with saw, hazar, lakh, ksro|;, it adds a quarter of the whole amount.

sava hazar, 1250 sava karot, 12,500,000

êfh, one and a half, is used with weights and measures, for the time 1.30, and with the numbers saw, hazar, lakh, karof, to which it adds half the total amount.

4eth rwpia, a rupee and a ê^h saw, 150 half 4ei;h lakh, 150,000

êth baje, at 1.30 dhai , two and a half, is used in the same way as ^&0^,

and with the same words, but normally takes a plural noun, whereas ê^h takes the singular.

dhai gaz, 2^ yards <}hai payse, 2^ pice qhai hazar, 2,600 ^hai baje, at 2.30

safhe, plus a half, is used with all numbers from 3 to 99;

NUMERALS 23

it is not used without a number. I t is not used with saw, hdzar, lakh or karot;.

' sa^he car Jwf, 4^ ft. sathe sat ssw, 750 sa^he tin baje, 3.30 o'clocl; sai;he tin lakh, 350,000

saykca, htmdred, is used in two ways :—

(a) for" per cent., and is then undedined; as per hundred:—

am tin rwpse saylq;a bykte mangoes were selling at Rs. 3 V--the per hundred

(6) saykcoq, hundreds :— S3yk[oi) admi jama ho gse hundreds of men collected '-—- saykfog ghaje pani pat gaya hundreds of gharas of water w

fell on him, i.e., he was greatly humiliated

sadi, /. , a Persian word, means " hundred " and is used as follows :—

(a) per cent., per hundred, in the expression : fi sadi. »^ws ne fi sadi nsvve ko naraz he annoyed ninety out of

kar dia every hundred, or ninety per cent, of them

(6) to mean "century", as : bisviq sadi, the 20th century.

A number of Persian and Arabic numerals are used in high-flown Urdu; it is not necessary to give them here,

The only common collective numeral noim is kofi, /. , a score.

II. Fractional Parts

There are words for a half, a third, and a quarter, but after that the ordinal number is used with hyssa, m., part. adha, adh, half pao, chawthai, a quarter nysf, half pagcvari hyssa, a fifth part tyhai, a third part chata hyssa, a sixth part.


bisvag hyssa, a twentieth do tyhai, two-thirds part tin cgwthai, three-quarters

Examples :~ pao kos, a quarter of a kos tyhai rat, a third of the do tyhai sytare, two-thirds night

of the stars adhe sytare, half the stars tin cawthai samandsr, three- adh ser, lialf a ser

quarters of the sea In aYLttese cases the noun at the end "ffiil decide tiieirainber and gender of the verb or adjective following:—

tin cowthai ssmandor kala three-quarters of the sea was tha black

Apart from actual arithmetical terminology, fractions more comphcated than these can be expressed as follows :— page meg se tin hysse three parts out of five;

three-fifths nyimanve mer| se pycasi eighty-five parts out of

hysse ninety-nine

Ml. " T i m e s "

" Times ", as in so many times, or as the size of anything, is expressed by gwna; feminine, gwni.

dwgwna, duna, dogwna twice the size of, etc. tygwna, tin gwna three times the size of, etc. C9Wgwna, car gwna four times the size of, etc.

After that the ordinary cardinal numbers are used, as :— pacas gwna fifty times the size of saw gwna 100 times the size of, or as

much as yeh t a i i kytab ws' choti this big book is eight times

se ath gwni bhari hay as heavy as that httle one • do csnd (indechnable) is the Persian for dogwna, and is fairly common in Urdu.

NUMERALS 25*

IV. " T i m e " or " T i m e s " " T i m e " or " t imes" , in statements of frequency, is

expressed by dafa, / . ; bar, / . ; and mertebe, / . The noun is always singular. pohyli msrteba (or dafs) the first time do mertabs (or dsfa) twice ek dafa once, once upon a time tin bar three times Itytni dsfa how often ? ab ki defa (now's the time), this tune

69f9 is the commonest of these words.

V. Single, Double, Threefold and Fourfold Single, double, threefold, fourfold, for garments, doth,

strancb in a rope or in twine, also of words or sentences said singly or repeated, are expressed by:—•

ykshra; /., ykahri, single dohra; /., dohri double tehra; /., tehri threefold cawhra; / . , cswhri fourfold

Higher numbers are not ordinan'Iy used, The word savari, a riding, is used with one of these

words for a conveyance, such as ôH, a dooly, or palki, / „ a palanquin, carrying one, two, three or four passengers at the time spoken of. Thus dohri sevari means a conveyance with two passengers.

V(. Indefinite Numerical Adjectives See page 31.

ksi, ka i -^ , a good many, ksy, how many ? some thoê (plural of thoâ). a

bahwt, many few, few baz, some kwch, some (indecl.) sab, all sare (plural of sara), all kwl, the whole of, in har, every

totality owr, others sksar, most, the majority


kwch with singular noun is like English " some " with a singular noun. With plural nouns , (usually denoting human beings), it means "some, a few".

Note: bai admi, a good many people; kay admi, how many people ?

V!l. Expressions i ike: all four, all ten, both of them, all ten of them

Expressions like: all four, all ten, both of them, all ten of them, are rendered in two ways :—

(a) By addmg -or) to the number. This occurs only with a few of the smaller numbers, as :—

tinog, all three dssog, all ten do takes the form doaog.

(h) By saying the number twice over, the first time in the genitive,

saw ke saw the whole hundred pacas ke pscas the whole fifty pgndra ke pandrs all the fifteen ath ke ajh the eight of them

See special note, p. 88.

PRONOUNS

The vocative, which of course occurs only in second person pronouns, is the same as the nominative. Pronouns have no special forms for the feminine.

twm kya kahti ho vWiat are you (fern.) saying? ap k 9 l ^ gai thir) i^^here had you (fem.) gone?

ham, we, is sometimes treated as masculine even though referring to women. The rules are as follows :—

(a) When h»m is used by a woman speaking of herself alone, it is masculme plural:—

PRONOUNS 27

hem abhi lawt ae hayr) I have just returned ' - ' '

(h) If ham refers to several women, and a plural feminine noun is inserted, the verb is feminine :—

ham donog bfkiari khel both of us girls were playing rahi thig

(c) When there is no noun, ham may be either mascu-Hne or feminine. Azad, the great Urdu styhst, makes some women say:—

jab tak hamari bat na kah until you say what we want,'''-^ dega, na pylaeggi we shall not give you

water

In this sentence pylaeqge would also have been correct. In all these it makes no difference whether the word hstn is actually expressed or not. The use of hem for " I " is common among old Delhi famihes in talking to servants and subordinates, but it should not be copied by foreigners. The student should always say niayq for " I " .

With the postposition ne, by, some pronouns have a form differing from the ordinary oblique. For the use of ne see p. 49. The postposition ka is not normally used with pronouns of the first and second persons (see a few lines down), a possessive adjective is used instead.

Nominative: niayri, I ham, we Possessive Adjective : mera hamara Ordinary Oblique: mwjh ham Oblique with n e : mayg ham

Nominative: tu, thou twm, you Possessive Adjective : tera twmhara Ordinary Obhque: twjh twm Oblique with n e : tu twm

For mwihko , ham ko, twjh ko, twm ko, we may always say mwjhe, hsmei), twjhe, twrnheg, without ko, Europeans should make a habit of using these short forms constantly.

ba can be employed with mwjh, ham, twjh, twm, if a


noun, or adjective used as a noun, comes between the pronoun and ka:— ^_^^

ham PanjabioT) ka dastur a custom of us Panjabis mwjh bsdqysmat ka hal the condition of me, un

fortunate one

mera, hemara, tera, twmhara, are adjectives in -a declined like ugca and Igmba; see p. 16. They aêe in gender and number with the thing possessed,

men lofki, my girl. twmhare nswkar, your servants

tu, thou, is employed in prayer, in poetry, and in conversation with little children.

twm, you, meaning either one person or more than one, is used in addressing boys and girls, servants, small shopkeepers, ordinary villagers, and other people of similar position. For people of higher rank than these ap is used.

ap is a respectful word for you (one or more persons). It takes its verb in the third person plural and is mdeclin-able. In ceremonious Urdu it often means he, she, they, the verb always being third plural.

apkawnha3T)? who are you? who are they?

If I meet a friend with a stranger and say ap kdwn hayri ? the only possible meaning is, " Who is he, your friend ? " But normally it would mean, "Who are you? I do not recognize you." ^'-

ap kab jaeggi when will you (feminine) go ?

An adjective related to twm or ap, or agreeing with a noun related to twm or ap, is plural, even when only one person is addressed or spoken of. Consequently adjectives in -a or -a which change will.in such cases end in -e when masculine and -i when feminine. Other adjectives do not change,

ap bgfe bhglamanss hayr) you are a very worthy man twm chote ho you are small

PRONOUNS 29

Both these sentences may refer to either one person or to several persons.

yeh, voh

Nominative:

Ordinary Oblique Oblique with ne : Nominative:

yeh, this; he.she, it (all near)

ys ys voh, that, he, she,

it (not near) ws ws

they yeh, these, (near)

yn ynhon voh, those,

(not near) wn wnhog

voh, referring to inanimate things,

they

Ordinary Obhque Oblique with n e ;

When yeh and occur as direct objects, they are often omitted; indeed, most pronouns are omitted far more frequently than in English.

msyg ne dekha phyr kya kaha ?

zamin dekhi ? nahir) delchi

lown, jo

I saw it ^^•-'^ .f^,^—' then what did you say ? (or

he, or she, they say) have you seen the land? u-

No, I have not

Singular Plural kawn, who ? . kawn kys kyn kys IqTihog jo, who, which jo jys jyn jys jynhog

Aswellasmayg, ham, tu, twm, the singular and plural of yeh, voh, kawn and jo have short forms for use with ko.

Nominative: Ordinary Oblique Oblique with n e :

Nominative: Ordinary Oblique Oblique with n e ;

Sing. Norn. yeh voh kawn jo

Obi. with ko. yse, ys ko wse, ws ko kyse, kys ko jyse, jys ko

PI. Norn. yeh voh kawn jo

Obi. with ko. jmheg, yn ko wnheg, wn ko kynheg, kynko jyrheg, jyn ko


koi Nominative: koi, some one, any one- No plural in

common use. Oblique : kysi. •The difference between kys, the oblique of kawn, who,

and kysi, the oblique of .koi, some one, any one, should be noticed:— ^, ^__,

kysi ka, someone's ^ kys ka, whose?

koi is also an indeclinable adverb meaning approximately, as :•—

msharaja ne koi car man- The Maharaja got work be-dyrog ka kam jwru ksrayB gun in about four temples

As with nodns, the nominative form of pronouns is often used for the objective, but this never happens with First and Second Personal Pronouns.

kya

kya, what ? is used only in the singular. The oblique is kahe.

kahe ka, of what ? ^,kahe ko, for what, why ? kahe meg âla, what did' . kahe par rskkha, what did

you put it in ? you put it on ? ^ Z

kwch

kwch, something, anything, is not declined and cannot be used with a postposition. As an adjective with a plural noun it means a few:—

kwch ls|;ke some boys kwch zamindarog ka baju some farmers suffered great

nwqsan hua loss (Ht. some farmers' great loss became) '

PRONOUNS 31

SO

so is' used only as a correlative to jo and cannot be followed by a postposition.

jo boega so kafega what he sows he wUI reap^

9wr 9Wr, other, others :—

Bwrog ne kia others did i t ' 9wrog se maggo ask it of others

All pronouns, except mayi), hem, tu, twm, can he used as adjectives qualifying noims.

A list of Indefinite Adjectives of Number was given on p. 25; the following can in conversation, but not in literature, be also pronouns :—

Nominative kai ek, some, a good many kai, a good many bahwt, many baz, some sksar, most people sab, all

Conversational ObliqtK

kaiog bahwtog baz, bazog gksaror) (rare even in speech) sab, sabhog

The following compound pronouns should be noted:—

Nominative jo koi, whoever (very rare

in nominative) jo kwch, whatever^^ 3wr kswn, who else ? awr kwch, something else kwch 9wr, some more sab kwch, everything 9wr kya, what else ? _ awr koij someone else, any-koi awrj one else . ^

Oblique. jys kysi {common in speech)

iwr kysi

&wr kahe awr kysi kysi 9wr

The idea of no one, nothing, is' expressed by adding a negative to koi and kwch.

32 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI-

koi nshui, no one v ^ kwch nahig, nothing).,-''^

koi koi means a few, one here and there; it is singular.

kwch kwch means some, a little; with a plural noun, a few, some.

koi na koi, some one or other; this can be an adjective. kwch na kwch, something or other.

koi no koi jsgah some place or other kysi na kysi jagah ' in some place or other

Beginners should notice the difference between kysi and kys :

kysi comes from koi; kysi ka, some one's kys comes from kawn : kys ka, whose ?

ap (reflexive), and xwd

We have seen the respectful use of ap. There is another use. ap is often reflexive, meaning self or selves, as in myself, yourselves.

mayg ap,-1 myself hsm ap, we ourselves tu ap, thou thyself twm ap, you yourselves voh ap, he himself, she her

self, it itself, they themselves

l3[ka ap, the boy himself lai-kiag ap_, the girls them- • selves

The form ap ap is not used. In this case tlie word xwd is used, ap xwd.

xwd means the same as ap (reflexive), but it is never followed by a postposition. It is always connected with the subject of the sentence, and when the subject is followed by ne, xwd follows ne :— .

mayri ne xwd kaha, or mayri I said it myself ne ap kaha

PRONOUNS 33

zp (with postpositions)

With ko file usual form is apne ap ko ; less common, apne ko.

With mei); apas meg, among ourselves, yourselves, themselves.

With other postpositions; 9pne, as apne se cho(;a, smaller than himself, herself, ourselves, themselves, etc.

spna

The word apna is used for my, our, your, their, his, her, when referring to the subject of the sentence. This occurs when the possessor is the subject. It is like the Latin SM«S, but applied to all persons, both numbers and both genders.

voh epni kytab psi;h rsha he is reading his book hsy

voh ws Id kytab p9i;h raha he is "reading another person's hay book ,

ham apni kytaber) ps^hte we read our books beyi)

The above rule is not always strictly adhered to, thus we may have:—

mayi) ne wse apni bivi ko I saw him beating his wife marte dekha

wn meg se kysi ko apni beyz- do not' let any one of them z9ti ns ksrane do permit hmiseli to be in

sulted [beyzzsti kama, insult; beyzzati karana, cause dishonour to be done, i.e., let one

self be insulted]

In these sentences Ws Id is changed to apni because of its position. Ambiguity is possible, but the context usually prevents this.

Other examples :— ;

wskelshjesevohysyrzsban' from his pronunciation he malum hota hay appears to be a foreigner


wse 8pne bgccori se bat kame Tet him speak to his childiien do

twm apne bsccor) se wse bat let him speak to your chil-karne do dren

The position of wse helps to decide the meaning here.

ws ki harkstog se badmaj by his deeds he seems to be malum hota hay a scoundrel

voh 9pni Jahad9t se badmaj (just think !) it was through sabyt hua his own evidence tliat he

was proved a scoundrel , yeh kys ki plefeg hayi) ? V - ^ t o a servant:) whoSe are

these plates? opni hoyg they are ours (i.e„ my

^ v master's) 9pni ]'an sab ko aziz hay "^^.ery one loves his o vn life 9pnog ki madad ha r -vaq t t^ne should always help one's

kami cable own people 3pna is often added to a possessive pronoira or noUn for the sake of emphasis :—

Yeh-.tneii a^tii kytab hay this is my own book vohsahabkaapnaghotahay\/?hat is the gentleman's own

horse

sa

The word sa is added to nouns, pronouns and sometimes verbs. The following are its meanings.

1. Like. Jer sa admi a man like a tiger -^-'^^ • |er si surat "-î. man looking like a tiger

This might also be ;— Jer ki si surat Appearance rather like a tiger barf se badal >/ snow-like clouds

Phrases like Jer sa janvar, a tiger-like animal, are not used if the first noun ends in -a or -a; thus they do not say

PRONOUNS 35

kwtta sa janvar; but if the order is changed and the second noun comes first the phrase is correct, as :—

voh gho|;;a tha kwtta sa that horse was dog-like (of ^ the size of a dog) ''

In these cases sa agrees in gender and number with the second noun, i.e., the noun with which comparison is made.

Instead of sa immediately after the noun (i.e., without ka intervening), jaysa is much commoner, as :—

kwtte jsysa dog-hke

The noun precedmg jaysa is in the oblique case.

2. So to speak, as it were :•— i

ek nala sa bahta tha a stream, so to speak, was"^ flowing ^

ek nsdi si bahti thi a river, as it were, was flowing

voh mar si gsi she almost died (she, as it x / were, died). This means she was shocked or dismayed

sa apees in number and gender with the subject,

3. When it is used with adjectives, it is hard to say what meaning, if any, it has. This explains why it is sometimes said to be intensive, having the sense of " very ", and sometimes to have the opposite sense, like English -ish. In most cases it is a mere habit of speech hke the " very' ' in the common English phrase "he 's not very well"- Actually it is never really intensive.

ytna sa, so much bahwt se, many ytni si {j) kala sa cehra, a face, so to

speak, black; a blackish face, or simply: a black face


When it follows the first and second personal pronouns, the pronouns are in the ordinary oblique case :—

mwjh sa. like me twjh sa, like thee

sa is not used with yeh, voh, jo, kya and kwch. Added to k9wn it slightly changes the meaning :—

kswn Z' voh kawn ls];ki hay? " ^ h a t girl is that? (I know

notlung aibout her) • "voh kawn si Istki hay ? which girl is that ? (out of the

girls who, I know, are-in the class)

kswn is used as a pronominal adjective with nouns denoting human beings.

jawn Added to jawn, an obsolete form of Jo, it has a similar

meaning:— /

jawnsacaho, le jao take away- whichever you / h k e

jawn si ghap pasand hay, -Whichever watch you like xarid lo (lit. is agreeable), buy

kol koi sa is " any you like ".

PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES

aysa, like this, this kmd of jsysa (relative), like which, which kind of

kaysa, what kind of, like vaysa, hke that '(chiefly n'iat? corcelaXivs to jeysa}

jaysi bat swnta hay, karta he talks as he hears others nsy talk [ht. what-kuid-ol

thing he hears, that-kind he does (i.e., speaks)]

PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES

ytna, so much or many

kytna, how much or many?

37

jytna, as much or many (relative)

wtna, so much or many • (usually correlative to jytna)

The following table of common adjectives, pronouns and adverbs should be studied:— Near:

yeh, this

Remote: voh, that

Interrogative: kawn, who ?

Relative : jo, who

Near : Remote: Interrogative: Relative:

33 53, this kind of ytna, so much ot

vsysa, that

ksysa, what

j&ysa, which

ab, now tab,then kab, when ? jab, when

many

,, wtna, so much or many

,, ? kytna, how much or many?

' jytna, as much or many

yahag, here vahag, there kahap, where ? jahag, where

tab, then, generally used in reasoning; not often of time except as correlative to jab.

Others have been given under Indefinite Adjectives of number, see pp. 25-6 and 31. Add :—

ysyr, other, foreign fwlana, a certain kya, what awr, other, different, more

awr MTien swr is unstressed, it means " and " ; when stressed,

"other, more, different", etc. a cat and a dog this is a different-cat v—-"'^ three more ^ ^

bylli 9wr kwtta yeh bylli awr hay tin awr


swrog ki rae the opinion of others awr bhi still more kwch 3wr do give some more voh to awr mamb tha v ^ h a t was another affair or

bosiness

yayr •ysyr qswmei) foreign nations or races yayr admi a stranger

kya kya is used only with the nominative form of a noun.

yeh kya bevwqufi hoy I "-^vhat folly is this !

THE VERB

For the occasional use of ham, we, as mascuUne, even when referring to women, see p. 27, imder Pronouns.

ts, was mayi) hun, I am ham hsyg, we are tu hay, thou art twm ho, you are

ap hayi), you are voh hsy, he, she, it is voh hayg, they are

Feminine the same. Negative:— mayi) . . . nahig, or mayg nahir) hug, I am oot tu . . . nahig, or tu nahig hsy, thou art not voh . . . nahig, or voh nahiij hay, he, she, it is not ham . . . nahig, or ham nahig hayg, we are not twm . . . nahig, or twm nahig ho, you are not ap . . . nahig, or ap nahig hajnj, you are not voh . . . nahig, or voh nahig hayg, they are not

The omission of hug, hay, etc., is explained by the fact that nahii) itself means is, am, are not.; as well as no, not.

THE VERB 39

Example:— tu cor hsy, you are a thief mayg cor nahig, I am not a

thief mayg tha, I was hsm the, we were tu tha, thou wert twm the, you were

ap the, you were voh tha, he, it was voh the, they were

Feminine;— mgyg thi ham thig (sometimes the) tu thi twm thig

ap thig voh thi voh thig

Negative:— na or nshjii is inserted and may not be omitted, mayg no tha or mayq nshiq tha I was not The auxiliary verbs hug, hay, etc., and tha, thi, etc., are

quite distinct from the verb hona, to be or become. See note on tha and hua on p. 109,

REGULAR VERB

The conjugation of transitive and intransitive verbs differs in tenses formed from the past participle. See p. 49.

INTRANSITIVE VERB b3cna, escape, i.e., avoid a calamity. Root boc

Infinitive, gerund or verbal noun, gerundive (future participle) :—

bgcna, to escapey escaping, etc. Agent: bacnevala, one who escapes or is about to

escape. Participles:—

Present: bscta escaping bscta hua escaping (more emphasis on

state) bscte bscte hi while escaping, etc., etc.


Past : baca escaped bsca hua escaped (more emphasis on

state)

Conjunctive:— backar, backe, having escaped, escaping, though

escaping, etc.

Notes on bacna

hscaa, when gerund or verbal noun, belongs to the second declension, but is declined only in the singidar.

bscna an escaping b9cne ka of escaping bscne se by escaping, etc.

bacna, when gerundive (sometimes future participle), is an adjective, and in agreement with nouns. I t may become Ib9cne, bgcnl. This use is especially common with transitive verbs; then it is passive, like the Latin gerundive.

Every infinitive hiay be either a gerund or a gerundive. Agent bgcnevala, is a second declension noun, and an

adjective.

bacnevala, bacnevale, bacnevalog. Fern.: bacnevah, bscnevalior), etc.

The participles bacta and baca are adjectives in -a and decline:—

bacta, bscte, bscti, bacta hua, bscte hue, bacti hui. baca, bace, bad, baca hua, bace hue, baci hui. .

Present:—

IMPERATIVE

Singular Plural

(tu) bac, escape thou (twm) baco, escape (you) (ap) bacie, escape (you)

THE VERB 41

Timeless or ftiturc:— tu bacna, escape thou twm bscna, escape {you}

The form bacna is often used in a friendly way for the present, as:—

dekhna, sahab ji, dekhna ! take care, sahib, take care !

With ap the third plural of the present subjunctive is common for the imperative, as :—

ap bgcer) you escape !

; The form in -ie is used in two other was's: {a) as present subjunctive, and (6) as impersonal passive.

agar ap zara si bat par aysa if you find fault with hun so phafkarie for a trifle

accha dekhie well, we shall see (lit. it will be seen)

Another form not so common is bacio, a present impera-- tive with tu.

bsciega, a ceremonious form, is future imperative, or simple future, as :—

baciega be pleased to escape ap Icab j aiega when will you go ? \

It does not change for the feminine, The feminine for the whole imperative is the same as the

masculine.

Negative:— na bac, mat bac; na baco, mat baco; na bacie, na baciega; na bacio Sometimes for the sake of emphasis the negative is put after the verb, as :-:—

baco na, baco mat ^ In this case the stress is laid on ne and mat. Occasionally


nahit) is used in this way, as: ro ndhit}, do not c iy; mat is rather brusque, and should be used sparingly. It cannot occur with respectful forms-

PRESENT INDICATIVE

I escape or am escaping

The present participle with hug, hay, etc.

moyi) bscta hug, I escape, ham bacte hayg, we escape; or am escaping , or are escaping

tu b9cta hay, thou escapest, twm bscte ho, you escape, or or art escaping are escaping

ap bacte hsyri, you escape, • or are escaping

voh bsctahsy, he escapes, or voh bacte hayg, they escape, is escaping or are escaping

Feminine: bacti throughout: msyi) bacti hug, etc. In the. first plural the masculine is sometimes used .for the femimne, hem bacti hayg or bdcte h»yg. See pp. 27-8 and 38.

Negative: msyq nshlg bscta or mayg nehigbsctahog, etc' The former is commoner.

PRESENT CONTINUOUS

I am escaping at this moment

Change bacta to bac raha. raha comes from rehna, remain.

mayg bsc raha hug, I am ham bac rahe hayg, we are escaping escaping

tu bac raha hay, thou art twm bac rahe ho, you are escaping escaping

ap bac rahe hayn, you are escaping

voh bac raha hay, he is voh bac rahe hayg, they are escapmg escaping

THE VERB 43

Feminine : rahi instead of rgha, rahe. In the first plural the masculine form is sometimes used. See pp. 27 and 38.

mayi) bac rahi hug I am escaping Negative is rare. I t would occur only in phrases of "

special emphasis, as :—

mayij bac to nghii) roha hug I am not escaping

IMPERFECT OR PAST CONTINUOUS

I was escaping

First form : present participle,with tha, mgyg bacta tha, I was escap-'^âm bacte the, we were

ing escaping tu bacta tha, thou wert twm bacte the, you were

escaping escaping ap bacte the, you were

escaping voh bacta tha, he was voh bacte the, they were

escaping escaping

Feminine: bacti thi in singular; bacti thig in plural, The first plural may sometimes be becte the. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative : add na or nahii) :— mayg na bacta tha or mayg I was not escaping.

nahig bacta tha

Second farm: I was escaping' at that moment. Change tracta to bac raha.

mayg bac raha tha, I was ham bac rahe the, we were escaping escaping

tu boc raha tha, thou wert twm bac rahe the, you were escaping escaping

ap bac rahe the, you were escaping

voh bac raha tha, he was voh bac rahe the, they were escaping escaping

U TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI '

Feminine: bac rahi th i ; plural, bac rahl thig, etc. First plural may be: bac rehe the. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative very rare. See note on negative of present continuous on p. 43. Add na or nahit).

msyg bac to nshii] raha tha I was not escaping

FUTURE I shall or wil l escape

mayi) bgcugga ham bacegge tu bscega twm bacoge

ap bscegge voh bacega ' voh bacegge

Feminine changes -ga to -gi, and -ge to -gi. mayi) bacuggi ap baceggi

First plural may be the same as the masculine. See pp.-27 and 38.

Negative : add ns or nshii). ^ - ' • '

mayq na bactiijga or nahig I shall or will not escape bacuiiga

CONTINUOUS FUTURE OR PRESENT PRESUMPTIVE

I shall be escaping, no doubt he is escaping, etc.

First Form:— mayg bacta hugga ham bacte hogge tu bacta hoga twm bacte hogge

ap bacte hogge voh bacta hoga voh bacte hogge

This tense generally expresses doubt. He will be escaping, i.e., no doubt he is escaping, I suppose he is escaping.

For hui)ga see under bona, to be or become, p. 56. Feminine : mayr) bactl huggi, voh bacti hogi, etc. For

the first plural, the masculine is sometimes used. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative ; insert na or nahii) before bacta, etc. voh no bacta hoga, etc.

THE VERB 45

Second Form:—

Second fonn lays stress on escaping at the moment; e.g. :—

m&yr} bac raha hurjga I shall be escaping at the moment, etc.

voh bsc raha hoga he wiU be, or no doubt he b , escaping at the moment

Etc.

Feminine : mayq bac rshl hur|gi, etc. Negative (very rare): moyii ne Sac raha hutjga or mayq

nahii) bac rsha huT|ga.

PAST INDICATIVE I escaped mayg baca, I escaped ham bace, we escaped tu baca, thou escapedst twm bace, you escaped'

ap bace, you escaped voh baca, he escaped voh bace, they escaped

Feminine: singular, baci; plural, beciij. First plural may he bace, see pp. 27 and 38.

Negative : insert na before baca; mayg na baca, I did not escape. Sometimes we find nahli) before baca, but nahig belongs properly to the next tense, the Present Perfect.

PRESENT PERFECT

I have escaped

mayg baca hoQ, I have es- ham bace hayg caped

tu baca hoy twm bace ho ap bace hayg

voh baca hay . voh bace hayg

Feminine: baci for baca, bace. The first plural is sometimes bace. See pp. 27 and 38.


Negative : insert nshiq before baca, etc. The auxiliary verbs hug, hay, hayg, etc. are omitted more often than not.

voh nahig baca, etc. he has not escaped voh nahig baca hsy (less common)

PLUPERFECT I had escaped

Also means: I escaped.

mayg baca tha ham bace the tu baca tha > twm bace the

ap bace the voh baca tha voh bace the

Feminine : baci th i ; plural, bad thirj. First plural is sometimes bace the. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative : mayq na baca tha, ap na bace the, etc.

FUTURE PERFECT OR PAST PRESUMPTIVE

I shall have escaped, no doubt I escaped, etc. mayi) baca huijga ham bace hogge tu baca hoga twm bace hoge '

ap bace hogge voh baca hoga voh bace hogge

Feminine : mayg b a d huggi; ham bacihoggi, etc. First plural is sometimes as masculine. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative : mayg na baca hugga, etc.

PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OR CONDITIONAL

I may escape, (If) I escape or should escape ; shall I escape? etc.

mayg bacug ham baceg tu bace twm baco

ap baceg voh bace voh baceg

Feminine: the same. Negative : mayg na bacug. nehig is not used.

THE VERB 47

CONTINUOUS PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OR CONDITIONAL

I may be escaping, etc.

First Form:— meyri bscta hug or houg ham bacte hog tu bacta ho twm bacte ho

ap bscte hog voh bacta ho voh bacte hog

Feminine : bacti instead of becta, becte. First plural may be the same as the mascuhne. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative : msyi) na bacta huq. nshig is not iised.

Second Form:— mayg bac r»ha hug or houg, I may be escaping at the ham bac rahe hog moment, etc.

Femifiine : mayg bee rahi hui), etc. First pliiral may be the same as the masculine. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative : mayq na bac raha hug, etc. nshii) is not used. '

Note.—There are two words hug, {a) I am, (b) I may be. Therefore, mayg bacta huq, or bac raha hug, may be either : I am escaping or I may be escaping. The context will always make the meaning clear.

PAST CONDITIONAL OR SUBJUNCTIVE

(if) I were to escape or had escaped; I might or would or should escape or have escaped

This takes the same form as the present participle :—

. mayg bacta ham bacte ' tu bacta twm bacte

ap bacte voh bacta voh bacte

Feminme: bacti; plural, bactig. In first plural the mascuhne form is sometimes used, see pp. 27 and 38.

48 TEACH YOURSELF H INDUSTANI

Negative : mayq na b»cta, etc. nshiri is not used. Note difference between na and nehig :—

voh na ata he would not have come (Past Con.)

voh nahii] ata he does not come, he will riot come (Pres. Ind.)

PRESENT PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE OR CONDmONAL

mayg baca hug or houg, etc. I may have escaped, if I have escaped, etc.

Feminine ; meyg baci hug, etc. 'Negative : mayg nd baca hug, etc. nahlg is not used.

PLUPERFECT CONDITIONAL OR SUBJUNCTIVE

Practically the same meaning as the Past Conditional, but more distinctly pluperfect in meaning.

mayg baca hota (if) I had' escaped previously, I should have escaped, etc,

Feminine : mayg baci hoti, etc. Negative : mayg na baca hota. nahig may not be used.

PAST CONDmONAL CONTINUOUS OR PAST SUBJUNCTIVE CONTINUOUS

I may have been escaping, (if) I had been escaping, etc. Firsi Form:— mayg bacti hoti, etc. Feminine : becti hoti, etc. Negative: mayg na bacta hota, etc. ndhig may not be

used. Secoftd Form ;— mayg bac raha hota, etc. Feminine : msyg bac rahi hoti, etc. Negative: mayg na bac raha hota, etc. nahig may not

be used.

TRANSITIVE VERBS 49

TRANSITIVE VERBS

The conjugation of transitive and intransitive verbs is tlie same except in tenses formed from the past participle. The words " transitive " and " intransitive " are here used with the meaning given them by the Concise Oxford Dictionary for words used transitively and intransitively. A few verbs can be used in both ways,

It must be remembered that the following rule is general, not universal, and that several verbs which we should c ^ transitive follow the conjugation of intransitive verbs, and vice versa.

The rule in an easily remembered form is as follows :— RULE : Verbs usually transitive take ne in tenses formed

from the past participle, and those usually intransitive do not.

Fuller details in special note, p. 106. It is not correct to say that any verb that can be intransi

tive may, when intransitive, be conjugated all through without ne ; e.g., the verte " see " and " hear " can be intransitive, but the Urdu verbs dekhna and swnna must always take ne in tenses made from the past participle. There are, however, a few verbs which take or dispense with ne according as they are used transitively or intransitively.

TRANSITIVE VERBS—TENSES FORMED FROM THE PAST PARTICIPLE

The construction of these tenses is based upon an old passive. Instead of saying " I wrote a letter ", Hindustani has " B y me a letter was written". In a sentence like this '' written " agrees with " letter ", not with the logical subject. There is a variety of this construction explained on p. 5S in which the verb is impersonal. This old passive which is now looked upon as an active is quite different from the modem passive in Urdu.

In the following tenses it will be seen that the pronouns msyg, tu, and the plural of voh, do not taJce the same


form with ne as with other postpositions. If, however, a noun in apposition with these pronotms comes between them and ne, the ordinary oblique form is used. The same applies to the plural of the pronouns yeh, kawn, j o , ' which also, as mentioned on p. 29, have separate forms for ne..

mwjh bad nssib ne lykha I unfortunate one, wrote wn bad qysmatog ne na those unfortunate ones did

lykha not write

In the case of voh (and so for other pronouns which can be adjectives as well as pronouns) there is a change from " they unfortunate ones " to " those unfortunate ones ", and the pronouns become adjectives.

PAST INDICATIVE lykhna, to write, I wrote msyg ne lykha by me—written or was I wrote

written tu ne lykha by thee—^written or was thou didst

written write ws ne lykha by him, her, it—^written he, she, it wrote'

or was written ham ne lykha by us—^written or was we wrote

written twm ne lykha by you—written or was you wrote

written ap ne lykha by you—written or was you wrote

written wnhog ne lykha by them—^written or was they wrote

written It will be noticed the verb is always the same, no matter

who the agent is, whether masculine or feminine, singular or plural. The verb is always mascuhne singular when there is no object. For object see pp. 62-3.

Negative : msyg ne ns lykha, I did not write, etc. • The past indicative is sometimes used for the,present

perfect.

TRANSITIVE VERBS 61

PRESENT PERFECT

I have written

msyr\ ne lykha hay by me—^written is I have written tu ne lykha hay thou has written ws ne lykha hay he has written hsm ne lykha hsy we have written twm ne lykha hay you have written ap ne lykha hay you have written wnhog ne lykha hay they have written

Negative : mayi) ne ashi;) lykha, or, less common, mayi) ne nehii) lykha hay, I have not written, etc.

When there is no object the verb is mascuUne singular. For object see pp. 52 and 53.

PLUPERFECT i had wri t ten

mayi) ne lykha tha by me—^written was I had written

And so on for the other persons. This tense is often used for the past, I wrote.

" Negative: mayg ne na lykha tha, I had not written, etc. When there is no object the verb is masculine singular.

For object see pp. 52 and 53.

FUTURE PERFECT OR PRESENT PERFECT PRESUMPTIVE

I shall have written, I suppose I have written.

mayg ne lykha hoga, I shall have written,

And so on for the other persons. Negative : mayq ne na lykha hoga, I shall not have

written. If no object is expressed, the verb is masculine sirûlar,

For object see below.

PRESENT PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE OR CONDITIONAL

mayg ne lykha ho (if) I have or may have written


Negative: mayg ne n9 lykha ho. If no.object is expressed, the verb is masculine singular.

For object see beiow.

PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE OR CONDfTlONAL

msyg ne lykba hota (if) I had written; I would have written, etc.

Negative : mayg ne na lykha hota, etc. If no object is expressed, the verb is masculine singular.

For object see below.

THE OBJECT

When the object of the action is mentioned, the sentence runs in one of two ways :—

1. When the speaker wishes to express the object of the action, i.e., the logical object, without ko, then that object is made the grammatical nominative.

mayrt ne cyf^hi by me—^letter written, I wrote a letter -lykhi or ^ ^ .written

In this lykhl agrees with cytfhi, which is the grammatical nominative though the logical object. It does not matter who wrote the letter, the verb is the same whoever the writer may be. wnhog ne cytthi by them—letter written they wrote a

lykhi letter

The remaining tenses correspond :— raayii ne cylj;hi lykhi hay I have written a letter mayg ne cyfthi lykhi thi I had written a letter mayg ne cyt{hi lykhi hogi doubtless I have written a

letter mayi] ne cytthi lykhi ho jif} if I have written S letter mayi] ne cytthi lykhi hoti (if) if I had previously

written a letter, etc.

THE OBJECT 53

2. When the speaker wants to use ko, which means " as f or " , " with reference to ", etc., governing the logical object, the construction is unpersonal.

mayii ne swrst ko deldia as for the woman, by me it was seen; I saw the woman

ws ne kytalxig ko patlia as for the books, by him it was read; he read the books

In these sentences " it_^s..se.en_", " i t was_read" are purely impersonal, corresponding to the English " i t is beheved ", " it is said ", "ît is thought ".

PASSIVE ^

For special section on the passive, see pp. 105-6. The passive is formed by means of jana, to go, used as

an auxiliary verb, along with the past participle of the verb which has to be made passive. Hindustani has " the snake went killed " instead of " the snake was killed ", sagp mara

'gaya; " the house will go made " for " the house will be made'', mskan banaya jaega; " the letter is going written'' for "the letter is being written", cyt^hilykhi jarehihay.

Less use is made of the passive than in English; in particular when the agent is mentioned it is generally better to change the construction so that the verb may be in the past indicative, active voice. (See above.)

Infinitive: dekha jana to be seen, being seen, etc. Ag^: . dekha janevala (rare)

Participles : Present: dekha jata (found only in finite tenses)

Pasi: dekha gsya (found only in finite tenses) It should be remembered that the ordinary past

participle dekha, dekha hua, seen (feminine: dekhi, dekhi hui), is also paîv^, just as the corresponding


participle is in English. The past participle of a transitive verb is always passive,

Conjunctive: not used Itnperative : practically never fonnd Present Indicative : mayg dekha jata hug 11 am being

mayg dekha ja r8ha hugj seen Feminme: dekhi jati hug. dekhi ja rahi huq. First

plural may be as masculine. See pp. 27 and 38. Negative: mayg n^hiij dekha jata (huq), or mayij

dekha nshig jata (hur|). Itnperfect: msyg dekha jata tha 1 I was being

raayg dekha ,ja raha tha/ seen Feminine: meyg dekhi jati thi, delcht ja rahi thi .

First plural may be as masculine. See pp. 27 and 38.

Negative; mayq nshig (or n©), dekha jata tha, or • na, nshiri, may come alter delcha.

Future : mayr) dekha jaugga I shall be seen Feminine : mayg dekhi jauijgi. First plural niay be

as masculine. Negative : mayg na (or nahiij) dekha jaugga, or.n&,

nehig after dekha. Pasi: mQyT) dekha gsya I was seen

Feminine : mayg dekhi gai. First plural may be as masculine.

Negative : msyg na dekha gaya or dekha ne gaya. Present Perfect: msyr) dekha gaya hug I have been seen

Feminine : mayg dekhi gal hug. First plural may. be as masculine.

Negative: mayg na dekha 'gsya hug, or dekha na gaya hug.

Pluperfect: mayg dekha gaya tha I had been seen Feminme : mayg dekhi gai thi. First plural may'be

as masculine. Negative: mayg na dekha gaya tha, or n» after dekha.

IRREGULARITIES IN VERBS 55

Present Suhjutictive or Conditional:~ . msyg dekha jaug I may be seen, etc. ham dekhe jaer) Feminine : msyil dekhi jaug, ham dekhi jaeg (or as

masculine). Negative ; msyg dekha na jaug, or ne dekha jaun.

Past Conditional or Subjunctive :— may]} dekha jata I might be seen, might have

• been seen hsm dekhe jate, etc, Feminine : mayg dekhi jati, ham dekhi jatig (or as

masc). Negative : mayg Jia dekha jata, or dekha na jata,

The other tenses can be formed on the same model. The . above will be enough to show the method.

IRREGUURITIES IN VERBS

These are few and triiling.

1, The iollowing verbs insert j in the ceremonious imperative : dena, give; lena, take; pina, drink; ksma, do; hona, be, become,

dijie, dijiega; lijie, lijiega; kijie, kijiega; pijie, pijiega

In older Urdu hona used to make hujie, hujiega, but these are not now found.

. On dena, lena, bona, and kdrna, see further in nos- 3-5 on p. 56.

2. Verbs whose roots end in -a or -o insert y in the masculine singular of the past participle.

ana, come ; aya banana, make : bonaya , sona, sleep ; soya rona, weep : roya aya, soya, roya, have two syllables; bonaya has three.


3, dena, give, and lena, take, drop the e before a vowel, except in the past participle, where they change it to i. which is dropped in the feminine. The ceremonious imperative, as has been seen, changes e to i, and inserts j .

Imperative, ceremonious:

FuiMre:

Past: Feminine: Plural: Feminine:

2nd pi.: dijie

dugga dega

dega

dia di die dig

Preseitt Subjunctive:— dug de

de

; do dijiega

degge doge ap degge voh degge

deg do ap deg voh deg

lijie

lugga lega

lega

lia li . lie M

lug le

le

' lo lijiega

legge loge ap legge voh legge

leg lo apleg voh leg

4. bona, be, become, changes o to u in the past participle, and contracts in the future and present subjunctive.

In ordinary speech the ceremonious imperative is regular i-^

hole hoiega

Future: hugga hogge hoga hoge

ap hogge hoga voh hogge

Past: hua hue Feminine: hui huig

CAUSAL VERBS 57

Present Subjunctive:— • hmj (sometimes houg) hog

ho ho ap hog

ho voh hog

Note on hua, p. 109.

5. karna, do, has irregularities in the ceremonious imperative and the past. Imperative: kijie kijiega

Past: kia kie Feminine: ki kig

6. jana, go, has :—

Past: gaya gse Feminine: gai gsig 7. marna, die, is regular, but has also a past, mua .

On the whole Urdu verbs are extremely regular, more so, .perhaps, than in any other inflected language.

Note: sena, hatch eggs, has past, sea; plural, see (two syllables); feminine: sei, seig; habitual, sea ksrna.

khena, row a boat, has no masculine past; the feminine past is khei, plural, kheii). I t has no habitual form.

CAUSAL VERBS

Causal verbs are a striking feature of Urdu. We must distinguish carefully between (a) their meaning, and (&) the method of their formation.

Meaning of Causal Verbs :

(i) The. causal of an intransitive verb is simply the transitive verb corresponding to it. Thus :—

cslna, move, etc. calana, cause to move, make some one move


(âwpia, run âwpna, cause to run, make some one run

(ii) Transitive verbs. There is no causal' of the active voice of a transitive verb. The so-called causal is the causal of its passive. I t means " to cause the action of the transitive verb to be performed ", not " to make some one perform i t " ,

wthana, lift wthvana, cause something to be lifted

The object of wthvana is the thing to be lifted, not the person who is going to lift it.

ws ko wthvao means " get it or him lifted u p " . It does not mean " make so and so lift it up ".

So banana, make; banvana, cause something to be made. It does not mean " get some one to maie some thing ". The object of bonvana is the thing made, not the carpenter who makes it.

I t will be seen from the above that verbs can have two causals, and further down it will appear that some actually,, have three,

Examples of Two Causals

la[ki jagi the girl awoke W?" man ne l»i;ki ko jagaya the mother woketthe girl hakim ne mag se l9[ki ko the doctor had the girl

jagvaya awakened by the mother mayg wrdu pa^hta hug I am reading, studs^ng Urdu mawlvi sahsb mere beje ko the Maulvi is teaching my

wrdu parhate hayg son Urdu raayg mswlvi sahab se apne I am havmg my son taught

bete ko wrdu pafhvata Urdu by the Maulvi hug

Formation of Causal Verbs

A causal is formed by making certain changes in the root of the verb. The root is found by taking off the ending -na

CAUSAL VERBS 59

of the infinitive, as bol from bolna, speak; xarid from xaridna, buy.

Note that :—

{a) The roots of most verbs, other than causals, end in a consonant.

(&) Verbs witli roots of more than two syllables have no causals.

(c) Verbs, not themselves causals, vrith roots ending in -a, very rarely have causals. Thus, pana, obtain, has no causal; but banana, make, being itself a causal, has one :—

banna, be made banana, make banvana, cause to be made

(d) The following verbs have no causals :—

Islkama. boast ana, come jana, go cahna, wish bhana, be agree- ^^"^n*. knock socna, think _ able to down lana, bring ' pstna, fall janna, know tajTia, see, take sskna, be able pana, find, man-

in age to

Kule I

Verbs with one-syllabled roots ending in a consonant generally form causals by adding -a to the root; and if the vowel of the root is long, it is usually shortened : a becomes 3, e and i become y, o becomes w.

jalna, bum (intr.) i3!ana, bum (trans.) pakna, be cooked pakana, cook gyma, faU gyrana, knock down swnna, hear swnana (cause to be heard),

relate khelna, play khylana, cause to play, in

vite to play bolna, spealc, make a sound bwlana, cause to speak or

make a sound, call


Rule 2 Intransitive verbs ending in a sliort Vowel followed by a

consonant sometimes form their causals by merely lengthen- _ ing the vowel, a being lengthened to a, y to e, w to u.

kafna, be cut kaj;na, cut Isdna, be loaded ladna, load khwina, open (intr.) khokik, open (trans.) chydna, be perforated chedna, perforate

On these verbs see further, p. 63,

Rule 3 Verbs with two-syllabled roots ending in a consonant,

and having a short -» in the second syllable, add -a to the root, but omit the -9 of the second syllable. pyghshia, melt (intr.) pyglilana, melt (trans.) ssmajhna, understand samjhana, explain wktna, turn upside down wljana, turn upside down

(intr.) (trans.)

Exceptions:— nykahia, emerge nykalna, take out, eject gwzarna, pass, etc. gwzarna, spend (time, Ufe) bygstna, be spoilt bygapia, spoil ssmbhslna, recover oneself, sambhalna, look after, set

be supported right If the second vowel is -y or -w, the verb follows Rule 1.

pahwgcna, arrive pahwricana, cause to arrive

Rule 4 Verbs, with two-syllabled roots ending in a consonant,

and having the second vowel long, add -va to the root, and shorten the second vowel, xsridna, buy xsrydvana, cause to be

bought nycoiTia, squeeze out nycwirana, cause to be

squeezed out

bCStti

CAUSAL VERBS 61

The causal of ghasitna, drag, is formed as if the verb were ghysa];na; ghysatâna, cause to be dragged,

Kule 5

Roots ending in a vowel. Such roots always end in a long vowel, never in a short one. The next two sections, (a) and (6), do not apply to verbs which are themselves causals.

(a) Two-syDabled roots ending in a vowel have no causals.

Exceptions :— nahana, bathe nahlana, to bathe (someone) cwrana, steal cwrvana, to cause to be stolen

(6) Some one-syllabled roots ending in a vowel shorten the vowel and add 1;—

pina, drink pylana^ cause to be drunk, give to drink

sina, sew sylana, cause to be sewn cbuna, touch chwlana (also chwvana), cause

to be touched jina, live jvlana, cause to live, make alive dena, give dylana, cause to be given sona, sleep swlana, cause to sleep rona, weep rwlana, cause to weep khana, eat khylana, cause to be eaten, give

to eat. (Here one would.have expected khelana.)

The following do not insert ],

gana, sing gavana, cause to sing or to be sung

lena, take lyvana (uncommon), cause to be taken or brought

khona, lose khwvana (uncommon), cause to be lost


Kuk 6 One or two monosyllabic roots ending in a consonant

occasionally add ! in the causal, but the fonn without. 1 is better.

sikhna, learn baythna, sit dekhna, see, look at

sykhana; sykhlana (not so good) bythana; bythlana (not so good) dykhana; dykhlana (not so good)

The form sykhlana is becoming common in miUtary circles, There is no objection to the 1 in kshlana, from kahna, say, but the word is often used in a passive sense = to be called.

DOUBLE CAUSALS

Verbs with ohe-syllabled roots endmg in a consonant, or with two-syllabled roots ending in a consonant and having the second vowel short (see Rules 1,2, and 3 on pp. 59-60). form their double causals by adding -va to the root, and shortening the vowel if long. The meaning is to get something done through another peiôn's instrumentality.

Verb :—

pakna, cook

bolna, speak

chydna, be perforated

samajlma, understand

pahwgcna, arrive

pakana,cook

bwlana, call

chedna, perforate

samjhana, explain

pghwgcana, send

pakvana, cause to be cooked by some one

bwlvana, cause to be called by some one

chydvana, cause to be perforated by some one

sgmajhvana, cause to be explained by some one

pahwgcvana, cause to be sent or brought by some one

•-1

CAUSAL VERBS 63

Note that nykalna, emerge, an exception to Rule 3 in its first causal, nykalna (not nyklana), is regular in its second, tiykalvana: so gwzarvana, bygacvana,

Verbs coming under Rule 2 generally have three causals, as :—

ladna, be loaded ladna, load ladana, ladvana, cause to be loaded

katna, be cut katna, cut ksâna, ka^vana, cause to be cut

IMPORTANT. When, as in the last two verbs, the same idea runs through all the causals, the second and third do not really differ in meaning, and when the notion of instrumentality is prominent, the form in -va is preferred.

qwhog se ladvaya (not got it loaded by coolies Isdaya)

This holds too when the original verb is transitive and has only two causals with the same idea running through all.

kama, do ksrana, karvana, cause to be done

dykhna, be visible, which should belong to Rule I, follows Rule 2 in its first causal. dykhna, be visible : 1st causal, dekhna, see, look at

2nd causal, dykhana, show 3rd causal, dykhvana, cause to be

looked at or shown

Note that the idea changes; dekhna does not mean " cause to be visible ", nor does dykhana mean " cause to be seen ". Since the idea changes, the second and thnd causals differ in both meaning and use.

When a first causal root ends in -va, as under Rule 4, xarydvana, ghysat'âna, or like,the three exceptions at the end of Rule 5, gavana, lyvana, khwvana, there is no second causal.

The verbs in Rule 5 which insert 1 in their first

M. TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

causals make their second by introducing V before -a. Thus:—

pina, drink second causal pylvana, cause (a drink) to be ^ given

jina, live jylvana, cause to be made alive

sona, sleep swlvana, cause to be put to , sleep

rona, cry rwlvana, cause to be made to cry

khana, eat khylvana, cause (food) to be given

sina, sew; chuna, touch; and dena, give, retain the same idea throughout their causals; therefore sylvana, chwlvana, and dylvana, the second causals, do not really differ from the first causals sylana, chwlana, and dylana.

pylana and khylaaa are not in meaning the true causals of pina and khana.

mwjhe parii pylao, mwjhe kwch khylao, mean: give me water to drink, give me something to eat.

There is here no causation or compulsion. Therefore the"-i second causals differ from the first in meaning,

mwjhe pani pylvao, mwjhe kwch khylvao, mean: get a drink given me by some one, get food given me by some one, presumably a servant.

The Postpositions of Instrumentality se, ko

The causals of transitive verbs, i.e., of their passives, involve an intermediary through whose instrumentality the action is performed. The postposition used with that intermediary is either se or ko. How may we know which it is for the causal of any particular verb ? The answer is that it depends on whether that verb, when compounded, is compounded with (a) dena, or (6) lena (see .p. 72).

(a) Tlê causal of a verb normally compounded with ' dena, i.e., one whose action is directed away from

CAUSAL VERBS 65 the doer (p. 74), takes the postposition se. In this case the idea of causation is strong,

L bafhai ne sanduq bana dia the carpenter made the box ni9yg ne bai^hai se sanduq I got a box made by the

banvaya carpenter

{h) The causal of a verb nonnally compounded with lena, i.e., one whose action is for the benefit of the doer or goes toward the doer (p. 74), takes the postposition ko. The idea of causation is now very weak. The idea is rather that of providing some one with the means of doing sometliing, or helping him to do it.

Isfki ne saî o^h li ma ne lai;ki ko sa[i w[hai

safo barfdh lo

lafke ko safa bandha do

nawkar se safa bandhva lo

» nawkar se safa bandhva do bwi^^he ne javbat pi ha

zamindar ne bw^^he ko Jarbot "pylaya

the girl put on her sari the mother helped the girl on -^

with her sari >^ put on your turban ^ help the boy on with his

turban get the turban put on (your

head} by the servant get the turban put on (the v

boy's head) by the servant the old man drank

sherbet the farmer gave the old man

sherbet to drink

theO

\

(c) Some transitive verbs may be compounded with both dena and lena; the two compounds differ in meaning. We must enquire whether the causal belongs to the verb as compounded with dena or as compounded with lena.

harkare ne pata )ykh lia

mod ne harkare ko pata lykhvaya

harkare ne moci ke vaste kard lykh dia

the postman wrote the address (for himself)

the cobbler dictated the address to. the postman

the postman wrote a postcard for the cobbler


moci ne harkare lybhvaya

se kar4 the cobbler got a card written by the postman

Peculiar Causals

The following causals, rather peculiar in form, should be noted:—

bafna, be shared

bhigna, get wet bykna, be sold bona, sow , chwtna, chutna, escape, etc.

dsbna, be pressed, etc. dhwlna, be washed

i^vbna, sink bona, be, become

khena, row (boat) khycna, khygcna, be pulled

khwjlana, scratch (oneself, one's body)

lena, take

pohcanna, recognise pshynna, put on (clothes)

photna, split, burst phu^nay burst forth, etc. pwfema, call out to

baijtna, botana, bafvana. (There is a diilerent verb

boôa, twist, with causal batana, ba^vana)

bhygona, bhygvana becna, sell; bykvana bwvana chopia; chwfana; chwfana;

chwtvana; chwi;vana dabna, dabana; dsbvana dhona, wash; dhwlana;

dhwlvana (^wbona, 4wbana; 4^bvana hwvana (used only in the

phrase bona hwvana, as r n honahwvanakwchnahiq = there will be no result)

khyvana khegcna, khoygcna, khigcna; •

khycvana, Idiygcvana khwjvana

lyvana (used only in phrase ' lyva lana, bring a person, or cause somethii^ to be brought by someone)

pahcanvana (rare) common causal; pynhana;

pahynana is also found phajTia, phsxana, phs^vana phoiTia, phwi;ana, phwfvana pwkarvana

THE INFINITIVE 67

sena, hatch (eggs) syvana tmna, break (int.) topia, twi;ana, twfvana

1 (Note the dental t in the last three.)

THE INFINITIVE

This is derived from two Sanskrit forms which have become one in the Urdu infinitive. This dual origin is seen in its two main uses. Sometimes it is a verbal noun corresponding in some degree to the Latin gerund; sometimes a future participle, always passive in transitive verbs, rather like the Latin gerundive. In the first case, it is a masculine noun ending in -a, and belongs to the second" ,declension; in the second, it is an adjective ending in -a.

Gerund or Verbal Noun

(fl) hajamat bsnvane ki adst the habit of getting shaved age bsthne meg kya what harm is there in going

horo] hay ? forward ? mere valyd ka kahna what my father says is right->y

baja hay

(6) to express purpose; verbal noun inflected with, or without ko.

voh zamin xaridne gaya he went to buy land jys vaqt jua khelne when they (will) sit down to V

beythegge gamble sabyt kame ko in'order to prove

Negative purpose with ka :—

msys) apni beyzzati I am not going to let myself karane ka nahig be insulted

(c) with -vala. kwfti Upie vale wrestlers


Gerundive

See also p. 96, and Sentences, Lessons 12, 13,-14.

(a) Necessityi duty, desirability :— ' ^ ysribog ki parvgryj" ksmi it was right to support the

lazym thi /^ poor mwjhe ap roti pskani psiî I had to cook the food my-

^ ^ self 'qaydi ko maf ksma zgruri the prisoner must be par-

hay doned twmheg tin kytaberj pafhni ires, libri Ubi legendi sunt,

hayg ^ -ôu must read three books

{b) A command to be obeyed at anjr time; agent in nominative case. When the infinitive is thus used as an imperative, it is kept masculme singular. This is sometimes a rather polite present imperative. ^ .

twm khj^ki na khohia ^rôn't open the window (no , time specified)

na bholo would be used if you saw some one about t o ' open the window, and called out, " Oh, don't open the window! " dekhna, sahab ji, dekhna look. Sahib, look; be careful,

ete. (c) Used as complement to other verbs :—

gafiag ani jani Jwru huirj carriages began to come and

ws ne mazduri kami chot he gave up domg daily di / (manual) work

mayij nebhaygs xaridni cahi'>-'I wished to buy a buffalo ajyzi se srz kami cahie ^X^ne should make petition

with humility

sskna, be able. Rules 1, It is'ôined to the root of verbs. 2. It does not take ne in past tenses.

THE INFINITIVE 69

3. It never occurs alone; the other verb must be mentioned. meri beti na ja saki my daughter could not go p3|;h sakte ho? hag, pai;h can you read? Yes, I can i-""

sskta hug Here for " I can " sakta hug would be wrong; it must be

p3];h sekta hut). 4. It is generally wrong to use it with compound verbs;

thus it is correct to say: agsr voh cho]; sakeg if they can leave it

biit it is wrong.to say :— agar voh cho]; de sakeg

Inability may be expressed by the negative passive of any verb, transitive or intransitive, or by an interrogative tantamount to a passive, along with se, by, governing the word signifying the person who is imable.

mwjh'se yeh kytab psthi I can't read this book (lit. nahig jati by me this book is not

being read) mwjh se sysa javab kab dia I shall never be able to give

Jaega such an answer mwjh se nahig bayfha jata I can't sit down > ^ / ^

cwkna, to finish, to have finished-. Rules as for sekna. 1. I t is joined to the root of verbs. 2. It does not take ne in past'tenses. 3. It cannot be used alone; the other verb must he

repeated. ~ 4. It should not be used with compound verbs.

Note that the idea of finishing in cvekna is weak. I t often corresponds to " already " in EngUsh,

mayg kha cwka I have already eaten, or, I have finished eating

meri bahjm kytab pai;h cwki my sister has already read v, hay the book


jsbhjâbtaiyarkarcwkoge, when you have got the ac-mwjhe dykhana count ready, show it to me

The transitive use of cwkna as an auxiliary verb must be distinguished from the intransitive use of it as an independent verb meaning; to be finished off, or paid.

qarz cwk gsya the debt has been paid '•—• ^

This has a causal cwkana, to pay, finish off.

Isgna, begin. Rules

1. It is used with the infinitive (verbal noun) inflected in -e.

2. It does not take ne in past tenses. 3. It cannot be used alone; the other verb must be

repeated. 4. It is not usual with compound verbs. 5. It is often nearly meaningless; the idea of commencing

is almost absent. .-•

becari (bycari) rone bgi ^ t h e poor woman began to y\cry

gidat dekhte hi bhagne I s g e ^ h e jackals began runnmg away immediately on seeing him

lagna is generally used with past or pluperfect tenses; less often with present, indicative or unperfect, rarely with the future, and never with the imperative or infinitive.

pana, manage to. Rules

1, It is used with the infinitive (verba! noim) inflected in -e to mean "manage t o " , "get the chance of", and, rarely. " be allowed to ".

megh barsa, mayg bahsr it rained, I did not manage nykalne na paya ^ to get out

zarur mylne jauijga jane j I shall certainly go and see paug to ^ him if I get the chance

COMPOUND VERBS 71

2. pana, meaning "manage t o " , does not take ne in past tenses, but when it means " obtain, find ", it does.

3. It usually occurs in negative clauses, or clauses sug-gestiBg a negative, as in the second sentence above.

4. It is seldom used with compound vert>s.

dena, allow, permit. Rules dena with the infinitive (verbal noun) inflected in -e

means " allow to ".

ws ne mwjhe dwkan kholne he did not let me open a ns di shop

Here di agrees with dwkan, feminine,

mayi) kabhi opne bacce ko I (feminine) will never let mar khane ng duggi my child be beaten

jane do let it go; i.e., it does not matter

Note that kysi ko yshag bsy^hne ne do, don't let anyone sit here = koi yohaq baythne ns pae, let no one manage to sit here.

COMPOUND VERBS

When two verbs are so joined that they convey a single idea, they become one compound verb. But if the verbs both retain their own meaning, they are two verbs. Thus each of the following sentences contains two verbs, not one compound one:—

voh javab ns de soka he could not answer voh mwjhe do rwpae ynam he gave me a reward of twc -•--

de g83!a rupees as we went

But the followmg contain one compound verb each. True-compounds have their action strictly limited; see below.

boyfh jao sit down , hsm ne rakh lia we kept it, or, have kept itt "^


Compound Verbs

These are formed by prefixing the root of a. verb to certain auxiliary verbs which lose their proper meaning." With intransitive verbs the commonest auxiliary verb is jana; with transitive verbs the commonest auxiliaiy verbs are flena and lena.

thak jaua, get tired bharjana, be filled dykha dena. show swna dena, relate kha lena, eat swn lena, listen to

Intransitive Verbs

jana. Most, bu" not all, intransitive verbs can be compounded with jana. When so compounded, they indicate a single action or occasion, involving change of state, iinality or completeness; there is no idea of a continuing process. If the simple verb has two or three allied ideas, the compound with jana limits itself to one, .and refers to only one occasion. Sometimes these compounds are practically passives in meaning,

Owing • to the emphasis on reaching a final state, we usually find that the statecan also be expressed by the past participle with hua. Thus to take verbs from the list below, we may say :—

voh let gsyî ^^ ^'^y down therefore, lefa hua hey, he is lying down (resting)

voh bayth gaya, he sat down therefore, baj^ha hua hay, he is now seated

pani khswl goya, the water therefore, pani khawla hua came to the boil hsy, the water is in the

state of having been boiled, it is boiled water

sona, sleep, go to sleep so jana, go to sleep jagna, be awake jag jana, wake up ghj'sna, rub (int.) ghys jana, get nibbed away khswlna, be boihng, boil khawl jana, come to the boil phyrna, turn (varioussenses) phyrjana,turnback,become

retrograde

COMPOUND VERBS 73

lefna, lie le(; jana, lie down baythna, get into a sitting boyth jana, sit down

position hylna, move, shake (int.) hyl jana, be shaken (said of

thing at rest) rahna, stay rah jana, stay for good, be

left behind

Verbs which show a continuing process and cannot indicate arriving at a final state are not compounded with jana. Such are :—

khelna, play tayrna, swim kw[kwi;ana, grumble cyllana, cry out, call out kahlana, be called or rona, weep

named hsijsna, laugh The verb jana is not compounded with the root of

jana; we cannot say ja jana. It is important not to confuse a single compound verb

having jana as its auxiliary element, with two verbs of which the second is jana. Thus w(;h jana is not a compound verb, whereas bayth jana is; w^b jana means rise and go away, hence move into another house, etc.; jana here has its own meaning. The same holds of wf jana, fly away. The test simply is whether there is any idea of going or going away in the jana; if there is, we have two verbs, hot one single compound verb.

lena is sometimes compounded with intransitive verbs to express (i) doing a thing as much as one feels inclined, and (ii) performing an action to be immediately followed by another. Their action is limited as described above under jana, p. 72.

ro le dyl kholker weep thy fill voh ws ke sath ho lia he accompaiiied him voh ws ke piche ho lia he followed him voh a le to let him come first, and then,

(do so and so) mwjhe bay^h lene do first let me sit down, and

then, etc.


dena is compounded with a few intransitive verbs and conveys the idea of a certain amount of suddenness.

voh ro dia V ^ ^ e began to cry; almost = ^ - ro paca

voh hags di ^ ' she burst out laughing; almost = h»i)s pgji

voh cal di \y'' she went oH; ahnost = cal

Transitive Verbs (Compound)

With transitive verbs the commonest auxiliary verbs are lena and dena. lena is used when the action has special reference to the doer or is for his benefit; dena directs the action towards some one else or away from the doer. - More briefly, lena suggests connection with the agent, dena separation from him. Thus we have :—

pshyn lena, put on (clothes) pi lena, drink swn lena, listen to

but:— pynha dena, pshyna dena help some one on with his

clothes pyla dena, give drink to swna dena, relate

One must not lay too much stress on hmefit to the doer in lena verbs; e.g., pi lena might be used of drinking poison, and swn lena of listenmg to something distressing.

Sometimes there are interesting differences of meaning according to which auxiliary verb is used. y^=^

_ rakh lo, keep it for yourself rakh do, put it dowri""' bagl; lo, distribute it and.^ybagt do, distribute it among

keep your share ' others lykh lo, write it .down for lykh do, write it for me (be-

your own use cause I am illiterate) njayg ine wse bytha lia, 1 msyr) ne wse byfha dia, J

seated him by my side, seated him anywhere beside myself

COMPOUND VERBS 75

mayg^ne wse ssmjha lia, I mayi) ne wse samhja dia, I - explained it to him (for explained it to him (for my advantage) his advantage)

Limitation of action in transitive compound verbs :—

lena and dena compounded with transitive verbs limit the action in a manner very similar to that of jana with intransitive verbs, imparting an idea of finality or completeness, and confining the action to one occasion.

msyi) ne tin mehine gojt I ate meat for three months, khaya, phyr chot dia and then gave it up

mayi) ne sara goJt kha ha I ate up all the meat' (one \ occasion)

dwkandar ne wse das dsfa the shopkeeper gave him hb ^ tanxah di pay ten times

wse tanxah de di paid him his wages {one -^ occasion)

Jana with transitive verbs :

We have seen that compounded with intransitive verbs jana does not mean " g o " ; with transitive verbs, however, it is nearly always a separate verb and does mean " go ". bandar khyfkiar) tOf gsya the monkey broke the win-v^

dows and went off mayr) twmheg tasvireg I shall show you the pictures

dykha jaugga as I go

There are exceptions to this rule, which we may put in three classes ;— '

(a) karna used with a noun to form an intransitive compound, as :— ^^

yeh ws meg syrayat kar gaya this penetrated into it '\^^ pawda ws meg jagah pa'kai; the plant has taken root in

gaya it (lit. seized a place)

(6) Verbs meaning " understand ", " take in ", etc.:— ham samajh gse we took it in

i f , TE^tcH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

^ a n i jan gae ' we took it in, or have taken it in

ham ta^ gae we took it in (c) Verbs of eating and drinking :— /

sari ro);i hazm kar gaya (kha he ate up gobbled up) all gsya, cat ' ^^ g^y*. nygal the food and went off, or gaya) /simph, ate or gobbled it

/ u p sara Jarbat pi gaya y he drank the sherbet and

went off, or drank it all up

In these three cases (a), (b), and (c) the auxiliary jana need not have the meaning of going, indeed in (a) .and (b) it cannot have it.

Other auxiliary verbs used to form compound verbs are pa^na, wthna, 43''i3' bsythna and rahna. The limitation of meaning mentioned above occurs also in these.

1. pajna and w(;hna.are added to a few intransitive verbs to express suddenness :—y lafki ro paji "^he girl burst out crying mere dada ka paog physal.^/'my grandfather's foot sud-

pa|;a _,, denly shpped meri vaJda bol wthi - ' 'my mother suddenly spoke.

[It does not mean " spoke

iVboth " donor) bw44he ghabra w^he Vhoth the old men suddenly got confused

2. 4 ^ Q 3 '^ joined to transitive verbs to express vigour or even violence :— mama, eiiher beat or kill mar d,alna, ofily kill • ka^na, cut ka^ d^lna, cut down

3. baythna suggests force or insistence :— voh malyk ban bayl;ha -./-'he became owner by force or

_ usurpation voh ws ko mar bay^ha \ / h e beat him without reason

4. rahna with the roots of intransitive verbs sometimes

CONJUNCT VERBS 77

means doing a thing of set purpose, but probably in this case the idea of " remaining ' is present, and if so we have two verbs, not one compound verb. roz yahag ake b3y);h rahta he comes daily and plants

hay himself down here jao msr raho go .off and die ^—•— moyg l9\v);ke so rahugga T shall go to sleep when I

return

TWO VERBS CLOSELY JOINED. BUT NOT FORMING A COMPOUND

The root of a verb joined to another verb, both verbs retaining their meaning, is ashortened conjunctive participle. In this case the two verbs are much more closely connected than' when the first is a full conjunctive participle.

lsi;ka bhaygs par cafh the boy got up on the ^^ baytha buffalo

bhaygs par csthke baytha he got up on the buffalo and sat down

mayg ne jsgsh rob rakkhi I have booked a seat \^ ^ ' hay

mayg ne almari meg rskh I have put it away in the "^ choT;a cupboard

IMPORTANT. Further ruies about compound verbs and close combinations of two verbs should be noted. In addition to the fact that they all have the limitation of meaning described on p. 72, we must observe :—

1. They are not used in straightforward negative clauses.

kha lia ? has he eaten it up ? nahir) khaya, he has not

but we might get:—

mayij ne kha to nahig lia I have not eaten it (though you seem to think I have, or, but I have thrown it away)

78 • TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

2. They are rarely joined to a third verb; thus we cannot say:—

bagj de sakta hay he can distribute it

it should be :—

bagt sakta hgy

3. They are rarely used with the conjunctive participle. It is wrong to say rakh lekar or rskh dekar.

PERSIAN AND ARABIC VERBS

Nearly aU Urdu verbs are of Hindi or Indian origin. A very few Iiave been formed from Persian and Arabic words.

Persian

baxjna xsridna gwzgma farm ana azmana /srmana tarasna and Ulcana

forgive (a sin or fault) buy pass command, say test, try feel ashamed or shy feel a longing (for, ko).

These are intransitive, but ]3lcana is also transitive. make some one feel a longing (for, ko). The transitive of tarasna is tsrsana

Arabic

badalna (trans, and intrans.) change, exchange bshssna argue; commoner : b^has

kerna qabulna accept; commoner : qabul

ksrna

CONJUNCT VERBS 79'

VERBS FORMED FROM ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS

Verbs composed of {a) Adjective and Verb, and (b) Noun and Verb

Before discussing these we must mention Hindi verbs formed directly from adjectives and nouns; such are :—

spnana, make one's own, assimilate (from 9pna, own) langpna, walk lame (from langâ, lame) bstana, show, tell (from bat, matter, word, etc.)

A very large number of verbs are formed by prefixing a noun or adjective to karna, make, and hona, be, become, or hojana, become; occasionally to one or two other verbs, such as dena, give; lena, take; marna, beat; khana, eat; pana, obtain.

It is difficult to say whether such verbs are real verbs or are two distinct ideas. Thus in Urdu for "praise h i m " we find " make his praise ". But in English too we can say either "praise h im" or "sing his pKUses ". We do not caU the latter a real verb, yet it is as much so as the Urdu " make his praise ". Other examples in English are " wash it " and " ^ v e i t awash " ; " straighten it " and "make it straight".

Adjective With an adjective the verb is almost always karna, make,

for the transitive, and hona or hojana, become, for the intransitive, kdrna with an adjective takes a direct object. •

msyg wse accha karugga I will make him well \-^^ voh occha ho gaya he became well \ -

Noun With ksrna, dena, marna, khana, lena, pana, etc,

See also separate section under l9gna, lagana, pp. 110-12. IMPORTANT NOTE.—În each case the noun joined to one

of these verbs, though it may be regarded as governed by

30 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI '

it. can never have the accusative form with ko. It must always have that accusative form which is the same as the nommative. Thus we can say :—

mayg ne ws ki tarif ki I praised him ''^

But we may not say :•— msyg ne ws ki tarif ko kia. So with all the others

A. k»rna with a noun. Three cases arise :—

(i) First Construction: the two are joined so closely as to become one word, and the gender oE the noun does not matter. Thus with feminine nouns :—

yad ksrna, learn by heart, ws ne apna sabaq yad kia, remember he learnt his lesson

jama ksrna, collect bahwt mal jama kia, collected much property

The same construction is found with other feminine nouns, as:—

taJab kama, summon talaj kama, search for [also (ii)]

fatah kama, conquer rwxsat kama, send off, say goodbye

malyj" kgma, rub [also (ii)] tamir karna, build [also (ii)] taliin karna, give religious

instruction to [also (ii)]; see talitn dena So too with masculine nouns. The gender does not

alfect the construction.

(ii) Second Construction: noun with ka, kl, according to gender.

(a) Feminine Nouns :—• tarif kama, praise mayi) ne ws ki tarif ki, I

praised him mynnat kama, beseech mayg ne ws ki mynnat ki, I

T t e ^ besought him

CONJUNCT VERBS

malyj" kama, rub

81

msjT) ne ws ki Jagg ki malyj ki, I rubbed his leg [also (i)]

ki tshqir karna, despise ki hyfazat ksma, protect ki rahnwmai ksrna, guide ki hyqarat kama, despise ki bwrai ksma, speak evil of ki tslaj" ksma, search for

[also (i)] ki nygahbani karna, protect

ki tazim karna, honour ki t3rbi3t kama, train, etc. ki nygrani karna, protect Id f srmanbardari karna, obey ki b9i;ai ksrna, exalt ki parvaryl kama, support,

rear ki mgdsd kama, help; also

with dena ki hydayat ksmal give religious instruction to ; [also (iii)]; ki talim kama J also with dena

(6) Similar are masculine nouns, as :— ka bondbast (bandobast) kama arrange for ka yntyzam kama arrange for ka faysia karna decide

(iii) Third Consiruction: this is like (i), but with this important difference, that the gender of the noun affects the verb. This is seen in the past tenses of the verb, when the noun is feminine. There are not so man}' in this class as in (i).

wse malamst ki, rebuked him

ws ne wse tambih ki, he punished him

ws ne wse nasihat ki, he gave him advice

ws ne wse hydayat ki, gave him orders.

ws ne wse takid ki, he urged liim

wse tadib ki, punished him

Cf. hydayat ksrna in {ii) and see hydayat dena below

B. dena with a noun. Two classes :—•

(i) The verb made up of dena and a noun takes its object in the dative case with ko. Pronouns may of course take their short forms, mwjhe, wse,


wnheg, etc. The noun joined to dena cannot take ko.

twm ne wse (or wsko) dhokha dia

twm ne ws ko ys bat ka badla dia

you deceived him

you rewarded him for this or paid him 'out for this (i.e., both good and bad meaning)

Cf. badla leiia below under lena. with feminine nouns.

So also

wse Jykast di, defeated him do faxsog ko salib di, crucified two men

Others are :—

talim dena tsrjih dena mgdad dena hydayat dena

teach; see ta l im kerna prefer help; also mad^d ksrna instruct about religious mat

ters; see hydayat karna in (ii) and (iii) above

(ii) The noun and dena are treated hke one single verb, and the gender of the noun does not aSect, the verb. There are very few in this class.

tartlb, fem., arrangement, gives us :—

kytab ko tartib dia compiled the book kytab is accusative here, not dative.

qsrar dena fix, decide jalse ka dyn qsrar do fix the day of the meet-

mg

C Nouns with marna. The noim joined to marna cannot take ko.

juti mama, strike with a bed marna, cane shoe koT;a mama, whip

CONJUNCT VERBS 83

lathi mama, strike with a big yota mama, dive (purposely; stick see infra yots khana)

> ws ne mwjhe juti mari he stmck me with a shoe \~^

D. khana, eat (with noun which cannot take ko). This ahnost always means " to suffer or experience something unpleasant".

dhokha khana, be deceived ihok^x khana, stumble ysm khana, be grieved bed khana, be caned mar khana, be beaten juti, jutiag khana, be beaten ko[a khana, be whipped with shoe qassm khana, take an oath palti khana, turn a somer-yots khana, sink in water, sault

be ahnost drowned; see fyksst khana, be defeated supra yota marna

Common, but pecuhar, is cwyli khana, speak against, slander:— ws ne meri cwyli khai he spoke against me, or heV

slaiidered me J.

E. lena, take (with noun which cannot take ko). mol lena, buy, with direct object:—

mayr) ne ek kytab mol U I bought a book V ' ^ bsdla lena, take vengeance (on, se), pay out (se, of

object):— voh twm se ys bat ka badla they will pay you out for \. • lerjge this

F. pana, obtain {with noun which does not take ne). hydaygt pana, reform (intr.) ws ne bydayat pai, .he re

formed, gave up evil ways

qarar pana, be decided; does not take ne in past participle tenses \-—• yeh bat q^rar pai this matter was decided \y^


But note that qarar pana, obtain rest, does take ne with past participle tense :—

axyr wnhoi) ne qarar paya at last they obtained rest

ADVERBS

Adverbial ideas are usually expressed in Urdu by means of abstract nouns and a postposition. Some adjectives are used as adverbs, and some words are both postpositions and adverbs.

Place

pas, near nice, below qarib, near upsr, upwards age, ahead, in front piche, behind par, on tlie other side bahar, outside andar," inside bhitar, inside

tarsf [feminine], direction, helps to forrn adverbs :— ys taraf over here, in this direction ^

• kys taraf where, in what direction? caroT) taraf on all sides, in all directions yahaij, here, hither vahag, there,-thither kahag, where, whither? jaharj, where, whither (re

lative) kahii), somewhere kahig na ksliii], somewhere

or other kahig kahig, here and there jahag kahig, wherever

yahig, vahiq, and jahig are emphatic forms of yahag, vahaq, jahaQ. jahig is uncommon.

ydhar, hither, here wdhar, thither, there kydhar, whither, where ? jydhar, whither, where (re

lative)-

In the case of these last four, the sense of motion to, hither, thither, etc., is commoner than that of rest in, here, there, etc.

ADVERBS 85

Time

aj, to-day tarsog (rare), the day after kal, to-morrow, yesterday or before persog psrsojj, the day after to-mor- narsog (rare), the day after

row, or day before yester- or before t»rsoq day.

In place of tarsoq and narsorj it is more usual to say cawthe dyn, pagcveq dyn.

The words given above are used only from the standpoint of to-day. From the standpoint of the past or the future " the next day" would be: dusre dyn, and "two days after": tisre dyn. "The day before" would be: ek dyn pehyJe, and " two days before " : do dyn pshyle

Other adverbs connected with time are:—

ahysts, slowly (and softly) sb se, from now (looking ab, now { either forward or back) J9b, when (relative) tab, then, after that (often jab se, since correlative to jab)

kab se, since when? fylfawrJ ' kabhi, somethnes jab kabhi, whenever kabhi ksbhi, occasionallj^ rafts rafta, gradually kabhi no kabhi, some time jaldi Jaldi, quickly _ or other

hote hote, gradually

abhi, jabhl, tebhi are emphatic forms of ab, jab, tab. jsbhi and tabhiusuaily mean: for that reason, that is why. See notes on ab, abhl, pp. 120-1; on jab, jabhi, jabtak, jab to„pp. 121-2.

aj kal, in these days dyn djm i day by day ^ dyn ba djm j- day after day '~' roz ba roz J gradually ^_^

8e TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

bar bar frequently "^ har roz (or simply, roz); gh^ci gh^ti/ "^J^^^ ' i «^«^ ^ e v e r y d a y

Esvere, early -—-'^,, fylhal, at present, in the dsfatsn, suddenly -^ meantime acanak, suddenly •v . / ' \/bylfel, almost the same as

fylhal

Manner

taroh [Jem.), manner, is used for adverbs of manner.

ys tarah, in this way'^--''^ kys tarsh, how? '••^^ scchi tsrsh, well N—-" yur), thus jui|, as (relative) tui), tyug. vui) (correlative to

juq) so jug tug karke, with difficulty

yughi, juqhi, emphatic forms of yug and jut). For notes on jui), juQhi, juqjiig, jugtug, see p. 122.

yughi often means "without any reason", "causelessly ".

syse, so, thus ksyse, how ? jsyse, as (relative) vayse, so {correlative to kyogkar, how? (especially jayse)

in rhetorical questions, often suggesting impossibility)

Other adverbs:—

albatts of course, certainly elysraz, y^rsz in short ^nqarib nearly bahwt very baxubi well baqi after all, in any case b9i;nk3r more, to greater extent be/ak without doubt

ADVERBS

well then also, even; see pp. 127-8 altogether only, that is all yes

S7

bhsla bhi byikwl faqst hag hargyz (used only with negative): never hi adverb of emphasis; see pp. 123-4 hote hote see under Adverbs of Time

. kshig much (in comparison) kam se ksm,

kam 9Z bam at least koi approximately kyog why ? xaskar especially xwsusan especially lyhaza therefore, accordingly masbn for example mat don't (with imperative) na not, no nahaq unwarrantably, unreasonably • nahiri no, not nyhayat extremely niz also phyr then, again qarib, qsriban nearly rsfta rsfta see under Adverbs of Time saxt very (of unpleasant thmgs) -' syrf only tak not even (emphasising preceding (with negative) word) to indeed, then yttyfaqan by chance zarur certainly, of necessity zyada more

kehig, much, as in kehiq 3ccha or behtsr : very much better,

koi, approximately; koi das mil ka fasla, a distance of about 10 mis.


met is used with imperatives only when the person is addressed as tu or twm.

tak in negative-clause means " not even " ; as :— • gh3];a tak na cho];a he did not leave me even a

water vessel It will be noticed that tak is not a postposition since

we do not have gh3(;e tak.

POSTPOSITIONS .

Postpositions generally follow the noun or pronoun or adverb which they govern. Nouns or pronouns are governed by postpositions in the ordinary oblique case.

Etymologically postpositions are in most cases nouns in the locative case, sometimes old nouns, sometimes nouns in current use. Sometimes they directly follow the word they govern, but more often the word for "of", ke or ki, intervenes. . This brings out the fact that they are nouns and have gender, ke being used when they are masculine, and ki when they are feminine.

Postpositions immediately following the word governed :^

* ka, ke, ki, of; see note par, upon bo, for, to meg, in, into se, from, with, than, by ne, by tsk, up to, till sarriet, along with

Postpositions following the word governed, but preceded by ke :— A .

ke pas, near, with w ' T k e lie, for, for the sake of ke piche, behind, after J ke nice, under ke upar, over, above H ke age, in front of, before ke nazdik, near / ke sath, along with ke bhitar, inside '. ke andar, in, inside

• This is both a postposition and an adjective; i t becomes k e before a masculine noun ia tlie plural and in the oblique singular. Before all feminine nouns, it is kl .

POSTPOSITIONS S9

ke pare, beyond ke vaste, for, for the sake of ke syre, at the end or ex

tremity of ke baysyr, without ke mwtabyq, according to ke mare, through, on ac

count of ke mafyq (mwafyq), accord-

mg to, suitable to ke sypwrd, in charge of ke havale, in charge of ke bsjae, instead of ke bgraks, the opposite of ke layq, suitable for ke darmyan, in the middle

of ke bays, on account of ke qabyl, worthy of, fit for ke xylaf, ke barxylaf, in op

position to •*• ke alava, besides, in addi

tion to ke zymme, in the responsi

bility of ke bsdle, in exchange for ke gyrd, ke 5n:d gyrd, round

about ke qsrib, near

;ke par, on the other side of, / beyond

(ke hag, at or to the house or / ^ place of / ke hath, by the hand of 1 ke samne, in front of •;Jre bsmujyb, according t« ke byna, without

; ke bahar, outside of '\ke barabar, equal to, on a

level with ke rubOTu, face to face with ke bavwjud, in spite of ke mwtaallyq, connected

with ke ev9z, instead of ke darpay, in pursuit of ke ssbab, on account of ke vasile, by means of,

through ke as pas, round about and

near ke bad, after (in time) ke qabl, before (in time) ke zarie, by means of ke sjn/a, besides, in addition

to ke carog taraf, on all sides of

The following come after their noun or pronoun, but are preceded by ki :— ki taraf, towards ki xatyr, for the sake of ki manj'nd, like ki nysbat, than ki janyb, towards ki babat, concerning ki mysl, like

ki J9gah,.in place of ki maryfat, by means of,

through ki tsrah. in the manner of ki badawlat, thanks to,

through (of good things) ki zabani, by the mouth of


Occasionally one of these p<^tpositions is separated from ki and comes before its noun or pronoun. In this case fci is changed to ke, as :—

manynd ws ke like him

There are a few Arabic and Persian postpositions which precede their nouns or pronouns. Some of these are used only in certain fixed phrases, and their meanings as postpositions do not arise. The following are worth recording :—

dar, in be, without ba, with az, from, by (of author) ma, along with fi, per; as :— ta, up to, till li sadi, per cent.

Except be and ma, all are used only in Persian and Arabic expressions.

NOTES

I. donog, tlnog, carog, etc. (with postpositions)

The following sentences show how to attach postpositions to these numerals:—

tinog ne lykha donor) ko dykhao carog admiog ne kaha

tisra hsrf zabar awr pej" se donog tsrsh hay

rastbazog a^r narastog do-nog ki qyamat hogi

-ws ne h5Tiduog awr mwsal-manog donog par ylzam lagaya

the three of them wrote show it to both aU four men said; cf. carog

admi ae, all four men came '

the third letter can be written with short a and short u, both ways

there wiU be a resurrection of both the righteous and

/^the unrighteous he blamed both Hindus and

Muhammadans

CONJUNCTIONS 91 mwrdor) awr zyndog donop

ka xwdavand donog beôr) meg se KOT ek

ko dwa di

Lord of both the dead and the Hving

he blessed both his sons

2. Two or three postposicions may be used together

wn ke bic meg se jm mei) ka meri taraf se kahna mes par se gyra yn meg se ek ne kaha ghar ke samne ka daraxt ws ke pas se C9la gsya

" From " of motion from a person cannot be expressed by se alone. This sentence would more naturally be: wse cnocker cala geya.

from among them (one) of them say from me, on my behalf it fell oft the table (from on} one of them said (from in) the tree in front of the house he went away from him \,^

CONJUNCTIONS - i . awr, and

o, and (Persian) lekyn, but psr, but-balky, but (not so and so,

but so and so); on the contrary; say rather

agar, if harcand, although to, then, indeed cugky, since p9s, so, in short, accord-

mgly nahig to, if not, otherwise taky, in order-that ya , . . ya, either . . . or xah . . . xah, whether . . .

or; either . . . or

cahe . . . cahe, caho . . . caho, whether . . . or; either . . . or

va, or ky, that magar, but taham, nevertheless, yet tawbhi, nevertheless, yet go, go ky, although halagky, although phyr, then cwnagcy, accordingly, so kyogky, because vama, if not, otherwise aya, whether kya . . . kya, whether . . . • or; both . . . and ns . . . na, neither . , . nor


NOTES

1. aya, whether; is used at the beginning of noun clauses; it is often followed a few wor{k farther on by ya, or :—

jake pucho (ky) aya twm go and ask him whether he ana cahte ho ya nahu) wishes to come or not

In this sentence, ya nshig may be omitted.

2. kya . . . kya : separat^ words, but not clauses :— kya bsfe kya cho|;e "-^ whether great or small; i.e.,

both great and small

3. xah . • . xah : separates both clauses and words :— xah swneg xah na swneg whether they listen or not xah chofe xah b3i;e whether small or great, but

not both (see kya . . • kya)

i. cahe . . • cahe; usually separates clauses:— cahe dudh pio cahe Isssi pio drink either milk or butter

milk cahe kwch hi ho - no matter what happens;

lit., whether anything may be, with " o rno t " understood, Xn this case the second cahe is omitted

If the nominative is twm, as in the first sentence under cahe, we may change cahe to caho, you wish—caho dudh pio caho lessi.

5. cahe . . . cahe, caho . . . caho, xah . . . xah : all mean either one alternative or the other, but not both alternatives. On the other hand, kya . . . kya means both the one and the otJier.

6. lekyn, magsr, par, and bslky. balky is distuict from the others. It expresses English

" but ", " in fact", etc., in phrases like the following: not

INTERJECTIONS 93

SO, but on the contrary; not only so but more; not that, in fact not even this; so, in fact even more than that.

lomti nahiri bslky gidaj; not a fox but a jackar yahii] nshir) balky wlfa not only so, but on the con-'

xsfa hua trary he got angry {wlja = \-upside down)

car kya ? bslky ek bhi four ? why, not even one ^ nelmi aya came

hag, wse n8wkar rakhugga, yes, I will take him as a ser- \, balky ghsr bhi dugga vant; in fact I shall give

him a house in addition

lekyn, magar, and par all mean " b u t " in adversative clauses. There is httle difference, lekyn is the strongest, mager the next, and par is the weakest, par can never be stressed; the other two can. In most cases one may use any one of the three. Indian grammars say that magar marks exceptions. There is not much in this.

V sab ae msgor karim na aya they all came, but Karim

(fid not come twm Jayad ranjida ho, par you will perhaps be annoyed, --^

bole bayayr kayse rahug ? but how can I refrain from speaking?

mayg ne saxt hwkm dia I gave strict orders, but h e ^ lekyn ws ne meri ek na paid no attention to a mani single thing I said

The difference is very slight.

INTERJECTIONS

hae, hae hae, alas ! afsos, what a pity ! vah va, how splendid I JabaJ, bravo ! are [Jem. ari), O !, used in kaj, kaj ky, would tha t !

addressing some one; it implies the pronoun twm or tu


We may include here nouns of address:—

ji sir, madam; may be said to any one who is addressed as ap

ji hag yes, sir ji nahir) no, sir

jonab, hwzur, sorkar are very respectful terms of address, meaning " s i r " or "madam", janab may be used in any highflown conversation for " sir " or " madam ". hwzur is used chiefly by servants, but also occasionally by others as an exaggerated term of respect, ssrkar, literally the Govenmient o( a state or coimtry, is rather obsequious; it is rather common among villagers, but rare among servants.

vala has the sense of being connected with, being in charge of, belonging to, possessing. With a verbal noun or gerund it is an agent, one doing or about to do something. I t is used as a suffix to nouns, including verbal noims, and to some adverbs and postpositions. Nouns of the Swxtnd Declension, ending in -a, including verbal nouns, or -3, change -a or -a to -e before -vala. I t cannot be used with an adjective.

dwpaft^vala' the man with a shawl bokrivala the goatherd voh aj janevali hsy she's about to go to-day; she

is starting to-day h»m car khanevale hayg we are four eaters; my

family consists of four bicvala the middle one parvala the one on the other side

• -vala can be suffixed to the following adverbs of time and postpositions or adverbs of place :—

*=>^j, to-day tarsog Urare) (see under / kal, to-morrow, yesterday narsogj adverbs of time) y^ parsoi), day after to-morrow, ab, now " day before yesterday

NECESSITY, ADVISABILITY. DUTY 95

pas, near qsrib, near

M nszdik, near par, on the other side bad, after .bic,. middle darmyan, middle nice, below~~~~'" upsr, above

sathjjd^gjKith. MJiiheT^ tout. pshyle, before^, formerly bahsrTou^riSe sndar, bMtsr, inside piche, behind age, before pare, beyond Dsrabar, on a level with

-vala must not be used with adjectives; thus, referring to topiag, caps :— ap kali cahte hajT) ya lal? do you want the black one or ^

mayri kah lugga the red? I will take the black one

It would be wrong to say kalivali; still more so, kala-vala.

NECESSITY, ADVISABILITY, DUTY

These ideas are expressed by either :— '- i. rfie infinitive with one of the verbs Aona, fiey. t&a, together with some adjective (or even noun) meaning necessary, proper, advisable, duty, etc. [On this infinitive see below, p . 96.]

2. One of these adjectives or nouns with the conjunction ky, that, followed by the present subjunctive or past

, conditional. The adjectives generally used are zsruri, zarur, necessary;

mwnasyb, suitable, proper; vajyb or lazym, right, proper; forz. a noun meaning " duty " is also quite common.

Examples of (1) and (2):— (1) jana mwnasyb hay

jana mera farz tha (2) lazym hay ky mayg

jaug • lazym tha by voh jata

..it.is proper.to go it was my duty to go it "is right that I should \ ,

• - g o ; - • '

it was right that he should * go

\ 96 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

, 3. The idea of necessity, must, etc., may also be expressed by one of the verbs bona, hay, tha, papia/without the word Z3rur, necessary.

mwjhe jana pax^g^- I shall have, to go "V""^ mwjhe jana hay I have to go r ^ "

4. The idea of duty, advisability, ought, etc., may also be expressed by :—

(i) cable, it is advisable or desirable or right, with the . infinitive, or, in the past tense, with the infinitive

and tha. (ii) cahie alone for the present tense, or with tha

followed by the conjunction ky, that, and the present subjunctive or past conditional.

mwjhe jana cahie I ought to go mwjhe jana cahie tha I ought to have gone cahie tha ky mayri jata I ought to have gone

I t wUl be noticed that although cahie by itself.means " it is desirable ", it can be used with tha, and then cahie tha means "*it was desirable ".

Gerundive Infinitive In the above cases the infinitive is almost always the

gerundive infinitive (see p. 68}, i.e., it is an adjective agreeing with the object if there is one {except in case (5) explained below). We must remember that in reaUty this object is generally the grammatical nominative. As will be seen below, the gerund is sometimes used,

The rules for the construction of the gerundive infinitive are as follows :—

(a) If there is no object the infinitive is mascuhne singular.

(b) If there is an object followed byko the infinitive is masculine singular.

(c) If there is an object without ko the infinitive agrees with it in gender and number.

HABIT 97

((f) The person who has to or ought to perforin the action mentioned, or for whom it is necessary, is put in the dative case with ko. In English this person is usually in the nominative case.

Examples:— hameg 9pni bhul manni cahie jvse naj"patiag xaridni

pareggi twrnher) apni amdani ko

gsgvana mwnasyb nahig mwjhe cyl;|;hi âk meg ^.atoi

thi

we should admit our fault \ ^ he will have to buy pears J'^

it is not proper for you t o \ -throw away your income

I had to post a letter v-^"^

For the subjunctive after ky the rule is that the present subjunctive is used for present and future time, and the-past conditional for past time. ap ka farz h3y ky sdab se it is your duty to answer ^

politely voh vsrzyj it is right that he should doV-

physical exercise the gardener should have i.

squeezed out the lemons we should have prepared \_

beforehand

J9vab deg lazym hsy ky

kare mail ko cahie tha ky nimbu

nycoi;ta hameg vajyb tha ky pahyle

se taiyari karte

Gerund or Verbal Noun This is sometimes used instead of the gerundive, but not

often if there is an object. mera fswran lsvi{ ana lazym

balky f arz hay

ap ka ys tarah \hu[ bolna mwnasyb na tha

it is right, in fact a duty, for me to return at once (my immediately returning is right, in fact a duty)

your telling lies like this was improper

HABIT Habit can be expressed to some extent by the Present

and Imperfect tenses, but to emphasise the habitual nature


of an 'action, the verb karna is used with what appears to be the past participle of the required verb. I t is not certain that this is a past participle, but beginners wiU remember the rule more easily if they consider that it is. I t has the same form as the masculine past participle for every verb except jana, which takes the form jaya." The form does not vary for gender or number. ,

ws ke daftsr meg na bsytha do not make a nabit of sit-ksro ting in his office ^ ,, '

majqi Jam ke vaqt ^shla I used to go for a walk at karta tha sunset

CONTINUANCE, ETC.

rsbna : remain, reside, when used with another verb, has two meanings :—

1. raha, the past participle, joined to the root of another verb, expresses doing or being something at the moment spoken of. We .have already seen this in the conjugation of the verb,

pi rsha drinking at the moment wp raha flying at the moment |emi jangsl meg pani pi the tigress was drinking'

rshi thi water in the forest wqab asman meg wp rahe eagles are flying in the sky

hayg

2. r»hna with the present participle of any verb means to go on doing something, keep on doing, continue to do. This closely resembles the English idiom.

sari rat jua khelte rahe they gambled all night meri bivi rafu karti rahti my wife keeps on darning

hay

Beginners find a difficulty in the use of karna (see last section) and rahna, when used with other verbs, and still

C O N D I T I O N A L SENTENCES 99

more when used with each other. The following should be studied:— richni seb kha rahi hay richni seb khati hay richni seb khati rshti hay

richni seb khaya karti hay

Compare also;—

malka xemoi) meg raha karti hayi)

itiaiks kam karti rshti hayo malka kam kar rshi hayi)

the she-bear is eating apples \ the she-bear eats apples •—— the she-bear keeps on eatit^

apples the she-bear makes a habit

of eating apples

the queen makes a habit of living in tents

the queen keeps on working the queen is working just

now

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

The method of expressing conditions depends on whether the fulfilment of the condition is (a) assumed, (&) doubtful, but possible, (c) impossible:—

(a) When the fulfilment is assmned as at least extremely probable, the indicative is generally used.

• agar ap ki aysi marzi hay to zarur jaugga

agar nawkar se yeh bhul bui to ws se bai;a qwsur hua

ap der se aegge to ap ka kam na banega

if this is your will, I shall V certainly go

if the servant made this mistake, he committed a great fault

if you come late you will not" obtain your purpose (your work wiU not be made)

(5) If the fulfilment is possible but doubtful, the protasis (the if-claose) has the present subjunctive. The other may be either mdicative or present


subjunctive. The latter implies more doubt, The apodosis (second clause) sometimes has the verb ill the imperative, which is only a form of the present subjunctive.

Jayr ho to Jer bhi kahega ns if he is a poet, he will make up verses, won't he ?

if the tiger has been caught in the trap it is a good thing V~"

take care, if you use bad /language you will be sorry

I i v e the order and I will go i Vii I get permission I shall (or

can) begin the work if you go forward you are a

dead man; (Ut. if you went forward you died)

(c) Fulfilnient not possible; both clauses in past conditional or pluperfect conditional.

sgar Jer pynjre meg phags geya ho to occha hsy

xabsrdar twm ne gali di to pachtaoge

hwkm dijie to msyg ab jaug agar yjazat myle to kairi

' fwru karug ' age bsfhe to msre

agar la^ke ke bap ko xsbar hoti to bafa ghabrata

ys kothp t i safedi na ki gsi hoti to mawlvi sahab saxt naraz na hote ?

zara bhi durandeji karte to sysi bevsqufi twm se sar-zad na hoti

ap wse dargwzar karte to accha hota

if the boy's father knew, he would be much distressed (or had known . . , would have been)

if this room had not been whitewashed, would the maulvi not have been very angry?

if you had exercised the least foresight, you would not have committed such.folly

if you had forgiven him, it would have been a good thing

For examples of the pluperfect conditional, see sentences, Lesson 27, pp. 210-12.

SOME PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS 101

SOME PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS ' Types :

(i) phsta jata hay. (ii) pathta jata hay.

(iiij ps];he jata h8y. (iv) jata rsha. (v) kahe deta hay. (vi) aya cahta hay. (vii) roya ki

(i) Past participles of intransitive verbs are used with tenses formed from the present participle of j ana to indicate being on the verge of or rapidly approaching some condition.

mera dyl ^hafa jata hay my heart is just breaking \ ^ mayg mari jati hurj I am almost dead (i.e.,

exhausted, greatly distressed)

mera gala bayfha jata tha my throat was sitting down, i.e., I was rapidly becom-

; ing so hoarse that I could not speak

mere rogg|;e khaj e hue jate the hairs (on my body) were the ready to stand on end

(through alarm, etc.) mayg accha hua jata hug I am rapidly getting well,

am almost w ^ Note that hota jata hug would mean " gradually getting

well".

(ii) When the present participle of any verb, transitive or intransitive, is used with jana as an auxiliary verb, three cases arise:—

(fl) The verb jana may retain its sense of "going". In this case there are two distinct verbs :—

voh hagsta jata tha he was going along laughing ^ gwfialetija take the doU with you {/e»».) ca pite jao have some tea before you go


(b) If the first verb is purely neuter, not expressing action of any kind, the meaning is " gradually becoming ".

voK bufha hota jata tha he was gradually becoming old

- Note that in example 4 under (i) above, khsca bona is not a neuter verb, though hona by itself is.

(c) If the first verb is transitive or intransitive {but not neuterV the two verbs together mean " keep on doing' ' -with the action limited to one occasion at a time. It implies intention, and therefore is confined to sentient bemgs, including inanimate things personified. Arising out of the intention implied there is often a suêstion of " in spite of something going on at the same time, possibly tending to hinder i t " . I t sometimes seems to say ' ' he went on, and would not give up ". The meaning does not differ greatly from that given below under p9];he jana, but in this case the first verb may be intransitive as well a.1 transitive. ••

voh cahe lakh msna karta although he used (on various tha mgyg apna kam ksrta occasions) to forbid me jata tha strongly, yet (on each oc

casion) I went on with my work (lit. he used to forbid me 100,000)

(iii) The past participle of transitive verbs, inflected in the masculine singular obUque form, is'used with jana to indicate " keep on doing '*. The action is generally limited to one occasion at a time. Like p3];hta jana, dealt with in the previous section, this implies intention, is coiifined to sentient beings, and has a suggestion of something else going on at the same time, possibly tending to hinder it. phulog ko kyog choê jate - ^why do you go on leaving

ho out the flowers ? (choc i^t* •'o would mean " leave them and go off ".)

SOME PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS

sagp wse nygle jata tha

103

the snake kept on swallowing (_ it up

lafka 9pna ssbaq ps^he jata the boy kept on at his lesson tha (on that occasion)

(paphta raha might mean he worked for some months.)

ram ka nam rs{& jao keep on repeating Ram's name (do not mind what is going on at the same time)

he tried hard to stop me, but I went on with my work

ws ne bahwt mana kia, par mayri apna kam kie gaya

This is like the case discussed under (ii), but here the first verb must be transitive.

(iv) jata rehna means :— {a) disappear, (&) die, (c) keep on gomg,

ys /shr ki sari rawnaq jati rshi

voh vahari do mahine barabar jata raha

the liveliness of this town has disappeared, i.e:, few people are left in it

he continued going there for two months

(v) The past participle of a transitive verb {inflected in the oblique masculine singular) is joined to dena, rather less commonly to lena, still less commonly to 4,alna, and least commonly to bay^hna, to show definite decision. This use is. confined to tenses formed from the present participle.

I tell you plainly ^ ^ / I will wash it in a moment I will take my shawl

mayg saf kahe deta hug msyi) abhi dhoe iâJta hug mayg gpna dwpafâ lie leta

hug

. (vi) The uninflected past participle of a verb {or what looks like a past participle) is joined to the tenses formed


from the present participle of cahna to express tlie idea of " about to do something ",

gai;i aya cahti hay the train is just commg

With jana the form jaya (not gaya) is used. See p. 66, (vii) The past participle (or what looks like the past

participle) of any verb may be used with the past tenSe of karna (which in this case does itot- take ne) to mean continuous action. voh chay mahine tak myl;t;i they were carrying earth for

d,hoya kie six months bw[hia der tak royu ki the old woman kept on

weeping for a long time

This should be compared with the use of the past participle of a verb along with all tenses of karna exce-pt those formed from the past participle to express habitual action.

The methods of expressing the passive may be summarised as follows:—

(i) By turning the sentence roundso as to make the verb active. See above.

(ii) By the passive voice—not so common as in English, See above.

(iii) By an intransitive verb having what seems to us a passive sense. Thus an angry schoolmaster says:—

la(;ko xamof! nahig to boys, be quiet'. or you will Vy\P& §^t the cane (lit. be

beaten) The transitive verb implies intention; there

fore a servant breaking a plate is right in saying "p l* t l " t Sî" ' the plate has got broken. "mayg ne t o r i " , I have broken it, suggests deliberate breaking. Gross carelessness would count as intentional.

ws ne 3pna sara mal wi;a dia he squandered all his property

SOME PARTICIPIAL CONSTR-UCTIO.NS 105

(iv) By using an adjective with a passive sense, such as an Arabic passive' participle, with hona or ho jana:—^

nawkar mawquf ho gaya the servant was dismissed v ^ ^

Notes on the Use of the Passive Voice

1, Many kinds of transitive verbs made up of two or more words can be used in the passive. Such are the following :—

(i) Compound verbs, e.g., verbs with dena, lena, âlna, rskhna, as their second element.

tamam dsrsxt ka(; 4<de gse all the trees were cut down V^

(ii) Verbs composed of noun or adjective and verb. moj;3r mol li gsi the motor-car was bought ssbaq yad kia gaya the lesson was learnt '

A remarkable thing is that this sometimes occurs when the active verb does not take the direct object.

fshr ke qsrib bahwt se admi many men were crucified salib me gae near the city

The active voice of this verb takes the dative. (iii) Isgna, sakna and cwkna can be used along with

the passive. j6i;a sia ja cwka the suit of clothes has been

made (sewn) ab voh wstadog meg gyna now he has begun to be l -

jane laga counted among the masters

bayl jota na ja saka the bull could not he yoked

(iv) Verbs used in expressions signifying necessity, duty, etc.

ws vaqt cytthi lykhi jani thi at that time a letter had to be written


(v) Along with rahna and the present participle which show continuity :—

paejamasia jata rahega the trousers will continue being made

(vi) Two verbs used together as a form of repetition. vahig pala posa gaya v/''^* "^^ there he was brought

up and looked after (vii) A very peculiar use is the impersonal passive with

the logical nominative governed by ko, which means " as for, with regard to, etc. ".

ws ko bar taraf kia gaya with regard to him it was dismissed, i.e., he was dis-

y" missed ws ko xub pita gsya ^^he was soundly beaten ws ko bytha dia gaya he was seated, i.e., he was

given a chair Students should not attempt to copy this

usage till they have become very iamiliar with it. The straightforward passive is also correct and quite common: voh bar t^raf kia gaya, he was dismissed.

(viii) The negative passive expresses inability, cannot, could not, etc. See p. 69.

SPECIAL POINTS The use of ne

[See p. 49.] {a) Compound Verbs. A compound verb requires ne if

both the verbs of which it is composed would take ne when used alone. If either of the verbs would not take ne when tised alone, the compound verb will not take ne.

E.g., keh dena; both verbs take ne, therefore kali dena takes ne.

mayg ne saf kah dia I said plainly

SPECIAL POINTS 107

But ro dena, weep; hoqs dena, laugh; cal dena, go off; ho lena, accompany, etc.; ro lena, weep—^have in each case jane verb which does not take ne ; therefore the compound verbs do not take it.

bflii ro di the girl burst out crying donog sypahi cal die > both the sepoys went off

So also;— voh le aya, he brought voh le gaya, he took away

(&) The following verbs which are or can be transitive do not take ne : ~ *bolna, speak bhulna, forget *bakna, talk nonsense lagna, begin •jsnna, give birth to cwkna, finish lana, bring (probably con- karna, expressing continu-,

tracted from le-ana) ance:' as voh roya ki, she dykliai dena, be visible kept on crying swnai dena, be audible phagdna, leap over pana, succeed in, manage to,

1 be allowed to

(c) The following verbs can be either transitive or intransitive. They take ne when they are transitive; otherwise they do not. badslna, change bhsrna, fill, become full, be jhwlasna, scorch, be filled

scorched rsgajTia, rub pala^na, return wlaâ, turn upside down qarar pana, obtain rest pwkama, call out qarar pana ne, be decided pwkarna ne, call to some one

for help

p3i;hna: learn, read, recite; and sikhna; learn to do

• These, when the object is expressed, may take ne. Thus :— ws ne [or voh] behuda beka he talked great nonsense ws ne [or voh] jhut bola he told a lie

For " what did he say? " we may not use ws ne; it is voh kya holaf


something, should both have ne, but occaMonally occur without it. •

samajhna, even when transitive, is better without ne, but occasionally has it,

(d) The following never have ne when there is no object, but when there is one they may either have it or omit it. hama, lose, be defeated jitna, win When they have an object such as bazi, game; Jart, bet; mwqaddyma, lawsuit, they may either take or omit ne.

cahna, wish, omits ne if the nominative is dil, jl , heart; otherwise it takes ne.

bshasna, argue; cyllana, call out, do not take ne ; sath dena, accompany, does.

(e) The following intransitive verbs take ne :— thukna, spit hggna, mutna, perform the chigkna, sneeze offices of nature jhagkna, peep

. thukna can be transitive, meaning despise :— sare Jshr ne wse thuka the whole city despised him but it t ak^ ne whether it is transitive or not.

' hay, hota hay, hota tha, tha, hua In this connection the following should be noted :—

hay and tha mean " i s " and "was on one occasion ". hota hay and hota tha mean " i s " or "was as a rule,

generally ". The same idea is found in the present and imperfect

tenses of other verbs. Finally, the form described on pp. 97-8 means " make a practice of''

Examples: ys bakre ka ek hi sii)g hay this goat has only one horn bskroi] ke do agg bote hsyg-Zgoats have two horns bhalu mskai khate hayg ybears eat Indian coi:n (maize)

SPECIAL POINTS 109 dekho bhalu maksi kha raha look, the bear is eating the

hsy maize ek bhalu pshai; mer) rahta a bear lives in the mountain

hgy, jo hsr roz hamari which makes a daily prac-makgi ko khaya karta liay tice of eating our maize

tha,' hua: tha means simply '•' was " ; hua suggests " became " .

voh xsfa tha he was angry voh xafa hua he got angry • ws ka fayda yeh tha this was his decision fsysb hua ky . . . it was decided that (decision

became that) kya bat thi what was the matter? \ - ^ — kya hua what has happened ? ^^—i

m)'lna, mylana See also p. 15. mylna (mtransitive), accrue, come to, meet, agree with,

join with, mix wilJi.

1. Of things:— Be obtained, accrue. The word for the thing is in

the nominative, and that for the person who obtained it in the dative.

wn t o tin tin payse myle they got three pice each (to them three pice each accrued)

2. Of persons:— Meet, join; with ko, by accident; with se, by design.

voh mwjhe rastemeg myla I met him on the road (Urdu has " he met me ")

sab se myl lo shake hands with everyone (lit. meet everyone)

sb to ap bhi wdhsr hi ja now you too have joined myle their party {lit, have gone

and joined there)


mayg ws se jake myla

voh mwjhe kshig nahii) mylta

voh mwjh se kabhi nahirj mylta

voh men mwxalj^fat ke lie myl gae

3. mylksr, together

myla jwla, mixed up

/t went and had a talk with him

I cannot find him anywhere

he never comes to see me

they have conspired to oppose me

sab mylkar khao, eat altogether

myla jwla pata hay, it is lying all mixed up

tnylana: to compare, make agree, introduce to, mix, joined:— ^^—^ •

-oare these two letters yn donoi) xatop ko mylao tmKp, tahsil ki ghap se mayg ne-v^^'set my watch by the Tahsil

8pni jeb gh3i;i mylai

ksl mayg bate sahab se myla; kys ne mylaya ?

clock (or simply compared it)

yesterday I had an interview with the head {of any particular department). Who introduced you?

it is God that has united us (made me meet with you)

xwda hi ne twjh se mylaya mwjhe

kysi ne ys Jarbat meg zyada some one has put too much qand mylai , ' sugar in this shertiet

ws ne hag meg hag mylai '-^ he ^ e e d to everything V-"'. ^ / ( m i x e d yes with yes)

ham wse spni taraf myla we shall get him to join our legge party (mix him with pur

side)

bgna, bgana

We have already noticed the use of Isgna with verbal nouns, p. 70. I t means Uterally " to be attached, to s t ick" (intransitive). The following sentences will

SPECIAL POINTS HI

illustrate its various meanings, pp. 163-4.

See also the sentences ori

S9xt dhup bgi

ap ko cot nshig lagi na ?

mwjhe lohe se [hokar lagi

. meri juti lagti hay ssfar meg pendra dyn

Isgegge ' bis admioi) ki nawkari lagti

hay mwjhe har roz bara bsje

bhuk lagti hay

ksl mwjhe do bsje pyas lagi

voh mera bhai Iggta hay

ws ka yayr mwlk meg dyl {or ji) nahig lagta

kytni der bgegi ? janab ap t e nam par dhabba

lagega wn ka kahna mwjhe bwra

Jaga yeh safa ws ko accha nahig

lagta ap ke hath kya laga ?

yeh cabi qwfl meg nahig lagti ghar meg ag lag gai mere bap kam meg lage

rahte hayg

the sun was very hot (severe sunshine attached)

you did 'not get hurt, did you? (cot,/ . , blow, hurt)

I knocked my foot against a, piece of iron

my shoe pinches v-^'^^ the journey will take a fort

night they employ twenty men

I get hungry every day at twelve (hunger attaches to me)

yesterday I felt thirsty at two

he is, one might say, my brother, i.e., my cousin, oldish nephew, etc., almost my brother

he is not happy in a foreign country (ms heart does not stick there)

how long will it take ? '-'' sir, your name will be dis-'

graced (dhabba = stain} what they said hurt me

(attached as evil) this turban does not suit

him, or, he does not like it, what did you get (what

attached to your hand) ? this key does not fit the lock the house caught fire my father is alwaj's at work


mwjhe ws se bimari lagi I caught his illness twmheg mwjh se kliai|si Isgi you have caught my cough dostog meg meyg kyog why shotild I feel erabar-

ghabrane bga ? rassed (or confused or shy). among friends ?

wse mwijh na Isgne do do not let him become forward with you (or, too familiar with you)

talvar mwjhe bgi (occasion- the swprd struck me . ally mere lag!) \,<^'^'^

dsraxtog meg bshwt phal there is a lot of fruit on the Isga hay trees Some ideas expressed intransitively with lagna can be,

expressed transitively by Isgana. This is true of the following taien from the sentences just given :—

safar meg pandrs djn take a fortnight over the Iggana .''journey

der lagana vtake a long time over dliabba Isgana to disgrace cabi bgana try the key in the lock ghsr meg ag kgana set lire to the house dss admiog ki nawkari to put ten men to the work

lagana

The postpositions are the same as for the intransitive form. Others are:— ^"^

ws ne kaysz par mohr Isgai he sealed the paper mayg ne dsrvaze ki cytxsra I bolted the door

[or catxsni) bgai

cahna, J"wru ksrna, J"wru hona, xstm ksrna, xstm hona

cahna, wish; /wru karna, begin; xdtm ksrna, finish, are used with the gerundive infinitive. The rules for this infinitive are :—

(i) If there is no object, the infinitive is masculine singular.

SPECIAL POINTS • 113

(ii) If there is an object governed by ko, the infinitive is masculine singular.

(iii) If there is an object not governed by ko, the-infinitive agrees with it.

Jayr ne nazra p3[hni cahi the poet wished to read a poem

ws |3xs ne ag swlgani Jwru that man began lighting a ki lire

mere valyd do haveliaij my father (plural of respect) banvani cahte hayg, magar wishes to have two houses tisri haveh ko bsnvana built, but does not wish to nahii) cahte get the third house built

Jwru hona, begin (intransitive) and xstm hona, be finished, are sometimes used with a similar construction of the gerundive infinitive. tab cytfhiag ani jani Jwru after that, letters began to

huig come and go (i.e., to pass between them)

cahna = be about to cahna in its present and imperfect tenses is used with

what seems to be a past participle (see p. 97 tinder Habit) to express " be about to ".

sahab sbhi aya cahte hayr) the gentleman is just about to come

ghop mara cahti thi the mare was about to die

But note:—

bw4d.hi bycari marna cahti the poor old woman wished t^ thi to die

This apparent past participle is invariable in forin. See pp. 98, 104.

cahie

cahie, desirable, comes from cahna; its use with verbs


has been explained on p. 96. With nouns the rule is as. follows:—

The word for the person who desires a thing is in the dative, the thing desired is in the nominative. In the plural cahie changes to cahierj when tised by itself without another verb. ^^

mwjhe kal car qwli cahier) I want four coolies to-morrow i,/""'

dâk sr ko scchi dsvaeri cahie the doctor wanted good ' thig medicine

kshna, bolna, bstana (bstlana), jstana (Jatlana)

kshna

(i) To say:— ws ne kgha

(ii) To call:— yse kya kahte hayij

ws ko ksrim kahte hayg, jahyl kahte hayi)

(iii) To tell :— mayg ne ws se ksh dia

. (iv) To command:— nawkar se kaho gaji toiyar

kare jayse wn ke bap ne wn ko

kah dia tha

he said

what do they caUjiiis-fsay to this)? ,,. '-^•'"^

they call him Karim—call him ignorant!

I have told him

tell the servant to get the carriage ready

as their father had ordered them - . - '

bolna {i) Speak (occasionally, say) ;—

na bolo; bolo mat do not speak voh boli she s ^

SPECIAL POINTS 116

(ii) To sotmd (intransitive) :—

yeh rwpaya bolta naiiiij tliis rupee does not ring (it is x ,

bad)

(iii) To teU (a lie or the truth) :—

jhut bolna tell a lie -^^^ sscbolna tell the truth •'-^

botana (less common, batlana): show, tell, inform. ms3'r| ap ko rssta batata hug I will show you the way mwjhe koi kam bataa give me some work to, do \^

{show me some work)

jstana (another form: jatlana) is practically the same as bstana, but is much less common.

pana and mylna For mylna see details on pp. 109-10.

pana: iind, obtain. twm ne kahag paya ? where did you find it ? \. y '

( = twmheg kslmr) myia?) ^- ' ws ne bshwt dwkh paya he suffered much >.- '

For being given money one should use mylna with the dative:—

twm ko kya myla? what did you get ? \_^

For pana, manage to, which does not take ne in past participle tenses, see p. 70.

maggna and cahna

See also pp. 112-13. ma;)ga is "ask for"; it never means to "want some

thing".

ys ke do hi rwpae magge he asked only two rupees for this


maggkar lava he has asked for it and-, brought it (un., borrowed it) ;

bhik maggta hay ,.*he begs {asks for alms) cahna: wish for, desire, love. For constructidn of

cahua, see p. 96; for cahie, see pp. 96, 114. With a subject denoting an animate being, cahna takes ne in past participle tenses, but with dyl or ji, heart, it does not.

mera ji caha my heart wished —•• mayj] ne caha I wished ^'^ /•''^ kya cahte ho? what do you want?.^-'' ws ki maij wse bahwt csditi his mother loves him very

hay • much \..- ' cahe, cabe . . . cahe, see p. 92.

gyrna. letna, pai;na

gyrna; ordinary word for "fal l" , also metaphorical. .

meri jan gyri jati hay I am greatly depressed (my life is faUing)

le^^na, lie dovra; lef,a hua, lying down jake let ^^^^ 6° ^^^ ^^ down

pstna : (i) Fall, of dew, sunshine, rain, snow, hail, drops of -

water, etc., but not of things falling off a table, etc.

(ii) Metaphorical, e.g., afot pa^'- calamity befell; zanirat.paci, necessity befell.

{iii) paja, pajja hua, lying down. pai;a tha ^ was lying, or Ijmg dowii makan pai a hua hsy ... ' the house is lying empty khet p3[e hue hayi) , ' the fields are lying fallow

{iv) Various phrases i ^ •yahag psf raho ^ . sleep here, spend the night

here ,

TO HAVE 117

voh bimar p9i;a he fell ill, became ill v - • -ws ka gala paj; gaya he became hoarse (gala =

^ throat) voh dur ja paj;a it (tottered along, etc., and)

fell at a distance bic meg (or, mamle meg) why do you interfere, inter-

kyog pofte ho vene ? p3];e p9T;e while lying down, or while

idle or out of work • ws ka nam kaUu pgf gaya he came to be called Kallu \

(v) With infinitive, to have to, see p. 96.

TO HAVE

The English word " have " is expressed in several ways according to the nature of the thing possessed :—

(fl) Relatives, human beings: the genitive with ka and the corresponding- possessive pronouns, mera, twmhara, etc.

,meri car bshneg hgyg I have four sisters • ^ p ke kytne madsdgar hayg how many helpers' have you ?

For sons and daughters the old oblique in ke used to be heard, but is now almost obsolete.

babu ke awr koi baccg nahlri the babu (clerk) has no other chUd

On the analogy of this one got also: mere, tere, hsmare^ twmhare. I t must be remembered that this ke is an old' oblique case; no word is understood.

{b) Parts of the body ; generally ka. wn ki agkhep to hayr) magar they have eyes but do not

dekhte nshig see Theoretically the old obUque in ke may be

used, but it is very rare nowadays. Here, too, no word is understood.


(c) Property, especially movable property; ke pas.

dukandar ke pas bahwt '''the shopkeeper has a lot of mezei) swr kwrsiag hayi] tables and chairs

mere pas do mwrsbbe hayg I have two squares of l*nd But for property like land, which is not iBOV-

able, we may have ka or mera, etc,

mere do mwrabbe hayg I have two squares of Und

(d) Abstract nouns : the dative in ko of the person; the abstract noun is in the nominative with the verb " t o b e " . ^ ^ ' ^

raja ko bsiâ J"awq tha, or the rajah had a great desire bsri xfLhyi thi ^-^^

mwjhe ylm nshii], or xabar I have no knowleê, I do nshig not know

If these are personal qualities (n) the genitive . in ka, or (6) -vala, or (e) rarely, the verb r&khna

" is used.

ws kL b3i;L lyaj:iat l^y he 1ms gceat ability xwda qwdrgtvala hsy, or God has great power.

qwdrat rskhta hay

(e) Diseases: eithei use the verb " to be " with the dative, or say " he has contracted " the disease, for which: bona, hojana, Isgna, aoa, are used; for fever C3i;hna'is common; and for cough wthna; lagna often occurs with the meaning of " catching " an infectious chsease.

wse bwxar C3(;h gsya '-'' he has got fever wse saxt mgraz ho gaya . • he has got a serious disease bscce ko zwkam hua --'the child has a cold meri valda ko S9rdi lag g»i •,- • my mother has caught cold wse hsr roz khagsi wthti hay - he coughs every day mwjhe ws se bimari lagi ., I got the disease from liim mwjhe ws se khagsi lagi I caught my cough from, him

TO KNOW 119

TO WEAR

"To wear" is expressed by verbs meaning "pu t on" . The following sentences show how:—

safe bagdhta tha he used to tie (i.e., put on, therefore wear) a turban

kot pahyne aya he came with a coat put on {i.e., wearing a coat)

ws ne cadar ofhi thi she had put on a shawl (i.e., was wearing a shawl)

But it must be remembered that these words mean " put on ", not " wear ", and the sentences must be turned with this in mind.

pahynna is used of coat, overcoat, waistcoat, cap, hat, shoes, boots, gloves, trousers, hwrqa, etc.

0];hna is used of shawl, quilt, and similar garments. bar|dhna, tie, is used of turbans, dhotis, and simUar

things. Some say: dhoti pahynna. Of the sari it has been

remarked:— ""awrteg sai;i ko adhi bagdhti women tie half the sari,

adhi o^hti hayij round their waists and pull half of it over themselves

TO KNOW

"To know" is expressed fay janna, know; xabar,/, , news; and malum, known, etc.

moyg janta hug I know mwjhe xabar nahir) I do not know xgbsr bhi hay? don't you even know? (said

to find fault or threaten) ma lum means "known", "seeming", "appearing",

according to the following rules :— malum, known, when used with the present or imper

fect of hona, be or become, means seeiii or appear; F


with other tenses generally to be known, sometimes to seem; with any part of hojana, become, and with hey, is, and tha, was, it always means to be known,

hameg malum hota bsy it seems to us v-^ ^ -wnheg malum hota tha it seemed to them ^-^ hameg malum hua i,> it became known to us, or,

it seemed to us hameja malum hojata hay it always becomes known ap ko malum hay -._, y6u know, you are aware wn ko bsxubi malum tha ^, ' they knew quite well ap ko malum hoga . ..-you will know, i.e., no doubt

^ you know

PARTICLES ns and nshii]

For " no " 09hig is commoner, but na is also used. With the meaning of " n o t " they are chiefly connected with verbs expressed or understood.

•9hii) is used with the present indicative, 119 with subjunctive and conditional tenses, and the

imperative, nshlg is very occasionally used with th&.J imperative.

nshiri and na are both used with the imperfect, future and pluperfect. Both are found with the past tense, but with a distinction in meaning not always maintained.

na gaya he did not go nahu) g»ya he has not gone {therefore =

present perfect) The most important thing is to use n^hlig in the present

indicative and na in subjunctive and conditional tenses. voh nshig jata he is not going, will not go voh ns jata he would not have gone

db, »bhi ab means now, nowadays, in future.

ab sgle se wstad kahag ? where nowadays are teachers like the former ones?

PARTICLES 121

accha lasyxf ne twmheg maf all right, I have forgiven you, '. kia (ab aysa na kama) do not do so in future

, ab ki bat 3pne hath; jab ki the present is in your power, bat jab ke sath the past is past

ab ki dafa this time obhi means now, at once, soon, so far, recently, still;

yet (in negative clause). abhi cale jaoge? sblii rat are you going so soon? the ^

nahiri gwzri (swbah abhi night is not over yet dur hay) {morning is still far away)

voh to abhi abhi yahag he has only recently begun rahne laga to live here

abhi kya hay? abhi ap ki nothing has happened yet dwkan awr camkegi (lit. what is it so far?),

soon your shop will get on much better (shine more)

jab j9b, when (relative; also: jab ky);—

^ jab mayi) ne swna • when I heard ^^'''

jab se, since (of time):— jab se mayr) ne yeh bat swni since I heard this __.- -

jab tak jabvtak : (i) until; (ii) so long as.

(i) jab tak, until, inserts a negative which we should not expect:—

jab tak mayi) na aug meri wait for me till I come \^ rah 4ekho

jab tak bacca rota nahig, the mother does not give the " mat) dudh nahig deti child milk until it cries

(ii) jab tak, so long as, does not insert this negative :— jab tak jan meg jan hay so long as one lives (so long '

as life is in life)


jab tsk dam hsy tsb tek as long as there is breath yam hsy there is sorrow

jab to, jabhi, mean " that is why ".

jabhi xafa hua that is why he got angry

jug, 33, when, jug tug, or jug tug kwke, somehow or other, with

difficulty.

ham jur) tur| ksrke ghar we got home with difficulty pahwgc gae,

jug ka tug, jug ki tug, jug ke tug, exactly as before.

mayi) ne ws ko jug ba tug I put it down just as it had rakh dia been ^^,-^'

jughi, jughig, as soon as, so far as, etc. jug jug, the more, as by degrees. ^ '

maraz ba^hta gaya jug jug the disease got worse the_, dava ki more they treated it Other pronunciations {less good): jyug, jog, jyog; tog,

tyog.

sahl . '

sehi is a word in constant use, often overlooked by foreigners. It means: admitted, I agree, very well then, so be it. With an imperative it means : do not hesitate, why are you delaying? do it, won't you? It can never beghi a cûse.

Examples:—. ^^-^

purchaser: do hi dugga I will give only two ^ y^ seller: accha do hi sohi all right, I agree to tWd das rwpae na sahi afh hi very well then, if not ten,

sahi x^-' then eight

PARTICLES 123

jhyj;ki sahi, 9da sahi, cin e jybiii sahi, yeh ssb sshi, • par ek nahir) ky nshii) sshi

tvmi nshii) awr sshi swr nahig swr sshi

dykhao to sahi

ek dsfs dekhie to sahi

It can of course be used in contain such an idea :— phyr ek bar tu mwjhe gali

de to sahi to dekhega bas

rebuke—^very well; a i r s ^ all right; frowns—so be i t ;

I agree to all this, but one thing I do not agree to—

. your saying " no ' ^ very well then, if not you, '

then some one else, If not that someone, then someone else again

just show it to me, won't you?

(why hesitate?) look at it once anjnvay

threats, but it does not itself

just swear at me once again, ' and you will see; that is aU

hi

hi is used to emphasise the word which it immediately follows. It cannot begin a sentence or clause. To say merely that it is emphatic is misleading, for it has several senses, and its use is complicated.

A. Form and Position

When hi is added to mwjh, twjh, ham, voh, yeh, ws, ys, the h is omitted, and we get: mwjhi, twjhi, hsmii), vohi, yehi, wsi, ysi. The i of hi is nasfilized when it follows h9m, twm, wn, yn; thus, hamiq, twmhiq,wnhlg, yntilt); it is frequently nasalized after yuij and jug, thus: yughig, iut)hir|. wnhig, ynhig stand for both wo-hi , yn-hi, and wnhog-hi, ynhog-hi.

hi is joined to keb, jab, tab, sab, ham, twm, voh, yeh, ws, ys, wn, yn, so as to make a single word, as: jabhi, sabhi, hamig. vohi, ynhig, yahag, here, and vahag, there,


become yshiig, vahiq. k^hai), where? becomes kahiij,, but means " somewhere ".

When it is desired to emphasize a word with a postposition -. after it. some latitude is observed, and hi is often written after the postposition, msyri ne and tu ne almost always take hi after ne (mayg ne hi, tu ne hi), but in other cases. hi usually precedes the postposition, as : mwjhi se, sahsb hi ne.

B. Meaning

When its force is emphatic, the emphasis may be laid either on the actual word immediately preceding, or on the fact as a whole. Sometimes the stress is laid on an act, suggesting that it was just about to begin, or was just going on, or haid just finished. Sometimes it means " o n l y ' , " merely " or " at least ", or again it may mean " finally ", or "with difficulty"; and lastly there is the use with "neither . . . nor".

(i) Efnphasis on the Preceding Word:— > pas hi hay it is quite close -' twmhig batao you say it ^^—' dss hi sshi very well, ten then - , - - ' wsi ko lykha wrote it to him mgyg hi tha it was I (no one else) twmhig the it was you -^ „—^ kal hi sslii all right, to-morrow^'''' r mayi) ne hi lia it was I who took it ./•' ' '^ csfhai ksysi hi ho however severe the ascent

^ ^ may be Jayad hi sysa ynam wse it is barely possible he may

myla ho have got the reward agkh hi se ns tepka to lahu if no tears dropped from

ka kya zykr ? your eyes, what is the use of talking of blood (being stirred) ?

ogorcy mayi) mara hi kyog even if I were to be killed na jaui]

PARTICLES 125 balky voh tu hi tlia

dusre hi dyn mayg cala aya

ws ne mwihi se dylvaya pahyle hi 3winle met} nawksr hi ne ghsp cwrai

9ccha mayg nahig jata vohi jae

karmu hi ko bwlaya voh janta hi nahig ys bat ka javab hi nahiij

it was not so-and-so, but it wasyou

the very next day I came away

he had it given tlirough me in the very first sentence it was the servant that stole v

the watch very well, I won't go; let Mm ^

go it was Karmu that he called ., he does not even know '-'"' there is no answer to this (it •-

is unanswerable)

(ii) Emphasis OJI the Fact:—

yeh to hay hi voh jata hi ns tha baji

raw/kyl se bheja

;^ ham (jimat to le hi lepge "cyffhi hQm ne lykh hi li msyi) kar hi cwka tha hwkm

dene ki kya zarurgt pap ?

sysa to ho hi ga

this certainly is he would not go, it was with -

great difficmty that I sent him

we will obtain the price ^-^'^ H e ê>i write the fetter I had aJready done i t ; what

was the good of ordering me to do it ?

it will certainly be so (ho hi ' ga = hoga hi)

(iii) Emphasis on ike Act or Time of the Act.

Many of these cases have the form " I was actually doing something when something else happened ".

ina5q) rawgh hath dho hi raha tha ky ap ae

mayg bsyfha hi ns tha ky voh jhagâ kame Uga.

mayr) bay|;hne hi ko tha ky sar|p nykal aya

I was in the act of washing •* my face and hands when you came

I had not even sat down when he began to quarrel

I was just about to sit down when a snake came out

126 TEACH YOURSELF y i f fbuSTANI

msyri ap ko lykh hi cwka I had just finished writing tha ky ap ka xst aya to you when your letter

.came pahwrictehi '--at the very time of arrival swnte hi at the time of hearing, upon

hearing

(iv) Only, merely, at least:— ^ , — - -"' ' " ^ mere pas do hi kytabeg thig I had only two books das hi the I (?) *h f« «« «'*' *^ ,

L(o) yes, ten was the number hath hylane hi se ws ne by the mere shaldng of his

^.wnheg i^sraya .hand be frightened them \ / kh3wr hi tak pahwgca vKe will have got only as far

5V- hoga as Lahore ^ ^ 1 ? ' ^ yshig nahig _ not-only so (but) '^-

^ rnayg hi nsMg sara Jshrvriot only I but the whole ws ko thukta tha town despised him

ek hi do hafte to ^hayrie stay one or two weeks at na ? least, won't you ? (v) Finally, wiUi difficulty :— y'

manane se man hi lega ""'tiy persuasion he will finally £êe---^

Contrast:— /''

nshii) nahig zsrur manega no, no, he will certainly / agree

bhuk legi hogi to kha hi ^(») he must be hungry, so he lega ' . will eat it

vy'(6) he will eat it . . . if he is hungry

ws ke dam meg a hi gsya he finally fell into his snare (he was wheedled)

(vi) Neither . . . nor: note the position of hi in the following:— ns ram hi aya ns mohan v. neither Ram nor Mohan

came

PARTICLES 127

bhi . , bhi, like hi, immediately follows the word with which ""it is associated. Consequently it cannot begin a clause.

(i) The commojiest meaning of bh i in affirnuitive clauses is" also".

calo mayi) bhi sath calugga come along, I will gotoo tanxah ke sath twmheg ghgr with your pay I will give you

-bhi dugga a house too

(ii) bhi . . . bhi, bolh . . . and:— yeh bhi manzur voh bhi both this and that are agreed

monzur to

Sometimes they insert a bhi where in English we omit the corresponding word: also, too, etc. voh blii gae twm bhi jao they (also) went, you go too

(iii) bh i with the imperative, giês a sense 0/ hastiness or irritation.

k, are lykh bhi lo write it, won't you? calo bhi der ho gai do come along, it is getting

late kahir) mor bhi oh get out of the way! (lit.

oh, die somewhere) (iv) koi bhi, kwch bhi, awr bhi.

koi bhi any one at all koi bhi ae let any one come kwch bhi anything at all kwch bhi dykhao show anything at ah 9wr bhi still more mwjhe awr bhi do give me still more "-'' 3wr bhi babnd still higher

(v) WUh a negative it jneans either " not even " or " also not".

The context will show which meaning is the right one,


ek bhi nahig not even one •-=•'"'" ws ka nam o ny[an bhi nahig not a trace oi him (name and

sign)_ ' ; msyi] bhi nahiij gsya I too did not go v„--ws jangal meg ynsan ka kya in that jungle there was not

zykr hayvan bhi na tha even a wild beast, let alone a man

admi bhi na the hayvan bhi there were no men, there na the j-were also no animals

mere ghar merj voh bayfha "ê did not even sit down in bhi nshig my house

Motion to Anythinf

The idea of going to a person or thing is expressed in different ways. When the postposition is omitted, the

• noun is in the locative case, wMch is the same as the oblique. 1. To a person or animal; ke pas^.-^" ••

ws ne sahab ke pas jakar he went to the Sahib and kaha said " '

2. To a room, garden, field, plain : meg. gol kamre meg aie -^come to the drawing-room

' 3. To a house or building : ko, gar; or, if the idea of " i n to" is prominent, mer|. _,''

mere gliar par jake pucMe go to my house and ask When ghar means home the postposition is generally

omitted. / ' mali ghar gaya " the gardener went home

4. To a country, city or village : ko, meg, or omit postposition, men is common if " into " can be substituted for ' ' t o " .

6, To a well or tomb : par. donog qabr par dawê gae both of them went running

to the tomb

MOTION 129

6. To a point of the compass : ki taraf, ko.

Jymalin9vrybko[orkit3r9f] to the north-west • ' ' ' wtt9rp3cchyniko[t)rkit3rsf[ ,, ,,

7. To an isolated object, such as a tree, pillar, door, . window, cupboard, table : tsk, ke pas.

almari tak gai she went to the cupboard -^ mez ke pas gai she went to the table •- ' '

8. Sometimes the postposition is left for the second clause, as :— jaksr mez psr C9i;h baytlia he went over to the table and

sat on it

9. With pshwijcna, arrive, the postposition may be omitted or meg or tak may be used, ko is not used.

10. With a verb meaning " send ", as in " send a letter, parcel, box, etc., to some one " : ko^^^ -— ,

mayg ne ws ko xat (parsal, I sent him a letter (parcel, bakas) bheja box)

" Send a telegram " is usually tar dena, but bhejna is -i also right.

moyi) ne wse tar dia {or I sent him a telegram •....••" , bheja)

For "aletter, etc., came t o m e " , we must not say: mwjh ko aya. It should be: mere pas aya or mwjhe myla.

11. Sell something to some one is: ke hath.

mayi) ne apni sari zamin ws I sold him all my land ke hath beci

ws ne car kytabeg mere hath he sold me foin- books V becig

12. In EngUsh we can say " s w i m " or " c r awl" or " fly " or " run to a place ". The corresponding verbs in


Urdu are not so often followed directly by ko or other postpositions of motion,

tayrak darya ke par tayrke the swimmers swam across gae the river

sagp 9pne byl meg reggta ^ e snake crawled into its gaya hole

kabutar spni kabak ki tarof the pigeons flew home to the w[e cale ae V* pigeon house

REPETITION OF WORDS

In Urdu words are repeated :—

(a) To indicate distribution over time or space. This holds of the vast majority of instances,

(b) Occasionally to express niceness or pleasantness. When a word can have either a pleasant or an unpleasant meaning, the repeated word has the pleasant one.

(c) Without any real meaning, repetition being due to mere habit.

Repetition is almost confined to short words. It will be found that on an average out of every thousand;—

370 or 37 per cent, occur in words of one syllable. 610 or 61 per cent, in words of two syllables. 20 or 2 per cent, in words of three syllables.

The number of cases in words of more than three syllables is negligible.

In verbs it is confined to the present, past and conjunctive participles, and means "keeping on doing a t h m g " or

doing it repeatedly ".

h^Xe baje Jahr awr chofe big, towns and little villages cboê gaog /

ahysta ahysts bolo ^s'peak softly (all the time) wn ko do do ane myle • they got two annas each

REPETITION OF WORDS 131 voh to sbhi abhi aya hay he has only just come, or,

come recently che che fwt gahra six feet deep (all over) • • thanî thaniî hova a nice cool breeze (not a

piercing cold wind) lal lal rwxsareg nice rosy cheeks (not of a

hectic red colom-) wn ka gola cyllate cyllate they became hoarse through

b3yl;h gaj'a diouting (lit. their throat sat down)

dgwfi d3W(i a rahi hoy she is coming along running soc soc ke kam koro work thoughtfully, carefully

(all the tune)

Connected with repetition, but expressing other ideas, are the following:—

(«) Placing together two almost synonymous adjectives ;

(h) attaching to a word a jingling repetition of it; this generafly foUows i t ;

(c) joining to a word another which either is not used by itself, or has no meaning in this connection;

{d) joining a verb to its causal,

Notes on the Above with Examples:

(a) The two adjectives often suggest intensity :— kala syah, very black saf swthra, very clean gora cytta, very fair^ like an

Englishman (cy);(;a is not used alone in Urdu) (6) The jingling repetition often imphes rather careless

or even jocul^ reference. I t would not be much used in speaking of something sacred or solemn.

meri lafki khatl vati kwch _ my girl eats nothing nghig

amne sanme = samne " in front (there is nothing jocular in this word)

132 TEACH YOURSELF ,HINDUSTANI

baje gaje ,.- inusical instruments of vari-0V3 sorts

thik thak = Xhik correct or right, soc soc ke = soc ke having thought, i.e., care-

hjUy

(c) An ordinary word , is often coupled with another which is not proper Urdu, though perhaps found in dialects, or is not used alone, or has another meaning when used alone. Contrary to (b), the two words do not imply flippancy, and they may be employed in solemn speech on solemn subjects.

rahassha = raha remaining, i.e,, what is left ova- (not much)

ws ke rahe sahe hgvas w[ his remaining, senses 0ew gge-' "•-. away; he became utterly

confused

'dekh bhalkar, having examined; but dekh dekhksr means-having looked repeatedly or all the time, i.e., taking great care

dyn dyhai;e = djm.ko by day, in broad dayhght,--in the sight of all

In the.above sentences ssha by itself means "suffered", but here simply accompanies raha ; bhalna and dyhafa have the same meanings as the words they follow, but are not used alone in Urdu.

(i) The past participle of a verb is often used with the past participle of its causal to express the idea of all ready for use.

bosa bssaya, occupied, in- syla sylaya, ready sewn habited p9ka pskaya. ready cooked

bsna bsnaya, ready made kata kafaya, all ready cut sajassjaya,allready adorned katra katraya, all ready kasa kasaya, ready tight- snipped or cut out

ened; said of a saddle or other article ready fastened on

CEREMONIOUS OR RESPECTFUL SPEECH 133

The ease with which a causal can be introduced leads to its being employed with little meaning. Thus :—

having given or caused to be , "given

-a. thing heard and related, i.e., hearsay

..^libthing wiU happen; (lit. nothing is to be or caused to be)

de dylakar

swni swnai bat

hona hwvana kwch nahig

CEREMONIOUS OR RESPECTFUL SPEECH

There is a good deal of this in the Urdu of educated Indians. The following words are very common in the conversation of people of good position :— ap you, with verb in third plural janaborsahab which might be irai^lated

" your honour " or " sir ", but means no more than " you "

Servants and others to show exaêrated respect use hwzur, sarkar (or even: xwdavand).

A speaker uses one set of words for things connected with the person he is speaking to, and another set for himself,

For the person spoken to to say : farmana {com-

.mand) son: sah9bzad9 daughter: sahsbzadi house: dgwlatxana

(house of •,,,-• wealth)

^ t down: tajril rakhna be present: tajrif lana or

rsktuia come, go : tafrif laiia,

lejana

For himself arz karna (make petition);

kshna, say beta beti yaribxana (poor man's

house)

b3y|;h jana hazyr hona

hazyr hona, ana, jana

134 : TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

^ ^ hazyr means "present in a subordinate capacity".

v m a y g zarur hazyr hugga " -•'1 shall certainly come (and ,<be at your service)

liytne letke hazyr hsyg ? ^ .-liow many boys are present (in school, etc., where they are in a subordinate posi-

^tion) ? . msyg hazyr ksrugga •-,,'•1 shall bring it or him

Yet the Arabic hazyrin, plural of hazyr, used in Urdu with the meaning of people present in a meeting, has no. scnEe of subordination.

mere sziz hazyrin - my honoured audience^

mawjud, present, is colourless :-^

ap bhi mswjud the ? . • were you there too ? apbhi tajrif lae the?'.v did you come too? (cere

monious)

The student may freely use all these expressions in their proper places, except hwzur, s^rkar, xwdav»nd, and he . should perhaps avoid hazyr hona.

EXPRESSIONS OF TIME, O'CLOCK, ETC.

bsjna, to sound or strike, expresses time. It is used not only for gongs and striking clocks, but also for watches—^ in short, for time in general.

ek baj gaya , „ / o n e has struck, it is one / o'clock

S9va tin baje hayg ' ' ' i t is a quarter past three sarhe car bsj cwke hsyg ' it is already half past four sbhi p9wn bsjnevala hay - ' it is almost three quarters;

i.e., 12.45

At a certain time is expressed by the locative case of sonie . noun denoting time, or by baja, past participle of bdjna

EXPRESSIONS OF TIME, O 'CLOCK, ETC. 135

inflected in -e.. There are also other methods, as will be" shown below.

S3va baje ya pawn baje ya at one and a quarter o'clock Jaysd ek baje or three quarters o'clock

{i.e., 1.15 or 12.45) or perhaps one o'clock

msngsl ke dyn on Tuesday . ws dyn on that day., ws vaqt at that time „ . ws ghai;i at that moment dyn dyhare in broad daylight, in sight of •-

all .

ghap denotes an indefinite but very short time :—

ek ghap dyn t^hsle one ghati (say half an hour) after siinset

dyn 4,h3ltia means " sun declining ". paher, watch, three hours, rather indefinite, paliar is

masculine, but do pahsr, noon, is feminine.

tisre pshar at the third watch, in the -afternoon

ek pahar rat rahe with one watch of the night i--remaining

When minutes are mentioned, we get expressions Uke. the following:—

n9W bajne merj bara mynaf at twelve minutes to nine par

Or, not quite so common :—

nsw bajne se bara myns^ pahyle {or, pe/tar),

ath bajne mei] sat mynaj; it is seven minutes to eight •.. baqi iiayri

pane baj'ke paccis myno^ par at twenty-five minutes past ' •' twelve


p.m., and a.m., are expressed by dyn ko, by day; rat ko, by night; Jam ko, in the evening; swbah ko, in the morning.

che baje Jam ko at six m the evening \^-^^ naw bsje swbsb- at nine a.m. .^y'"

Or, as follows:—

rat ke <hai baje at 2.30 a.m. '. dyn ke tin baje , at 3.0 p.m. , .

LESSON I

DECLENSION OF NOUNS. ADJECTIVES, IS, ARE, WAS, WERE, KE, POSTPOSITIONS ; QUESTIONS

See Grammar, pp. 1-16, 16-20, 38-9, 88-91. Nouns ending in -a or -a are generally masculine. Such

are kamra =rooin; kona = corner; nsqjs =inap. The plural is kamre, kone, naq Je. The oblique singular is the same, kgmre, kone, naqje.

Nouns en(^g in -i are generally feminine. Such are kwrsi = chair. The plural is kwrsiag. The oblique singular is the same as the nominative singular.

Nouns with any other ending may be mascuhne' or feminine. If they are masculine, the nominative plural is the same as the singular, as qalem ^ pen; gslsm = pens. If they are feminine, the nominative plural ends in -eg; as

, ciz = thing; cizerj = things; pyiiS3l = pencil; pynssler) = pencils.

Adjectives ending in -a generally change -a to -e when agreemg with a noun in the nominative plural or oblique singular, asmeylaqaiam = a dirty pen; mayle qaJam = dirty pens; mayle qslstn s e = with a dirty pen. These

. adjectives end in -I when agreeing with feminine nouns, whether singular or plural, as katlj)ynsaler| =black pencils.

The following verbs occur in tire lesson :—• hey = is; hayi] = are. No change for gender. In a

negative seiitence hay, hayg may be omitted- See sentence No. 12.

tha = was; the = were; the feminine is thi = was; thlg =were.

A possessive adjective is often formed by adding -ka, as ap, you; ap ka =your, yours. This adjective agrees with its noun like other adjectives ending in -a.

Postpositions nearly always follow the noun they govern. 137


Questions usually have the same form as affirmations, see,Nos. 1, 8,11,15, 21, etc.

What is this thmg? This is a chair. That's a book. These chairs are long ones, Those two books are mine.

1. yehkya ciz hay? 2. yeh kwrsi hay.

^ j ^ o h kytab hay. ^ yeh Iambi kwrsiag hayg. 5. voh do kytabeg meri

hayi). 6. yeh qalam accha hay. 7. voh qalam ap ke hayrt, 8. meripynsalkahai] hay? 9. apkipynsalmezparhay.

10. voh meri kwrsi nahii] hay.

11. voh qalam ap ke hayg ? 12^9hir| , mere naMg,

y ^ ap ki kytni kwrsiag hayij?

14. yeh parca kal kahag tha?

15. kya, yeh cizeg kal vahag y thig?

M6. voh naqj"a pahyle yahag tha.

17. ab voh naqje yahag nahig hayg.

18. kal kamra mayla tha 191 aj kamre meg mezeg

v / hayg. , 20. kamre ke kytne darvaze

hayg? 21. kytab ka kayaz accha

hay? 22. naqJe kahag the? 23. mez par kytni cizeg

thin? • 24. kytab par qalam awr

pynsaleg thiij.

This pen's good. Those pens are yours. • Where s my pencil ? Your pence's on the table. That's not my chair. .

Are those pens yours ? No, not mine, How many chairs have you ?

Where was this paper yesterday?

Were these things there yesterday ?

At first that map was here.

Now those maps are not here.

Yesterday the room was dirty. To-day there are tables in the

room. How many doors has the

room? Is the paper of the book

good? Where were the maps ? How many things were on

the table? There were pens and pencils

on the book,

LESSON 2 139

LESSON 2 ..,,. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE, PRESENT

PARTICIPLES, INTERROGATIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS

Grammar illustKited in Lesson 2. See pp. 26-43. There are two present participles. One ends in -ta, as

khata = eating; pita = drinking; lykhta = writing. This gives some idea of habit; thus meyi) khata hug means " I ea t " , not " I am eating ".

Another construction has rah a and always means doing or being something at the moment; therefore kha raha hug means " I am eating ", not " I ea t" .

The two constructions with -ta and raha are declined lilie adjectives in -a. Both are used with hug, hay, hayg, tha, thi, the, thig = am, is, are, was, were.

Note that interrogative pronouns and adverbs follow the subject of the sentence. In English they precede it. See Lesson 1, nos. 8,14, 22; Lesson 2, nos. 8, 15, 17, 18.

twm kawn ho ? It 's none of your business. ap kyor) nshiij jate? Why don't you go?

Interrogative adjectives like kytna, kaysa, may agree with nouns, and then naturally they precede them. See Lesson 1, nos. 1, 13, 20, 23.

Before ka and other postpositions yeh, voh, kawn, become ys, ws, kys, in the singular, so that we get: ys ka, ws ka, kys ka.

The plural of nouns ends in -oq before jxjstppsitions, as kytabog se = from books.

1. msyg hameja [hsnâ I always drink cold water.' pani pita hui). ,--•''""

2. m85'r| garm dudh pi raha I'm drinking warm milk. hui).

3. byUi gojt kha rahi hay. The cat's eating meat. 4. sare nawkar kam kar All the servants are work-

•raheha}'!!. ing. 5. yeh mere bap hayi). This is my "father; I'm his

mayg yn ka beâ hug. son.

140 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI .

• "t. voh twmhara bhai hay twm ws ki bshn ho.

7. /Voh kswn tha 3wr kys / ki nawkari karta tha?

~8. ap kshar) ja rghe the? foh kytab dekh rshi h9y 8wr majq) lykh rahi hug. isyg kah raha tha swr ap swn rshe the.

9

10

•Î^mer i bat koi nshu) swnta. jo ap kahte hayg mayri

svmta hur|. IS-.-jstiag mari cahti thi

v s l ^ mayi] jati thi. koi kwch lykhta tha koi kwch ps^hta tha.

• " ^ 4

16 --'17

15..- twm kawn ho awr kya cahte ho ? .

voh koi kam nahig karti. ap pahyle kahag rshti thig, 3wr ab kshag rahti heyg ? ••

IS.Jate kyog nahig, yshag y" kyog bay^he ho? "•*'•

"^19. aysi batog. se mayg /-• bswht xw; hota hug.

'•^0. jo jata hay voh deWita hay.

He's your brother; you're his sister.

Who was he, and whose s e r vant was he ?

Where were you going ? She's looking at the book

and I am writing. I was spealdng and you

were listening. No one listens to me. Whatever you say I.listen

to. I went (used to go) where

mother wished. One was writing somethmg,

another reading somti-thing.

Who are you and what do you want ?

She does no work, Where did you live formerly,

madam, and whea'e do you' live now ?

Why don't you go, why dp you stay .here ? -- - • '

Such things please me very much.

Whoever goes sees it.

LESSON 3 FUTURE

Grammar illustrated. See pp. 44r-5. The hiture tense is as follows :—

mayg karugga tu karega

voh karega

ham karegge twm karoge ap karegge voh karegge

LESSON 3 UI The feminine is the same except that the ending is -i

throughout. The first plural feminine is by some made the same as the masculine wlien the subject is a pronoun without a noun in apposition, as ham karegge; but if a noim is mentioned, the ending is -gi, as : ham tin'ori awrgtei) jaerjgi.

Present Presumptive : see grammar, p. ii. koi = someone, anyone, becomes kysi before postposi

tions. Note the difference between kysi k a = anyone's, and kyska = whose ?

jo becomes jys : jo koi is in the.nominative case; the postposition case is jys kysi.

The relative dause usually precedes the principal clause, as jys ki la|;hi ws ki bhsytjs = whose the stick, his the buffalo, i.e. might is right.

Singular nouns sometimes take the plural for respect, as sahsb jate hayrj = the Sahib is going.

. > •

Vr. mgyri aj na jaugga, ksl I ^ jaugga.

H

2. yeh kam twm karogi ya y' koi awr ksrega ?

^'3. voh pahyle roti pskaegi, X phyr khaegi.

ham ng kabhi kopre lejaegge swr na kabhi dhoegge.

5. na mayg lykhuggi awr no msyg poi;huggi.

6. mystri aj sonduq bs-naega awr kal le aega.

/. J9b kobhi augga ap ke ghar thoyrugga.

8. kya voh admi jo kal yahag kam ksr raha tha koi vapas cala-jaega?

shall go to-morrow, not to-day.

Are you going to do this, or wfll someone else do it ?

She'll first cook her food, then eat it.

We won't either take away the clothes or wash them.

I will neither write nor read (you are wasting time on me),

The carpenter will make the box to-day and bring it to-morrow.

Whenever I come, I shall stay with you.

Will the man who was working here yesterday go back to-morrow ?

TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

,9. iyskila(;hiwski bhayns. iO./yeh kys ki ghoî hey?

malum nahii) kysi ki hogi.

12. jo aega ap ws se puch-

- ^ I ' l ;

ko dekh-pucli-se

13. hai) jys kysi ugga, ws

^ y ugga. 14. voh do psyse deta tha. 15. jab lawfoge, mere liye y' kya laoge ?

^'^6, na voh dega, na mayg lugga.

"17. sahab kahii] jaerjge? y^ nahig, kahiri nahig.

-•-'la. tsddiiay^z kahar) rakh-

•^pvQhbgttiaj) jslaegi. AÔ. ws ke lie bhi kwch • ^ kgrose ?

Mfeht is right. Whose is this mare ? I don't know; it'll be §Qme;

one's. You'Il"~ask whoever comes,

jvon^t you ? YesTl shall ask whoever I

see.

He offered two'pice. What'il you bring me when

you come back? Neither will he give it, nor

I take it, , ^-'-WiU the Sahib gd'-'anywhere ?

No, nowhere. Where will you put the

,was.t,e„paper ? She vf ill switch on. the lights. Will you do anything for

him too ?

LESSON 4

IMPERATIVE. PAST TENSE

Grammar illustrated in Lesson 4. See pp. 40-1, 45, 50. The Imperative used in addressing servants and young

people ends in -o ; for those whose age or position gives, themhigher rank, the ending is -ie,

jao or jaie = go; batao or bstaie = show.

From ksrna, " do ", we get karo, and an irregular kijie or kije. See No. 6.

The direct object is either the same as the nominative, or is the oblique with ko after it. The latter is more' definite. Thus, in No. 16 l9ki;i ko = the wood; lakfi alone would be simply " wood ".

LESSON 4 143

The past participle is formed by adding -a to the root; when the verb is transitive, this is passive.

bayfha = seated; dekha = seen.

This participle can be finite, d0W|;a = he raji. The nominative 'of an intransitive verb agrees with its

past participle .used as a finite verb in the past tense, as voh dawi;i = she ran.

When the verb is transitive, a passive construction is used, and the object becomes the nominative, as No. 14: Jykari ne lomri mar l = a fox was killed by a hunter. But if what we think of as the object has ko after it, the verb becomes impersonal, as in No. 18; wnhog ne tinoi) darvazog ko khola = they opened all the three doors.

lana, l e a n a = bring, have the intransitive construction; see next lesson. No. 16.

J,

M'. jao, dekho, kya ho raha hay.

2. khyfki kholo, darvaza band karo.

3. ydhar aie, inere^Das -baythie.

^C.ap lai;ke ka nam bataie. • s©: kysi nawkar ko bwlaie

awr mere pas bhejie. 6. ap apna kam kijie mayg

• apna karugga. 7. maJi spni bivi ke samne

. ^ ' baytha. ^ . twmhara bap cala gaya

twm bhicate jao. 9. sab log apne gaog se

nykle. 10. kwtta awr bylli apas meg

/• lape. • ^ i . abhi to koi nahig aya

lekyn rat ko kai admi aei]ge.

Go and see what's hap- ^. pened.

Open the window and shut • the door.

Come here and sit by me.

Tell me the boy's name. • Call a servant and send him •.

to me. You do your work, and I'll

do mine. The gardener sat in front of

his wife. Your father's gone away,

you go too. All the people went out of •.

their village. The dog and the cat had a

fight (together). No one has come yet, but a •

good many'll come tonight.

1 4 4 / / ' ' TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

-^^-l^^tor dur tak daw^. The thief ran a long way, * ^ . msyi) bshwt xw| hui. I (fefK.) was extremely

pleased. -'M.^ Jykari ne aj ek lomfi The hunter killed a fox

, / marl. to-day. Vl5f'''ws Id bghyn ne kwch His sister saw nothing at all.

/y' bhinadekha. ..)^6.^maline Iskfiko wthaya. The gardener lifted up the

•'' wood. ^^,n. dhobi ne sab kspê dhoe. The washerman washed • all

the clothes. IS.wnhog ne tinog dar- They opened all the three

vazog ko khola. doors, • '19. twm ne ws batti ko Why did you switch on that

' • kyog j alaya ? light ? 20, xansamag ne hamare The cook made some very

vaste bahwt accH good chapatis for us. capatiag pakaig.

LESSON 5

CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLE : IMPERATIVE AND PAST CONTINUOUS

Grammar illustrated in Lesson 5 : see pp. 40, 43. The conjunctive participle ends in -kar or -ke, which is

added to the root. It has three meanings :—

(a) Having done something, as : khakar = having eaten. Nos. 5, 6, 13, 17.

(6) An adverbial sense, as: dsnxke = quickly, socke = thoughtfully. Nos. 7 and 8.

{c) Although, in spite of, as: hoke; in spite of being, hoke-. No. 19.

For " understand me ", etc., we must say " understand my word " ; see No. 10.

Note that lana, leana = brmg, do not take -ne ; No. 16. simari in No. 1 means bookcase, cupboard, linen- or

clothes-press.

LESSON S

The -ker or -ke is sometimes omitted; see No. 4.

145

, 1. meri bshyn ne i t o ^ j meg do rumal rakhe hsyg.

2. wn aggrezog ne pahyle . y^ hi qi^^jiri di thi. ^^ . malykor) ne jys ko dekha

(]0 aya) wse yjiani dia.

zara dekh ao na ? *ver mayri abM khaksr aya

.'- huT). ^ . voh bsrtan saf karke hi

gai thi na ? 7. d.3W[;ke., jao nahig to

naiagioSga- I 8. meri laj ki ne xub §ocke „y kam kia. ' ^

• ^ '9 . qwhoij ne khaya.piya boga.

^ TO. meri bat koi na samjha. •"'11. }sb kabhi ^zsrurat paji

"rasyi) ne ap ki madad ki.

12. wnhog ne jshai) kahii) hameg dekha hameg madad di.

'13 . ws ne.kya kia? khana ^ h a k e call gai bo^r^'"

14. jys ne kytab pa(;hi / ' 1^5'ran hc^sya.

"15. yen juti kahe ki bani hui hay?

16. swno na, yeh tasvir *^lltwl rgddi hay; mere pas kyorf lae ?

My sister has put two handkerchiefs in the .gupboard (linen-press, etc.).

Those Enghshmen had already paid the sages.

The masters £evuardied whoever they saw (or "whoever came)

Just go and look, won't you? • I had a meal just before I •..,

came. She cleaned the vessels be

fore she went, didn't she ? Go. quickly, or I^_shall,be

annoyed. ••;'"" My girl did .the work very \ , •• • t3vQ!igb|fiiiiy-i

The cooUes must have eaten \ and drunk (feasted themselves).

N6 one understood me. ^--'' I helped you whenever you

needed help. •"'""• "•""

Tbey helped us wherever V-they saw us.

What . did she do ? ^She - ^ must have had dinner and,,^-^ ggne. '' ''"^

Whoever read the book was am^^d.

What's this pair of shoes ^ made of ?

Just listen; this picture's"-. ' "qiiite'worthless; why did

you bring it to me ?

U 6 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

17. bahie ke bete ne cytthi The grocery's son wrote and j / lyk l iks r 4ak..ineri,a4i'

>J:SV ap ki iialyr nioyri yahag _y'' baytha raha. 19. twm wstad hoke bhi yeh

nahig jante ?

pceted a letter. For'^your sake I remained

sitting here. You, a teacher, and do not

know this ?

LESSON 6

COMPOUND VERBS. VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH LENA AND DENA ; COMPARISON

See Grammar, pp. 64^5, 71-7, 19. Two verbs so joined as to express a single idea form a

compound verb. The action is Umited to one occasion. Verbs compounded with lena and dena are generally

transitive. I t is always the root that is prefixed to lena and dena. Compounded with lena they suggest an action for the benefiit of the doer; with dena they mdicate action moving away from the doer, perhaps for someone else's benefit or injury,

For the contrast between lena and dena see specially Nos. 3,4, 12.

Comparison : see Nos. 15-31; Grammar, pp. 19-20. There are no forms for the comparative or superlative.

Than is expressed by se, than; or ki nysbat, ke mwqabyle meq = in comparison with. <.

>,.yli' twm ^Jak^pata lykh lo.

- "*2'.;khana kha lo bad meg / spni kytab psfh lena.

"^Z. yeh p35'se apas meg bag); lo.

4. yeh rwpae wn meg bag(; do.

By_.^lBeans write down the adiess .

Have your food and then read your book.

Divide this money among (or between) yourselves.

Divide this money among them.

;' 5. fe^âl-Jsa—^sfel^r ap The hoîtal doctor will give k"o dsvai de dega. you medicine/

LESSON 6 147 6. mayT) ap ke makan meg

car taq.bana dugga. - 7. mayi) apne yhate meg

phat^k bana'lugga. 8. mere lie karcj lykh dije. 9. gae ghas kha legi.

10. master ne chwri rakh li. 11. ws JBvan ne topi wtar li

9wr kot pahyn lia. 12. mere dost ne kapi rakh

di awr safe Jrsnk meg rakh lia.

13. 9wr9t ne ynkar kar dia. 14. ws ne wse bsfi takid kar

di. IS-.-aTu aluce se b a p hota >••• heyr-16. yehpahaf to balandhayg

lekyn lianiare mwlk ke pahai; »wr bhi baland

17. evarasf pahaf ki cop dwnya mog sab se B'a-

^ land hay. M§. msyi) ne ws se zyada

ko;iJ ki. 19- landan ki nysbat (or ke

mwqabyle meg) lahawr meg zyada garmi pa];ti

-^'' hay-^ 0 . twm ne J"akar kam (Jali

,- {or thop 4 ^ ) 3wr makkhan zyada âla.

il. aqal meg mayg ws se kam hug.

-a:

I'U make four niches in your N ^ house. ,

I'll make a gate in my com- \ / pound. , "

Write a card for me. The cow'll eat the grass. ^ - ^ ' ^ The teacher kept the knife, NX"^ That young man took off his '•-^

cap and put on his coat. My friend put down the

notebook, and put the turban in his trunk. ,^—v

The woman refused; —^ He sj?:pngly,uê^ him. Y>

A potato is bigger than a u " plum.

These'J;iills are high, but the \ ^ hills of our country are higher stilL

The summit of Mt. Everest V ^ is tfie highest in the world.

I tried harder than he. v^^

Lahore is hotter than London.

You've put in too little V^ sugar, and too much butter. y

I'm not so wise as he is. -^ Or.

I am inferior to him in • wisdom.


LESSON 7 CAUSAL VERBS

Grammar illustrated in Lesson 7; see Grammar, pp. • 57-67.

Causal verbs are a marked feature of Urdu. Causals of intransitive verbs are transitive; cf. the English fall, fell; the tree fell; he felled the tree.

Causals of transitive verbs mean " cause th^ action to be performed", i.e., they are causals of the passive of the transitive. When the original transitive verb is normally compounded with Jena, the causal means "help some one to do something"; see Nos. 2 and 7, helped tne scholars to study, and gave the girl something to eat and drink. It is not real causation. , ,

When the original transitive verb is normally, with dena the causal of its passive shows actual causation—cause something to be done by someone. The postposition for " b y " is se, whereas for the lena verbs the correspond-' • ing postposition is ko.

For causals of intransitive verbs see pskana in No. 5 , . ^ becna in No. 6, toi;na in No. 9.

Double c a u s ^ are frequent, see Nos. 5, 6, 9—pakvana, bykvaita and tw^vana. ^..^

m9yi) X9t xwd n&hii) I don't write letters myself, ,-lykhtakysi selykhvata I get them written by

. y « ^ u g . some one else. ^ ^ . wstad ne pshyle xwd The teacher first studied the'

/-•sabsq pafha; bad meg lesson himself, and then / Jagyrdog ko paijhaya. taught it to the scholars.

\/3. yeh t ^ a yughi .nahig This lock didn't open of it-EKwiar^j^" to baccog self; either" the children nelifibla, ya wn ki mag "o-pened it, or their mother

y ne khwlvaya, had it opened. ~i. agar voh phal ke dam If he doesn't pay for the

kel ne dega, to parsog fruit to-morrow, I shall get ' swbsh masrg ap dylva- it paid for in the morning ugga, of the day after.

LESSON 7 149 'T>. aj ks] meri ro|;i ghar

meg pakti hay; meri bivi pakati hay; lekyii pahyle msyi) bazar se

_ - pskvakgr khata tha. v 6 . ys dwkan par lohe ki

cizei) bykti hsyg; sksar dwkan dar ap becta hey; varna kysi nswkar

y-Se bykvata hay. ^7/la];ki kyog roti ^hay?

twm ne WM^'rwlaya ^g|rr----kwch" khylao'; pylab nahii) to der tak;' -roegi.

SSTws buthe yarib ne babu M page cytthiag ^^kh-

^ 9j/tiotal,kayse-.fu|i ? kys ne "Tofi? sahab ne twfvai.

.J. 10. qand zyada <âlvaie to accha hoga. accha sahab. xansamag.twm

/^ne-qand kam dâS.. i j / bahwt zyddi hay manata

hug manta nahig.

12, bahwt swst hay; sam-jhata hill), samajhta nahig.

13. giATii swnai bat hay.

'^•S, w^ygs ko bhusa khyla • ..- d o . ^ 16. zamindar ne harkare se

cytthi lykhva li. -17. wstani ne skul ki Iai;ki-

yog ko kwch lykhvadia.

Now my meals are cooked at home; my wife cooks them; but lest year I got them cooked in the bazaar.

At this shop iron things are sold; generally the shopkeeper sells them himself; otherwise he gets them sold through a servant.

Why's the girl crying ? Y^'l must^hayeinade her cry. ,Give' "her something to

• , eat and drink; otherwise she'll cry for a long time.

That poor old man ôt_-the cl^k.tp_write five fetters for him.

How did the bottle break? '""WhcTbrbke it? The Sahib

had it broken. It'U be a good thing if you

have more sugar put in it. Very well. Cook, you put too little sugar in it.

He's very obstinate; I persuade him, but he doesn't ^ e e !

He is very dull; I explain to him, but he does not understand.

It 's hearsay. ^ A jMHy-made basket, \^ Feed"'the buffalo with _chaff. w "

The farmer got the postman to write a letter for him.

The schoolmistress dictated something to the girls.


LESSON 8

FURTHER COMPOUND VERBS

The grammar illustrated in Lesson 8; see Grammar, pp. 71-7.

Intransitive verbs compounded with jana, pa(;na, w(;hiia, and transitive verbs with 4,^na. The meaning of these compounds is usually limited to a single occasion. pe{;na and w(;hna indicate suddenness.

Transitive verbs joined to jana do not as a rule form true compounds. They are merely two verbs, and jana retains its own meaning of goLig.

Transitive verbs with ^^ lâ are true compounds, and suggest vigour or even violence. 1. tinog mwsafyr

wtar giae. lomi r 3wr gids[

bhag gae. bhai, nyfan

• iaegge. bahu jit gai, sas har gsi.

gai;i se All three travellers gotôuj of the train.

3. ng

donog

Mf

^6. meri dastan swn jao. 6. mwjhe yjazat de gaya.

' ^ . voh bsdmaj twmhara y" sara mal lijf le jaega.

-^^^bscca kicaj; meg physal •/ gsya.

•"^9. bhuka becara hags paâ.

~~'\%- kuer) meg kud pai;i. xsll'.-.babwt mehnati hay, sari

kytab pai;h c aH. 12. hakym ne opne ttnog

dwfrtian marva d.ale. 13. Job b h a ^ j v t h a .

The fox and the jackal both J ran away. '?-

My dear, sir, the marks wjjl .come out.

The daughter-in-law got the better of her mother-in-law.

Hear my story before going. He gave me permission be

fore going. The scoffld^^l W.l-l ifle all

you have before he goes. The child slipped in the mud.

The poor hungry fellow burst out laughing, •

She jumped into the well. He works hard, he's finished

off the whole book. The chief had his three

enemies killed. The flame flaxed up,

^ LESSONS • • > '

14. raja- lia nam swnkar ghabra w|;ha.

15. ran\"jag wthi .v" ' ' 16. lafki cj^lajwthi.

-17. koi Jayr yeh fer kah gay a liay.

18. agaihay? nahiij ai.

Mtt. zahr khake behoj" ho

9 AND 10 ISl

20. gaya ? naliig hua.

agdhi ne cyray ko bwjha "aia? bylkwl nahu). dekho, "Jarbat meg msk-khi gyr pap. nahir), nahiij gyri.

twm ne oxbar pa^h Ha? nahig.

dekhna! bandar daraxt par cai;h jaega.

cyugti palang ke nice dab gai.

"-25. am ke patte jhaj; gae.

21.

22.

24.

He lost his nerve on hearing the raja mentioned.

The queen woke up. The girl called out. ^ ' " ' ^ Some poet has said this in a

verse. Has she come? No, she

hasn't. Was he unconscious after

taking the poison ? No. Did the storni put out the

lamp? Not in the least. Look, a fly's fallen into the

sherbet. No, it hasn't.

Have you read the newspaper .' No.

J,o<>k,pu.t! The monkey'Il go V 'np the tree.

The ant was squashed under the bed.

The mango's lost its leaves. •-

LESSONS 9 and 10

PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OR CONDITIONAL

Lessons 9 and 10 illustrate the uses of the Present Subjunctive; see Grammar, pp. 46-7.

1. Wish or desire that something may or may not happen. Nos. 1, 2, 5, 6.

2. Conditions. Nos. 3, 4. 3. The questions: shall I, shall we, shall he or they, etc.

Nos. 3, 4. 4. Ceremonious Imperative, Nos. 9, 10, 11, 12. 5. Whether this or that, whatever may be, as if. Nos. 7,

8, 13, 14. • 6. Let this or that happen, Nos. 6. 8.

7. It may be, Nos. 1.5-19. G


\

8. In order that. No. 10. 9. A form of narrative, rather like the present indicative,

but with the idea of " just to thini; that such a thing happens or should happen". Nos. 20, 21. ,

10. Subordinate claiise after command that, wish that, it is right or proper or customary that. Nos. 23-8.

11. Would that! Nos. 29, 30. 12. Whenever, however or wherever may be. Nos. 31-5. Further sentences involving the present subjunctive will

be found under Conditional Sentences in Lessons 26 and 27, and-under Necessity and Duty in Lessons 12 and 13. 1'. na koi bahsr jae awr na • koi ondar ae.

^'2. mahina bhar na raheg, kam se kam pandra

; ' d y n to raheg. "^. sare mwlk meg tufan mfc

jae, to ham log kya .kareg? " "'

•ir'yahari makan meg bay-thke kam na karui], to kya sarak par jakar

•/ baythug? 5, bas, ab se twm meg se

mere khet meg koi admi ^ ' ' kamna kare.

' ^ ^ . jys kysi ka jo ji cahe so . ^ ' pahyne.

7. rakh leg, chop deg hameg ,' kya?

--8. dain kwch hi hog, koi na koi gahak mol hi jaega.

• 9. sccha ji, abmwaf*kareg, mayg mwgh hath dho lug awr khana kha lug.

Let no one go out or come in.

If they won't stay a full month, at least let them stay a fortnight.

If a storm breaks all over the country, ^ a t are we to.do?

If i mayn't sit and work here in the house, am I,. to go and sit on the road?

Well then, in future none of you are to work in my field.

Everyone may wear what he Ukes.

What do we care whether they keep it or leave it ?

Whatever the price some one or other will buy it.

Very weU, my man; now excuse"ihe; I'll wash my face and hands and have dinner,

* m w a f : generally pronounced maaf or maf—though more fas-tidioas speakers use a back quality of a, or a slight back on glide.

\6: LESSONS 9 A N D iO 153

ap f9ysl3 zara jsldi ksreg taky \vs ki jan na

- • jae. 11. ap nsdi I'e kynare pwl ke

nice jake ^hug4êi).

12, ap_mwih se xsfa na hog. s^3. p9tte ayse' jliai; ' rshe

hayg, jayse ole baras rshe hog.

14. ys tarah qadsm wjhata hay isyse bwxar ca^ha ho.

"15. •j"ayadbij_bo,te,hog. 16. jaysdpawda wga^hp.

17., ws ne Jayad kho dia ho. WS. xsyr, dekhie, qysmst meg

Itya lykha ho. 19. Jayad mavayji parli taraf .,r- carrahe hog.

'*iO. kysi ka ghar jale, awr koi ag tape.

21, koi etyraz .kare, koi na . ' " kare.

^ ^ . hwJjoJ;[ay ky daftar meg "foiibhi daxyl na ho.

23. wnheg cahie ky voh ek dusre ko gali na deg.

24._^di„accha. hay ky har qysm ka sawda fahr

X meg byke, •^25. yahag dastur hay ky

mard safa bandheg, ^•' awrateg cadar o[heg.

"" 26. voh la^ki fawrsn caU jae.

•^27. men xahyj hay ky ws taraf baythug.

You should decide rather ' quickly so that his life may be saved.

You might go and look by ' the bank of the river under the brieve.

Don't be angry .with me. ^^ 'Leaves are falling as if it>,

were hailing.

He's walking as if he had ^ fever,

Perhaps they're,awjng. -—^ Perhaps the plant may have

begun to. grow. He'may have lost it. •Û, we shall see what fate \ '"may have in store for us,

The cattle might be grazing on the far side.

Taking advantage of an- * other's misfortune.

Some may object and some may not.

No one may enter the ^ office. By order.

They shouldn't abuse one ' another.

It 's a good thing that all ' kinds i5f things should be

sold in the city, ^s..^.the custom here for •

men to wear turbans and women shawls.

That girl is to go away at ^ once.

I should like to sit oyer > there.


^28. donog ki msrzi hay ky They both wish to inspect hysab ki partal kareg. the account (or audit),

29. ka|_jald a£, vsma bat LJjQpe he'll come soon, " ^ g f jaegi.. otherwise t |nn^' l l be in

/ a.niess. " 30. Jytni jsldi ho sake. v /As quickly as possible.

vs r r phaiij kahig myle. ^ W h e r e v e r you can get it, 32. jab kobhi nszsr ae. v / Whenever you see it.

- SS. jys twah ban p9[e. However you can manage it. \34. jahag tak mwmkyn ho. \ /So far as possible. -SSf'ineri majal hay ap ki Could I ever oppose you?

mwxalyfst karug ?

LESSON 11

PAST CONDITIONAL

See Grammar, pp. 47-8. This tense is used chiefly:—

1. In conditional sentences; see Nos. 1, 2, 4r-'7. 11, 13. The word " if " may or may not be expressed.

2. In clauses following phrases like " it was necessary or advisable that (something should take place)' ' ; see No. 3.

3. In clauses containing " would that (something had happened)"; see No. 8.

No. 12 is a conditional sentence with the if-clause suppressed.

No. 8 closely resembles Lesson 9, Sentence 29, and should be carefully compared with it.

Further sentences involving the past conditional will be found under Necessity and Duty, Lessons 12 and 13, and under Conditional Sentences, Lessons 26 and 27.

1. megh na barasta, to ham We shouldn't ^y#, got wet bhigjigjate, if it hadn't rained.

2. memsahab mwjhe rastg If the English lady'd festAtig, to mayg kab ka aho^n me^Jhe .way, I p9hwg£_|ata. shf),u]47.iiay?,~got

" th ere -long.ago.

V / c

LESSON 155

cahie to yeh tha ky baîhai ap hi bskas ba-nata.

4. xs^s^-laparvahinahoti to ytna nwqsan na wthata.

5. sb se do car dyn pshyle ^ l^karva ta , to kya hi sccha hot a.

6. baje saJisb ko fwrsat hoti toTiain se mwlagat ksrte.

, 7. neki ksrta Tio/yar r9hta to kamyab ho jata.

8. kaj jald ata, mwamyb na bygatta.

9. yqrar mwaf

10.

11.

9]gie.-.qw5ur ka ksrtg,, to "jayad kar dete.

ws ki tjibiat aysi ssxt ns hoti, to log" ws se na d_3rte,

agar mere pasjcali.saman hota to mayo kafxana

• kholta. xl'2. ham yeh solah to na dete;

baqi ap marzi ke malyk hsyi).

13. gadha cwp rahta, to log wse JerJit:iMnte.

The carpenter should have made the box himself.

l i he hadn't beeii_^.areless,V he wouldn't have suffered such a loss. •

What a good thing it would \ have been if Jxe^d , got treated three or four days ago.

The JDQS.S (etc.) would have \ §^n^s if he'd'Kad time.

He'd have had success if he'd donegqgd and been careful.^"

I wish he had come sooner, then things would not have got into such a mess.

If only he'd ^jmtted-his Xault, they might have forgiven him.

He was so jDad-tempered; V people woTildii'f "have feared him otherwise.

If I 'd had sufficient,stock, v I should have opened a factory.

We shouldn't have advised \ it, but after all, you can do as you please.

If the ass hadn't jî^yed, they'd have Uioughthim a tiger. ^^— '


LESSONS 12. 13, 14 NECESSITY. DUTY. ETC.

The Infinitive. See Grammar, pp. 95-7. Sentences expressing necessity, duty, etc., fall into two

main classes, corresponding to the two Englkh types :— (i) it is necessary to go, (ii) it is necessary, that I should go.

The former has one single clause with an infinitive; the latter has two clauses.

Sentences containing a word like lazym, vajyb, mwnasyb. farz. cahie or zgruri can be expressed in both ways. When there are two clauses, if the verb of the main clause is present indicative, that of the second will be present subjunctive; if the verb of the main clause" is past, that of the second clause will be past conditional.

The following examples illustrate this : Lesson 12, Nos. 5, 6, 11, 3; Lesson 14, No. 16; Lesson 13, No, 7—contain each one single clause, but they may be expressed in two clauses as follows :— j ^ 12, 8 : zaniri hoy ky amir ' It is necessary that the rich

myskinog ki par- ôuld support the poor. vary/ koreg. „ _ r ^

12 ,6 : lazym tha ky log cyray T t w a s proper that people rswjan korte, /should light the lamps.

12,11: meraforzthaliyi9vab*'It was my duty that I deta. / should give an answer.

12, 3 : cahie ky hsm Xwda se -/We ought to pray to God. dwa magger).

IS, 6 : agar cahie ky savere If you want to wake up jageg, to jalcU so .tarly, then go to bed jaie. / soon .

14,16 : cahie tha ky {hekedar "^The contractor should have mazdurog par mehr- been kind to the work-bani' karta. men.

In the same way in the remaining sentences below, when the idea of necessity, duty, etc,, is expressed by the infinitive and a single clause, it can be changed, as in the six examples

! LESSONS 12. 13, AND 14 isv

just given, to two clauses—^the second of which contains the present subjunctive or past conditional.

An analysis of these lessons shows the following methods of expression:—

Necessity by hay, tha, or the simple verb hona:—

Lesson 12, Nos. 1, 2, 8, 15, 16. Lesson 13, Nos. 5, 6.

by peoia :— . ' Lesson 12, Nos. 1, 4, 7.

Lesson: 13, Nos. 1, 3, 11.

by zaruri:— Lesson 12, Nos. 5. Lesson 13, No. 15.

Advisability, duty, etc., by cable:— Lesson 12, Nos. 3, 14. Lesson 13, Nos. 2,12,13. Lesson 14, Nos. 14-19.

by lazym :—

• Lesson 12, Nos. 6, Lesson 13, No. 14.

by vajyb:—

Lesson 13, No. 9.

by mwnasyb :—

Lesson 12, No. 10,13. Lesson 13, No. 4. , Lesson 14, No. 9.

by ferz :—

Lesson 12, Nos. 11,12. Lesson 13, Nos. 7, 8.


The use of the infinitive is illustrated in the following:—

Gerundive infinitive for necessity, duty, etc.;—

Lesson 12, Nos. 1-4, 6-9. 11-16. Lesson 13, Nos. 1-3, 5-1, 11-15. Lesson 14, Nos. 14-19.

Gerundive as an imperative :— Lesson 14, Nos. 20, 21.

Gerundive, other uses ;—

Lesson 14, Nos. 4, 5, 10.

Gerund or verbal noun : Lesson 14, Nos. 1-3, 6-13. This expresses purpose in Lesson 14, No, 6; negative

intention in Lesson 14, No. 7; agent in Lesson 14, No. 13.

'si'i > -LESSON 12

aggr twrnherj jaldi pa-, ' hwgcna hsy, to rel meg

/ safar kama paijega-•v/2. jnwihe ai igyan lykhna . J>^h9y. ^"^

- ^ 3 . Xwda se hameg dwa mangni cahie.

)^. bis ke bajae tis rwpae / xsrc karne p3T;e.

"5!^ amirog par myskinog ki j ^ parvary/ zaniri hay.

^C^, har gsli kuce meg cyray i-9wj3n karne lazym the.

^ 7 . (Jlju^jneg wnheg hal na jotna pafe.

i. Jare). batao to sahi, kahag ^ jSia hay.

If you want to get there, quickly, you must travel by train.

I have to write the report (narrative) to-day." "^'

We should pray to God.

Rs. 30 had to be spent instead of Rs. 20.

The rich must support the poor. ' •

Lamps should" have been lit in all the lanes and alleys.

(I) hope they won't have to

Elough injtjie_,suii. me ^n^5y.a.y where you

-have to go.

LESSON 13 159

/ .

9. oggr wse aj sahn mei] jhai;u nahii) deni, to kal, S 3 ^ i ; •• ' " " ^

10. mwnasyb tha ky voh rich ko goli marta.

11. ]3vab dena mera fars tha.

'Î'i. tsklif wthana ynsan ka r, iatz hay,

s i s . lekyn taklif deni mwnasyb nahir).

"14.. jys vsqt nsmaz pajiini y cahie ws vaqt pa^he.

' ^ . Hynduog ke syva awr kysi ko nahir) bwlana

/-•'hoga. Nlj. has Brshmanor) ko hi roti

khylani thi.

If he doesn't want (or hasn't got) to sêep the courtyard foây—very well^then, tQ-morrowT™"

He' should' have shot the '^ bear.

It was my duty to give an ^ answer.

It 's one's duty to take v trouble over a thing.

But one shouldn't give trouble.

One should say prayers at the proper time.

No one is to be called be- V sides the Hindus.

Only the Brahmans had toV be fed.

LESSON 13

1. twmheg feazuog awr taggop ki rr^yf kai;ni

V paijegi. *2. wse Xwda ka Iwkr karna

- cahie. "-3^ mwjhe cai)di chofi i^ybia

^.'liien diw.pani papi. •^'.' kysi kelie mwnasyb nahig

ky samp Ico nange hath se pakfe.

5. jab kabhi zinjjarjdhni ya peti'kasni ho, to mwjh

- / : ; •^ se'kahie. 6. savere jagna ho to jaldi

so jae.

You'll have jtorub arms and legs.

He ought to thank God. ^ /

I had. to hide the silver in the littlebbx.

No one should seize a snake with bare hands.

Tell me whenever you want the, _saddle_ jmt_c>n or the îrth fastened.

If he'wants to wake early, v he should go to bed soon.

XGO

J!.

4. '10.

I I .

12.

14.


xah sndhe hog, ya bahre, ya Isggije, S9b ko palna far2 hay.

ynsan ka f arz hay ky spne badan ko saf rakkhe.

kya vajyb na tha ky bar gali kuce meg (^hancjhora py fvate ?

hag cabie tha ky ham kani se ksm y/t^har chapvate. '"'"'

%ffi6bJiilio_.jag,bharibojh dahnebathse awrjiglka baeg se wthana paje^T!

hamer) ^hal I baram meg farq kariia cahie na ?

twmhare but "^Ytt ^ bhar gae, badalne nahig cahieg ?

sari rapaj; barf bahsrf sacci honi la^m.!:hi.

twmheg saza pani zsruri thi.

It 's a duty to support them all, whether blind or deaf or lame. _ ^ -

It 's man's duty to keQ) his body clean.

Wasn't it right to have it proclaimed all over the town?

Yes, at least we should have bad a notice printed.

!^j:hat.as.it.may, tbe heavy loati will have to be lifted with the right and the light one with the left hand.

Mustn't we make a distinction between Jawfd and unlawful ?

Your shoes are all muddy; shouldn't you change them ?

The Erqpef,_thing_ .i5g^ that • the whole repairt should be true.

It was necessary for .you to be punished.

LESSON 14

1., bbyjti pani bhame ka The water-carrier draws ^ kara karta hay. water.

^ -2 . dekhne meg koi, harj There's no harm in looking. y nahig.

^Z. janvarog ko marna bwra It 's a dreadful thing to beat kam hay. animals.

LESSON 14 161

4. ws ne lal syahi xaridni caBi.

5. mayi) ne sukhi Iskp kajiii Jwruki.

6. mali dudh lene gsya.

7?;sph.-Viighi cliati pi{iie ki t^'rishfr). ' " ' - - - -

8. ap ka kshna sshih nay. 9. mera âr bar vahag jana ... •• niwnasyt'nahir).

"10. ab cj^thiag ani jani fwru huii).

11. wnhop ne darzi se garniz îne ko ksha.

12. mallah dsrya parkarne ko t d j a j Jio gaya.

\1'3. hsmchaykhanevaleheyri. 14. har roz twmhei) al;h safhe

X9tm kame cahieg. •15. wse das dyn ki chw[|;i leni

cahie. 16. thekedar ko mazdurog

par mehrbani karnfcaiiie

• Cv, ws mard ko aysi gandi bateg muhg se na

( ' nykaini cahie thig. "^8, fawhar ko bivi se hame/a , „ • nek swluk kama cahie, M'9. asbab ladnevale ko bahwt

xabardar rahna cahie, 20. meri kothi par jana awr

jhaj; lawt ana. 21. cori na kama, xun na

kama.

He wanted to buy red ink. ^ ' '

I began to cut dry wood, V ^

The gardener went to get \y miflc. /

She's not going Jo moum"A^ without.reason. / ~ ~"

What you say is right, N ^ ^ ^ It's not proper for me to go v

there constantly. Now letters Beîi to pass o

(between them). They told the tailor to make .ashirt. '"'"'"' '

T h e ' ^ i l o r {or boatman) \f prepared to cross the river.'

There are six of us to feed.^^ You should fmish eight

pages a day. He should tiJte ten days' ,^

leave. The contractor shotdd have ^

been kind to the workmen^

That man shouldn't have ~* allowed such foul Ian- V guage to pass his Ups.

A husband should always " treat his wife welL

A man should be very careful in loading goods.

Go to my house and return ^ / at once.

Do not steal or commit murder.


LESSON 15

sakna = to be able ; cwkna = to finish, to have finished

S/e Grammar, pp. 68-70.

<^. barsat ke dynog meg jkysan asani se zamin jot

^ r , v o l i i ar ke mare cylla blii / na S9ki.

/ H . 9|3r^wse pshcan saka, to jÎiejTiugga." '"•

^ . mwjh se yeh naliig ho sakta,

5.-agar ho saka, hazyr huggi. Z'^. jab tak wfli na sakoge,

kam kayse xstm karoge ?

7..,,ji nahig, mayi) kha cwka. •^8' J)aiidob3st ho cwkega, to

" taryf ho cwkne par hava bhi thsm gai.

badal ki vajah se gyrja dykhai nahig de sakta.

ghaiil;a bajne ke sabab ws Kfavaz swriii na desaki-

albattg^ jagsh daryaft ho "^kti , to mayg bhi ja

^>- mawjudhota. 13. jabbetinazdikakar khafi

hui, mag kahig. na kahiij ia cwki thiT

14. ho sakta to mayg ap ki darxast manzur karta.

11.

Farmers can easily plough the ground during the rains.

She was so frightened, she could not even cry.

JfJL.cM..,.recognise him, I shall send him.

I can't do this.

I shall come \i possible. Until you're able to get up,

how can you finish the work ?

No, I've already eaten. • -When everything's ready,-

^11 let you know. By ffieTime the- rain stop

ped, the wind had ceased, Because of the clouds, one

can't see the church. Because of the gong, one

couldn't hear his voice. Of course, if I could have. " 'fouh'd the place, I should

have gone too. ^ • . When the daughter came

and stood near, her mother t a d gone som^-_where, or other. '

If " it had- been"* possible, I should have granted your request,

LESSON 16 163 15. zaxmi sypahi blisla kab

tak sabr kar sakta ?

16. c\/hia yshaij.tak (âri ky by[ m ^ n a ghwssaki.

Well, liow_.long could a -wounded' sepoy remain patient ?

The mouse got |uch, a^ ^ ^ t that she ^ I d n ' t get into her hole.

LESSON 16

Isgna = begin ; and other uses of Isgna

See Grammar, p. 70 arid pp.

^^-•-'rgssa khegcne Isga. 'î. voh that thar kagpne

lagi. 3. voh kahne lage Jjarpare

barabar koi pahlvan -paliig.

^ . mere pwkarne par sab log . piche ha(;ne lagte hayg.

•^.•5. baccog ko 43rao mat, rone bgegge.

6. dhup ki gMTni lage, to sae meg antnTkyie.

7. jab barf papie lagi, bheôii ka kahig pata na

,.- laga, "•' •••.•8. i ^ f i ki \^x se wse bwri

VsfjalT'se'rneri nawkari lagi mayg awr mere bal bscce

. , - ' 'bhi bhukhe na rahe. '^d. sadhu ko saxt bhukh awr

pyas lagi malum hoti y hay.

^ n . do pahr ko har roz pyas lagti hay.

110-12.

He began pulling the rope.^^ She began trembling vio-\,

lently. They said: "There-is n o ^

wrestler equal to us."

When I call, everyone be-" gins moving back.

Don't frighten the children, ^ they'll cry,

IjJ:he_.sun^s^hqt, rest in the shade.

When it began to snow, there was no trace of the sheep.'

He stumbled badly against *• tfie'toot of a bush.

Since I got work, my \ children and I have never been hungry.

The sadhu seems to be very hungry and thirsty.

One gets very thirsty every N day at noon.

1C4 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

' ^ a . , tsmam qawm par ys xun ^ k a dhabba lagega. -

^

^C

Tlie whole community will be stained by thb mur-

vshap jane se h a m e g ^ liope that by going there kshig khagsi ya koi awr bimarina lagjae.

cot lagi, jab hi kshne laga ky mera d jT^ghari nsmrj

v^jT tegta, " '=-™^—-To. khane meg der na bgao

vgma jane meg der / /> bgegi.

"iSTCf wn ke hath kwch na laga. Vf7. yeh paejamg hamer) accha

nahii) lagta. ".

""is. saim degci meg lag gaya.

meri agkhlggi thi ky ws ne jaga dia.

we shan't contract a cough or some other ailment.

It was when he got hurt that he began saying that he was not happy there. •

Don't aelay about" your food or you'll be late in going.

They got nothing. These trousers dOT't_5uit

u s : or, we don't like 'them.

The curb 's got burnt and stuclTto the pot.

I had just got to sleep when he woke me. up.

LESSON 17

dena = permit ; pani = manage lo

See Grammar, pp. 70-1.

" ^ L v o h • batti gwl karne na Dae ky ap hi andhera ho

^ . agar sayr. karne paug to •karuBga.

^ ^ . voh zevar pasand karne / b h i na pai thi ky yayb

/ ho gaya: ^ 4 . koi saiei safed jofa pahynne na

pae.

It got dark before they'd put out the lamp.

I shall take a walk if I can manage it.

The jewel vanished before she had time to choose it.

Don't let anyone wear a white suit.

LESSON 17 165

5. kysi ko sabz rang ki cadar ^-ôTjhne na do. ^Tsccha, jane do.

V T yoh hargyz sais ko ghofa phyrane na dega,

X mwink3m hay ky fajr ko ^•^hahane pae.

^9: /ije ko nice gyrne na dia,

*iO^ jahari tak ho sakega ham wse bimar na hone

degge. 11. chotebaccori ko g8hvi}hil

meg tajrne nahii] dena cahie,

12, bayl, bakri, vagayra ko ^ nâyîi.rneg nahig carne

•' dena. TTS. agaircy bath se koi chtine

nshig pata, magsr cwp-cap baythkar ankhorj se dekhne to dete hsyr) ?

Don't let anyone wear aV green-coloured shawl.

Very well, let it pass;. or : "^hever mind,

He'll certainly not let the groom walk the horse about.

He may manage to bathe at sunrise.

He didn't let the glass fall on the ground.

As far as possible, we shan't let him get ill.

You shouldn't let little' children swim in the deep lake.

Don't let bulls, goats, etc., graze on^this plain.

Though one may not touch,' they do let one watch quietly, don't they?


LESSON 18

HABIT

Habit is expressed bj' ksrna = to do, with what is probably the past participle of other verbs. No. 15 shows that for jana, the form used is jaya; not the usual past partjeiple gsya.

V i . The schoolboys are always throwing balls.

^^2. Don't make a practice of >~iwalking in the veranda.

• ^ 3 . They eat and drink in the ^ . ^ ^ f e r o , o m .

^ - ^ . Make a habit of working hard. •

/ 5 . The Maulvi conducts prayers on Fridays.

Your work is to wipe the chairs with a duster.

I f w u always do .difficult "wTOK^ 'cEtfefully, your im^ter will" be pleased with you.

Rustic girls easily get ôrifusOT and cry.

Vî Those who walk slowly do not slip.

[0. Wild animals come here all night.

madsrse ke Isfke gegd phegka ksrte hayrj.

bsramde meg na phyra

gol ksmre meg khaya pia kartehsyg. •

xub mehnat kia ksro.

jwme ko mswJvi sahab namaz pajhaya kgrte hayg.

twmhara kam yeh hay ky jhaijan se kwrsiag poQcha ksro.

mwjkyl kam socke karo to malyk xwj hoga.

gaon ki laikiag jaldi ghabraya awr roya karti hayg.

jo ahysta cala karte hayg wn ka paog physalta nahig.

yahag rat bhar jangli janvar aya karte hayg.

LESSON IB 107


•i^jXl. Not only I but everyone syrf msyi) hi nahig sab ws complains about him. kijykayetkiaksrtehayii.

12. In those days ghl used to wn dynog meg ghi inahgga be sold dear. •^^•^•' byka ksrta tha.

3. In future it will be ob- eb se sssta myla korega. tained cheaply.

14. The result of this examm- ys ymtyhan ka natija sccha ation used to be good. hua karta tha.

"15. Let them go wherever jahag jicahe jayaksreg. they feel inclinedT'™' """''

LESSON 18 1G9

V I I

•


LESSON 19 CONTINUANCE, DOING A THING AT THE MOMENT,

HABIT

For continuance, see Grammar, pp. 42-8; for doing a thing at the moment, pp. 42-5; for habit, pp. 97-9, and Lesson 18.

My eye's sweUing.jp. meri agkh suj rahi hsy.

^ H e kept on telling lies. jhu(;hi bateg bakta roha.

3. There's always a differ- khare khofe rwpae meg ence between a good and f arq hua karta hsy. a bad rupee.

^ , Sinners keep on sinning. gwnahgar gwnah ksrte hi rahte hayg

â." Mongooses become tame nevle pyar se hyl jaya if you love them. karte hayg.

6. He kept on swemgg great voh bafi qasmei) khata oaths. ~ raha.

7. The canal's very broad nahr bshwt cawfi hey, - and boats will go on it. ws . mei] kyjtiag calti

rsheggi.

%. All day motors keep going dyn bhar pskki sa^sk par -—on the n^^Qjjoad... motareg calti rahti heyg.

•*^ . You worked an hour and ghanfa bhar kam karte now it's finished? rahe, awr ab xatm ho

gaya?

0. Don't drink strong tea, tez cae na pia. karo varna or you 'U ,sp_oiI your_ di- hazma xarab ho jaega; gestiohl"" •

LESSON 19 171

if!J/ if- -^îjUf ^ / 3

9


11. Keep on stirring the milk cemce ya kagte se dudh with a' spoon or aôrk. hylate jao.

12. The scent of the flowers phulor] ki xwjbu se tsmam perfumes the whole makan mahak jata hay. house.

'" 13. The river flows through sal bhsr der}^ bshta the year. rehta hy.

I4. For fifteen days the moon pandra dyn tak "cagd will get bigger; and ba^hta rghega phyr bad after that wDl in the mer) vayse hi ghajta same way get smaller. jaega.

16. IJDok, the stars are shin- dekhie tare csmsk rahe ing. _ hayi).

16. He kept on doing mis- voh Jararat ksrta raha. chief. "^-^

. He used to do good. voh neki kia ksrta tha.

'18. She was asking a question, voh saval kar rshi thi.

—W. She used to hve m. the jangal meg raha karti thi. jungle.

LESSON 19 173

) l

r*^ re


LESSON 20

SPECIAL NUMBERS AND, TIME

See Grammar, pp. 20-26, 134^6.

1. It'U ^be. hz\i..3...nale or ek adh mil ka fassb hoga, Jffir^-quarters.

2. I want one-and-a-half sers ^^[hser ata cahie. of flour.

3. It'll take an hour and pswne do ghante lagegge. forty-five minutes.

vî It must weigh two and a ys ka vgzan 4hai ya pawne half to two and three tin man hoga, quarter maunds,

5. This seems to be three yeh sava tin ya sajhe tin and a quaft-er or three g9z ugca malum hota and a half yards high hay.

"%. It 's now halt past one; I 6fi\;h baj gaya hay mayi) shall bring lunch at- a pswne do bgje lane

-.quarter to two. ûgga.

" •W. This town has two thou- ys qesbe meg ssva do' ya sand two hundred and d,haih3zarbaj"ynde hsyg. fifty to two thousand five hundred inhabitants.

!,ondon has about nine Landan meg koi nsvve lakh million inhabitants. log rahte hsyi].

'^ . In the first hartal three pahlihsftalmer) tincawthai quarters of the shops dwkanei) band thig. were shut.

10. To-day I got breakfast at aj mwjhe hazyri gyara eighteen minutes past bajksr afthars myna]; par eleven. myli,

5' l^ y'^^P/i^^^yif]^" -rry f

S i l 01 NOSS3T


11. The day before yesterday parsog mayg ne chofi I had my morning tea at hszyri chay bajne mei) nineteen minutes to six. wnnis m5m9t par khai. ,-

12. London's nine times as Landan Bsnnyggham 'se big as Birmingham, naw gwna ba];a hay.

.3. The population of India Hjmdostan ki abadi paygtis is three hundred and karof hay. fifty millions.

14. The population of Delhi Dylli Mwltan se page gwni is five times the popula- hay. tion of Multan.

15. It is 12.45; he was to pawn baj gaya hay; wse begin the work at 12,45. pawn baje kam /wru

karaa tha. ' '^

16. There cannot be more hamare gaog meg safhe sat than 760 people in our saw se zyada admi na village. hogge.

K^- A third of the ships were lapi meg ek tyhai jahaz lost in the battle. barbad hue.

LESSON 20 177

-4,;>l/>^-^/ê^>^


LESSON 21

THE PASSIVE ,^

See Grammar, pp. 53-5, 105-6.

' ^ l . One plays this instra- yeh baja wngli se b^jaya ment with one's iinger. jata hsy.

If you rub oil oil the knee, , ghwfne par tel lagaksr it'll get well. malo to sccha ho jaega.

3. One meaning of this word ys lafz ke ek mane bstae was explained. gse.

,^_4. Let it be spread on the z»min par bychaya jae. floor (or ground).

5. If he's Jj^êd;^harsJ4y. sg " Jjvlnijaaâe to mar he'll die. jaega. . . j^

6. They'll get lines drawn mj'strioi) se yahar) lakireg here by the workmen. khygcvai jaeggi.

7. Fish are caught with macchliar) kagtoQ ya hooks or nets. jalog se pskfi jati hayg,

^^' An advance of two rupees' do iwpae pefgi die gae the. was (bad been) given,

9. To-morrow the marriage kal nykah pa^haya jaega. ^' will be performed.

•'.^rO. Here the Id festival is yahar) id msnai jati hay, observed.

LESSON 21 17!>

-i I

180- TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

Agree to whatever price qimst jytni thahrai jae to is settled. zanir man lo.

^ ^ 2 . It'll be a good thing if agar'wse farsi p9];hai jae to he's taught Persian. behtar,

13. The madman was chained. pag9l zanjirog se jaki;a gaya.

4. Are you mad? ten sql mari gai?

'-^5. I can't throw a stone so mwjh sc ytni dnr pstthsr far. nahir) phegka jata.

16. That girl cannot walk ws laxki se t^hai kos paydal two and a half kos. nahii) cala jata.

17. He couldn't stand. ws se kha(;a nahig hua jata / • tha.

18, I t was explained to them, wn ko samjha dia gaya tha. (They were warned, etc.)

.LESSON 21

./r-yuîÂcTyi;^//!

.i/i'AûJ-jJi

//(JA^fdy^

.[^^•:uiAj9,(jiÂ

,i%}kui (JAr,cr/5ti^/>'tr/

,\/i'y\r.ui\'/î/\

'^\fyU /(cJi

181

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

L 18


LESSON 22

MYLNA. MYLANA

.See Grammar, pp. 109-10,

1. The horse got only one ghoi;e ko ser bhar hi dana seer of grain. myla.

2. Well, tell me, did you get bliala, batao to, twmlieg permission? rwxsgt myli?

3. Get leave indeed? I got rwxs9t kya? balky javab,^ dismissed. myl gaya.

. Sweepers get less pay mehtaroi) ko sab nswkarog than the other servants. se kam tanxah mylti

hay,

5, We met the ayah in the aya hsmeg bay meg myli, garden,

6," The rajah met a splendid pakki sajak par raja ko ek , elephant on the metalled nyhayat xubsurat hathi

- road, myla.

7, Perhaps the sahib won't /ayad Sahab mwjh se see me after all. myleg hi nahig.

8, I will introdiice you. mayg myla dugga,

9, The vizier's two nephews vazir ke donog bhatije apas are very like each other. meg bahwt mylte hayg,

10, Sometimes the fakir used kabhi voh faqir mwjh se to come to see me, some- mylne ata tha kabhi-times I met him by yoghi myl jata tha, chance,

LESSON 22 183

a

16d TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

11. Our handwritings are very hamare xst ek dusre se mucli alilte. mylte jwlte hayg.

12. I'm afraid the servant may have been dismissed.

rawjhe xswf hay ky :j^dmatgar ko javab na myl gaya ho.

13. Will these books stay kya yeh kytabeg myli jwli lying here all mixed up ? p3[i rsheggi ?

'14. Compare these tliree maps to see whether they agree or not.

yn tinog nsqjog ko ap mylakar deldiie ky mylte hsyg ya naMg.

SyT^H He's a very friendly man; you'll see he'll grant an mterview to them all (or greet them aU).

voh bshwt mylnsar admi hayi) ap dekhegge sab hi se mylegge.

We shall eat together. ham mylkar khaegge.

17.'Mud is made .by mixing mytfi iaevf pani mylakar earth and water. gara bonaya jata hey.

LESSON 22 185

II

12

13


LESSON 23

REPETITION

See Grammar, pp. 130-3. Nos. 3 an,d 4 illustrate the meaning of pleasant, nice and

hot, nice and fresh, dear little children, and a pretty walk. In No. 9 the thought is spread over the various ceremonies constituting the marriage and over the past few weeks.

They were all lying apart ssb log glag slag leje hue from each other. the. ^

2. In rich men's houses ser- ' maldarog ke hap nawkarog vants get big wages. ko bsp ba[i tanxaheg

mylti hayg.

3. Here you are—nice hot pio cae garm gsrm,- khao tea I Fruit nice and mevs taza tazg. fresh!

4. Oh, just look how prettily these little children walk!

5. The water of the farther tank is two feet deep.

6. He works hard, yet he was tired out going on carrjdng bricks.

The girl ran to her mother and clung to her.

8. Brave men escape from many kinds of danger.

are deliho zara yn nahnhe nannhe baccog ki kya pyari pyari cal hay,

parle talab ka pani do do gaz gahra hay. .

mehnati admi hay, taham inl;ei) ( ho 4ho kar ajjrz a gaya.

lafki dawi;ti daw^ti apni ma se jake lypat gsi-'

dyler admi qysm qysm ke xatrog se bac jato, hay.

8 (

iSr E ; NOSS3T


9. They've only recently yn ka naya naya byah hua been married and come hsy, 3wr ablii abhi here to live. yahag rahne ae hoyg.

10, What wonderful sights yeh gngrez dur dm' ke these Englishmen see pshatog par C3i;h csi;h when they climb those ksr Iâ kya taraaje far-ofl mountains. dekbte hayg.

11, In mider two years I shall do sal ke andar andar get promotion, and then milvjhe taraqqi mylegi; I shall get two days' phyr mahine meg do do leave every month. dyn chwî mylegi.

.2. I heard a number of mithe mithe git swn-swn-sweet songs and was so kar mera dyl bay bay ho delighted. gaya.

\A$. His face gradually red- rafta rafta Jarm ke mare dened all over with ws ka cehra lal ho gaya. shame,

14. Even so you won't get it phyr bhi baythe baythet-o while you are doing nahig roylega. - -nothing.

LESSON 23 180

190 TEA,CH Y.OURSELF HINDUSTANI '

LESSON 24

PgESENT AND PAST PARTICIPLES

(fl) Used as attributive adjectives agreeing with some noun (i) expressed, or (li) understood. See Nos. 1-18.

(b) Used as :— , (i) Predicative and complementary adjectives.

See Nos. 19-31. (ii) When the participle indicates a state, especially

when used adverbially, and above all when it is repeated, it is often put in the oblique masculme singular. See Nos. 32-i2.

[«(!)]• 1. A dead bear was lying on ek mara hua rich saj;! hui

some rotten wood. lakp per psja tha. 2. There's a spring of flow- wji;e qssbe mei) bshte pani

• ing water in the deserted fca ca/ma hay.

^ ^ T

town.

. Travellers were seen at a dur se ate hue, mwsafyp distance. dykhai die.

4. One had a laughing face, ek ka to hagsta hua cehra but the other seemed to tha awr ek Id roti hui'

be crying. surst.

5. Books written by me. men lykhi kjrtabeg. ' : - ••

v > ^ . Cloth made of cotton, kopas ka bana kapâ.

A shirt made at home. ghor ka syla kwrta.

N , / ^ . A literate villager. lykha psfha dehati,

'9. A vulture with wings cut. par ksfa gydh. / 10. Girl companions whose nice lykhi hui saheliag.

names are written below.

LESSON 24 . . l e i

^Ji% 3 \^

193 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI 11. A sempstress who has kam sikhi hui darzan.

learnt her work.

M a . Girls who've got prizes. ynam pai hui Igfkiai),

^ ^ 3 . A drowning man clutches (J_ubte ko tynke ka sahara at a straw. bshwt hay.

\ / f 4 . JECilling a dead man. mare ko mama.

15. The fruit of one's deeds, apne kie ka phal.

16, Following his advice. ws ke kahe par calna,

17. I can't read my own writ- mayr) apna lykha nahirj' ing (what I've written). pa^h sakta.

18, Don't rouse a sleeping sote ko na jagao. man-.

/ [ * (i)]-F~/_19. She came running. voh daw^ti hui ai.

20. The dacoits were caught 4^ku bhagte hue pakje ' running away. gse.

LESSON 24 193

tTJ 16 « *

> 20

194 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI-

21. There's always snow on co i barf se i^hski rahti the summit. hay.

22. A bed woven with (broad) navaj ka palang bycha hua tape was placed there. tha.

23. Did you see fruit on the ap ne phal lage hue dekhe? trees?

24. You ate burnt bread. twm ne jali hui ro1;i khai.

25. She was going very fast, voh dawfi dawfi ja rahi thi.

26. She was going very fast, voh bhagi bhagi ja rshi thi.

27. I'm ahnost dead (very ra^yg marijati hug. tired, etc.),

28. The elephant advanced hathi jhumta jhamta age swinging his trunk. ba^ha.

29. The deer fled with great hyrsn cswkfi bhsrta bhag bounds. gaya.

' 30, My mother speaks hesi- meri ma sfakti hui bolti tatingly. hay.

31. He doesn't answer even bshwt bwlaya javab nahig though ofteii called. deta,

t

oc

«

9Z <f-

' ' -i p i/rf^ "^ / ^ ^^ '^'

eei n NOSS31


ES. Trembling, she began to kagpte kagpte {or kagpti speak. kagptj] kebne Iggi.

33. He was at death's door, marte marte beca. but he, recovered.

34. He became ill while lying pa];e pare [or p»xa. p3t;a] there. bimar ho gsya,

• 35. She won't get rich with- ' baythe bay^he dawbt-out doing anything, mand nahig ho jaegi.

36. She pulled herself. to- sarabhalte sambhslte ssm-gether with great , bhsl hi gai. difficulty. ..__

37. The kite {bird} hovered cstan par m9n4,late man^-over the rock and fell to late lor -ti 5ti] cil gyr the ground, pap.

38. He didn't forget even gyrte gyrte bhi voh na while falling. bhula.

39. She cooked till she was roH pakate pakate thak gai tired. [or -ti -ti],

40, Even while giving charity zakat date dete bhi beimani hg-was planning deceit. ki socta tha. ng-wa

'il. They quarrelled aU the lai1;e jhagajte ghar pahwgc way home. gae.

^ 4 2 . I shall stop the work as mayii pahwgcte hi kam soon as I arrive. band ksira augga.

LESSON 24 197

.^.L/'L/' 33

^{lf'J^,iJ'^4^k 34

'if^^J^ ^ ^ 36

38

40

41

1S8 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

LESSON 25 • PRESEhJT AND PAST PARTICIPLES (continued)

(a) Complementary to nouns and pronouns in oblique cases. See Nos. 1-9.

(6) Used absolutely". changed subjects, (i) Participle used ateolutely, the noun used with

the participle being different from the subject of the sentence. The absolute participle is always oblique masculine singular. Participle affirmative. See Nos. l(>--23.

(ii) The absolute use of the participle in the negative. The negative is generally be, bayeyr, byna, which may be translated literaUy " without". See Nos. 24-7.

(iii) The absolute participle may be- impersonal. either affirmative or negative. See Nos. 28-35.

(c) Unnatural agreement. See Nos. 36-9.

1, Someone saw me dancing, kysi ne mwjhe nacte hue [or nacta hua] dekha,

2, Who caught you playing ? kys ne twm ko khelte pakfa? [o;-khelte hue]

3, Someone wiU find him koi wse soe hue paega [or (or her) asleep. soe soe],

I found him (or her) dead, msyg ne wse mara paya. 5. The king's been dead a bad/ah ko more do hafte

fortnight. ho gse. '6. I feel ashamed to make yeh arz ksrte mwjhe J"9rm

This request."——^—^ ^ti hay, '7, The' Maialvi'sTiegn living mawlvi sahab ko yahag y' here for two months. rahtedomahinegwzargae.

^_^ S. While returning, he saw ws ne lawfte hue mwjhe f me. dekha.

/ 9 . He saw me retummg. • ws ne mwjhe lawtte hue ^^ dekha.

^

LESSON 25 199


[Mi)]. 10. She was coming with syr jhwkae, hath ba^hae,

bent head and out- a rshi thi. stretched arms.

11. He was drunk. Jarab pie tha.

12. The police caught the pwlis ne cor ko, mal lie, thief with the goods on , pakta. him,

13. The sister was playing bahyn, bacce ko god meg with the child in her He, khal rghi thi. anns.

N . ^ A s 4. As long as I am alive, no- mere dam mei) dsm bote body can do you any hue ap ka koi bal bazu harm. bika nahir) kar sakta.

16. As long as you and I are ap ke rahte awr mere bote here, what harm can ws ka kya bygi;ega ? come to him ?

16. He cried till he got the rote rote ws ki hycH hiccups. bandh gai.

17. I laughed so much that I hsgste hagste mere pet got a stitch in my sid^. meg bal pai; gae.

18. He went off at dawn (as dyn nykalte (swbah bote or ^ soon as it was morning, dyn C9[he) hi voh cal dJa. ' a t break of day).

{&. At one o'clock. ek baje.

LESSON 25 201

,L^£ .>^( / I,


20, As soon as he said that, I ws ke yeh bat kahte hi, shut my ears. mayg ne kan band kar

lie.

21. Even though they sang sari rat gate gate bhi git all night, the songs were xatm na hue. not finished.

2. On the way they saw a calte calte ek miinar nszr minaret. ay a. '

23, On my arrival the work mere pahwgcte hi kam will be stopped. band ho jaega.

.1^ (ii)].

24. He fell asleep without bayayr cy|;j;hi lykhe so. having written the letter. gaya.

25. Don't go without paying wjrat bayayr die ng jao. 'him.

• 26. He began to bathe with- ws ko be bwlae nahane out having called him. ' laga.

' ^ 27. Without their personal bjma wn ke xwd hwkm die order, this work will not yeh kam na hoga. be done.

[i (iii)].

28. Gradually. hote hote.

29. Night passed without rat jagte ks\i. . sleep.

LESSON 25 203

20

.i:^ J^ ^\H J) %/^. 22

23

•24

- j ^ ? ; J^K 28

- a sTi ;^ i^ i 29


30. The day passed restlessly, dyn tsfapte bita.

^"^ 31. She'll not come unless be bwlae n& aegi-she's called.

32. He fell into it unthink- be soce ssmjhe phags gsya. ingly.

33. One tests gold by assaying sona janie kase, admi janie, it, and man ,by living b9se. with him,

34. Why tease, when you've byn cheje kya chetna? not been teased yourself?

35. He won't leave him alone, byn che];e na choêga.

[c].

36. When he was retummg. lawfte vaqt. •

37. At the time of going. jati dafe.

•38. While still alive. jite ji.

39. At sunset. dyn d.ubte.

LESSON 25 205

* *

H I'}/-' i/^^/'-cf.

33

34

, r ^ . V f ^ ^ ; / r C ^ 35

- - > ,

,JÔk

36

37

,dH--• 38

-^ffiifj 39


LESSON 26

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

• See Grammar, pp. 46-8, 51-2. : j

(fl) Fulfilment of condition assumed. See Nos. 1-7.

(6) Fulfilment possible, but not assumed. See Nos. 8-15.

. In No. 15 the condition is only implied.

'. If he did this, he did very agar ws ne yeh hsrkat Id to wrong. nyhay&t bwra kia. a

2. She certainly won't go. agsr ap ws ko mana karte if you're telling her not hayg to hargyz na jaegi. to.

3. If the headman keeps away from bribes, 1 shall always be pleased with him.

y. The com ripens when the rain falls.

agar Ismbsrdar ryjvat se bacta rahega to mayg ws se hsmejs xwj" rahugga.

baryj" hoti hsy to gehug pakte hayi).

5. If you were finding mis-t ^ e s in the translation, who could correct them except you ?

agar ap tarjwme meg yaltiag pate the to ap ke bajae kawn dwrwst kar sakta tha ?

6. If he's insulted him, I shall certainly not recommend him (intercede for him).

agar ws ne ws ki beyzzati ki hogi to mayg ws ki syfaryl hargyz na ka-rugga.

LESSON 26 207

, 1 / \A>:>,U'i(fjJ'/'iLo')/\ ,

' j / ; 7 / T t / .

208 TEACH YOURSiLF HINDUSTANI

7. If he's coming along the road, I shall see him and majte my request (shall tell him).

ag9r voh SBX^k par a rshe hogge to mayi) wn se mylke arz fcarugga.

ii>l

If the Government's p ^ - sarkar se rwxsat ki msnzuri mission comes, I mil ae, to ksl hi ravana hug. start to-morrow.

9. Yes, if he promises, I can give up my job.

10. If one's lamenting his bad luck, he shijuld be comforted.

11. If anyone's done something wicked, he will be punished.

12. How can a bird escape once it's snared?

hag voh vads kareg to nswkari chof dug,

koi apni bsdqysmati ko rota ho to dylasa dena cahie,

sgar kysi ne bsdmafi ki ho, to ssza mylegi-

psrynda Jal ineg phsgs gsya ho to kyogkar chut jae?

13. This time, if you spoil sb t i dsfa agar ssnduq the box and chair and kursi vaysyra ko bygafa other things, don't ex- to wjrat ki wmed na pect toJ)e_paid. . rakhna.

14, This is poison, if you eat it, you're a dead man you'll die).

falling 15. The apples were like hailstones,

yeh zahr hay; khaya awr mare; [or khaoge to mar jaoge]; [or khaya to mar jaoge],

seb ayse jhai;te the, jayse ole patte hog.

LESSON 26 209

- - "

.Or^Lh Z^9)4î. L>^4iw^ 15


LESSON 27

CONDIT IONAL SENTENCES {continued)

(a) Fulfilment improbable or impossible. See Nos. 1-5. In No. 1 the condition is only implied. In No. 6 the protasis (if-clause) is omitted. In No. 8 the apodosis (conclusion) is omitted.

(6) If-clause (protasis) or conclusion (apodosis) omitted. See Nos. 6-10. Note that the protasis is omitted in Nos. 6, -10; and the apodosis is omitted in No. 7.

(c) One or both verbs pluperfect conditional; condition impossible of fulfilment. See Nos. 11-13. Note that the pluperfect in Nos, 11-13 puts the thought emphatically in the past, but it is rarely necessary.

/ \ I should have scolded him well if I'd had the power.

2. If my father had been there, he wouldn't have dared to be so extravagant.

3. If the child's mother knew (had known), she would be (would have been) greatly distressed.

4. If it had been possible, should I not have gone to see him ?

5. If his things had been clean, the maulvi would have got shaved and got his nails pared.

mera bes cslta to mayi) wse xub 4ar)tt^-

mere valyd vahag hote to ws ki kya raajal thi ky gysi fwzul xard karta.

bacce ki mag ko xsbar hoti to S9xt porefan hoti.

ho sskta to mayr) jakar na mylta ?

ws ke awzar saf hote to mawlvi sahab hsjamst bsnvate awr naxwn ka(vate.

LESSON 27 211


[6]-6. I shouldn't have spent a ws ki xatsT mayg ek kawfi'

farthing on his tiehalf, bhi na xsrc kerta.

7. Oh, if only the earth had hae, zamin phaf jati awr opened and swallowed wse nygal jati. him up.

8. Ifyou'donlyknownthat agar ap ytna jante ky voh he was dead, fawt hogsya hay.

9. He didn't tell me, if he wnhog ne jr/ad na kia had done so, could 1 varns kya majal thi ky have failed, to serve mayi) xydmat na karta. him?

10. No doubt you'd have bejak twm jan totke Jer ki fought with all your tarah Istte awr voh gidsx might like a tiger, and ki tarah twm se bhagta. he would have run from you like a jackal.

4^1 ' l l . If the house had not agar makan ki safedi na^ki

been whitewashed, it gai hoti to bai;a nwqsan would have suffered hota. considerable injury.

12. If this child had not agar ys bacce ne ws ki lighted up his dark andheri zyndagi ko raw/an hie, he might have na kar dia hota, to fayad died a long time ago. kab ka mar gaya hota,

13. If he had made this ex- agar ws ne yeh bahana kia cuse, I shouldn't have hota to mwjhe taajjwb na been surprised. hota.

LESSON 27 213


LESSON 28

HOW TO EXPRESS " HAVE, POSSESS "

See Grammar, pp . 117-18.

(i) Immovable property : Nos. 1, 2, 3. (ii) Movable property: Nos. 4, 6, IS, 17. (iii) Abstract things: Nos. 5, 6, 7, 8, 18. (iv) Disease, illness : Nos. 9-12. (v) Parts of the body : Nos. 13, 14.

(vi) Relatives : No. 16.

1. The prince has 100 or 150 acres of land.

2. The contractor's got 2 houses and 2 wells.

3. The vizier's wife has got lots of very fertile land.

4. The watchman's got a ' lantern and a stick.

5. My grand-daughter (daughter's daughter) is very fond of wearing a shawl.

6. My niece hasn't got any iewellery, and she's a

J great desire to wear it. ^ , ^ . He's very fond of play

ing cricket.

8. The Brahman's servant has neither abihty nor intelligence.

9. This bull's got a bad cough (has caught a bad cough),

Jahzade ki saw 4î:h saw bighe zamin hsy.

thekedar ki do hsveliag owr do kueg hajfg,

vazir ki begsm ke pas bahwt zorxez zgmin hay.

cowkidar ke pas lalfayn awr lathi hay.

meri navasi ko cadar othne ka bahwt Jawq hay.

meri bhanji ke pas zevar nahig; wse zevar pahynne ki bahwt xahyj hay,

ws ko kyrkat. khelne ka bahwt Jawq hay.

brahman ke mwlazjTu meg ns lyaqat hay awr na aql.

ys bayl ko saxt khagsi hoy [or ho gai hay].

LESSON 28 215

.C^

-4^ erf//

216 TEACH YOURSELF-HINDUSTANI

10. I have the hiccups. mwjhe hyckiag ati hsyg.

11. The doctor's nephew has âk^sr ke bhotije ko bwxar fever. csfha hgy.

12. You've got a cold, twrnheg zwkam hua hsy.

13. Some rams have four baz men^hog ke car car sigg horns. hoteheyg.

14. A rhinoceros has only gerê ka bas ek hi sigg hota one horn. hay.

15. We have sports' ma- hsmare pas khel kud ka sab j terial of every kind. sanMin mawjud hay.

16. My uncle has two sisters mere caca ki do bahneg and three daughters. awr tin Isfkiag hayg.

17. He has two horses, two ws ke pas do ghofe, do beg-carriages and a groom. giag awr ek sais hay.

18, How great "is God, the Xuda ki kay^ hwzwrgi hay, Ahnighty. ajib qwdrat rakhta hoy

LESSON 23 217

tt

12

.^ yf.f UlL- -r^ffj/j/wi^M

i j

K

15

4 , *• i )j^ 18


LESSON 29

VARIOUS DETAILS

See Grammar, pp. 34 -6, 122-3.

{a) said. SeeNos. 1-7.

(b) sa :—

(i). like. Note that the sa in Nos. 12 and 13 means, so to speak, something like a stream or snake. See Nos, 8-13.

{ii) used as a meaningless speech habit. See Nos. 14-16.

(c) No matter how much, how big, etc. See Nos. 17-21. ' In Nos. 17, 18, 20, kyog na may be omitted.

yf. Show it to me at any dykhao to sahi. rate.

2. Eat, won't you ? {Have khao to S9hi. a bite.)

3. All right, two rupees. do rwpae sahi. ^ ^ . Oh aU right, if not you, twm ns sshi, koi awr sahi.

then someone else. 5. He went/ it's true, g»ya to sahi.

but . .-, i<g. There is always another twm nahii), 3wr sahi, awr

*^ t, to take your place. nahii), swr sshi. / I . Oh, of course you're twm hi sacce sshi,

/ right; let's admit that. ^yS. I've met no one hke you, twm sa mwjh ko koi na

but you have met many myla; mwjh se twm ko like me. bahwtere.

9. A face like an angel's. fyryjte ka sa cehra. 10. A wild beast like a wolf, ek dsrynda bhei;ia sa.

LESSON 29 219

J / 10

220' . TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

11; A lake, big like the sea. ek samgndgr si jhil.

12, A stream, as it were, was ek nala sa bah ralia tha-flowing.

13. A poisonous snake-like ek zahrila sa samp men thing crawled between t Bg' O ^^ lic mefl se my legs. reggta gwzra.

14. Is so much flour enough ytne se aje se gyars admi for eleven men ? ser hogge ?

/ 1 5 . A tall camel. lamba sa ugf.

16. A blackish bear. kala sa bhalu.

17. No matter how over- kytna hi zaberdast kyog na bearing he is, he can't ho, magarkwchnabatiega. do anything.

18. No matter what kind it cahe kysi qysm ka kyor) na is, it won't do. ho, kam ka na hoga.

J.'9. No matter what will xah kwch hi ho, ws ki heyz-happen, he will be zati hogi. disgraced.

LESSON 29

. J ^ ^ C T V A V - ^

Mlj^-UPi'JLl

r - -

J./l^^

.£x îJjU.\/^L1^î

221

I I

12

13

14

> M U L J I>

- y ^ - U K r 16


20. Even though there are! bis hi kyog na'hog, msgar twenty, I shall escape. msj^g bsc jaugga.

21. No matter how ugly hej voh cahe kytna hi badsurst is, I shall continue toi ho, mayg ws se myla associate with hhn {toj rahugga (mylta rahugga). meet him),

LESSON 29 223


ALTERNATIVE FORMS

Page 205, No. 32 , £(j._ \^^,\^^

Page 205, No. 34 ,, \fr,j | . t>f (^ •f

Page 206, No. 3 7 . . t ; ^ ^ J v > J i '^^C^ ' l^ ,

Page 205, No. 39

Page207,No. 1 - l ^ / j T ^ f ^ i ^

Page 207, No. 2 .\ /_t.X 'X^/fU/j^

Page 207, No. 3

Page 209, No. 18-b jT^JLT't^t /Ûi ' -^^ ' f^

•P

ALTERNATIVE FORMS 225

Page 217, No. U 'fî^y/n/' i ' / j ^ / v / j l / ' Lti-

Page 223, No. 9 ^ ^ \/^/j^W*^

Page 231, No. 21 }^îU/il/-y!tJ>yf'-':^'iP^^'>'^ * '

HINDUSTANI-ENGLISH GLOSSARY

(-i indicates the forrii of the abstract noun)

3b

sbhi {emphatic of ab) accha

adab, m. sda,/ .

sdna afsos, m. agar sgsrcy sksar, adv.

aktubar, m. slag, adj. Slavs <}ie),postpos. 3lb9tt9 shnari, / .

amir sndsr, adv. sndha sndhera angia, / j , angrez spna

spnana, irans. sprsyl, m.

now; sb se, in future, from now I (looking baclt).

now, yet. good; accha ji, very well {said

|lto an inferior). respect; literature. cpquetry, etc.; ada kama, pay

j|{money, etc.). small. regret, sorrow; interj.: alas! '"

although. geinerally, often; adj. fron.: •

most people, the majonty. October. separate. besides. ceiâinly, no doubt. bookcase, wardrobe, hnen-press,

cppboard. rich insiile; l^fi) -postpos.: inside. bliiid. dark; ni-, darkness. bodice. English man or woman. my,'il your, his, her, its, then-;

. i.^. own; see Grammar, p. 33. assimilate, make one's own. April.

HINDUSTANI-ENGLISH GLOSSARY 227

oql./. are (/. sri), i-nteTJ.

'- srz, / . . 8rzi,/.

asami, / .

ssbab, m. 3Sl,/. asli 9xbar, m. SZ

ab 0 hava, / . abad abadi, / . a d s t , / adh, adha admi, m. ahysta aj

ala alu, m. aluca, m. am, m. amdani, / . ana ana, m. andhi, / .

. ar|kh,/. ap, (respectful) pron. apas meg aram, wj. asan avaz,/. . axyr azmana, tracts.

intelligence. 0 . submission (verbal). petition. vacant post; ni. or /., tenant,

client. furniture, luggage. source, origin, capital. genuine. newspaper. from (Persian), by (of author).

air, climate. inhabited, peopled. population. habit. half. man {homo, not vif). slowly. to-day; aj-k9l, in these days. humble; -i. exalted. potato. plum. mango. income. come. anna (coin). storm. eye; a. lagna, fall asleep (ki). you (m. or/ .) . among our-, your-, themselves.' rest. easy; -i. voice, sound. finally. tempt, test.

ybtyda, / beginnmg.


ydhar yhata, m.

yjazat,/. ylaj. Mi.

ylav3, see alavs. ylm, m, yityja,/-5anar9t, / . ymdad, / . ymtyhan, m.

hither, here. '. enclosed compound, ground :. round house, small section of

country. permission.

: medical treatment; yiaj k. (ka). treat.

; learning, knowledge. ;. petition. ; building.

help. examination (in school, etc.);

yn ynkar k.

ynsan, m. ynja, / . yntyha. / . ynam, m. yqrar k.

yr/ad, m.

ys yslah, / . ystydad, / . ystyfa, m.

y/tyhar, m. ytna yttyla,/ . ytvar, m. yvaz, see evaz.

ymtyhan lena (ka), to examine; ymtyhan dena, be examined, with ka of subject in which examined.

oblique plural of yeh; ynhog. * refuse, deny, with ka of thing

refused or denied. mankind. ^ literary composition. end. reward, prize. acknowledge, confess, with ka

of thing acknowledged or confessed.

command; yr/ad k., to command.

oblique singular, of yeh. t correction, amendment (literary), ability, capacity. pronounced ystifa, resignation

(with dena). announcement, advertisement. so much, so many. information, announcing. Sunday.


yzzat, / .

229

honour, respect; yzzat k. (ki), to honour, respect.

id, / . int./-iza, / .

wdhar, aAv. wja^na

'wjrat,/. wiatna, iniraiis.

wmed, wmmid, / . wn, wnhog wngh, / . wqab,m. wfhana, w^hvana, wpia, intrans.

ws wstad, m. wtsrna, intrans.

wtna, pron., adj. wttsr, tn. wthna, intrans.

religious, festival (Muslim). bridi. pam, trouble inflicted.

thither, there. become desolate; trans.: wjai^na

= make desolate, lay waste. remuneration, be turned upside down; trans.:

turn upside 'down; causal: wltana.

hope, expectation. oblique plural of voh. finger. eagle.

see ofhna. fly; trans.: wâna, cause to

fly, squander, oblique singular of voh. teacher; feminine : wstani. descend, put up (at house, hotel,

etc.), come off (hat, clothes); trans.: wtama = take off, bring down; causal: wtar-vana = cause to be taken oH, brought down.

so much or many. north. get up, rise; trans.: wfhana;

causal." w^hvana.

unca, adj.

upar, adv.

tail, lofty; highly pitched (of voice or note); -i.

above, upward; ke upsr, post-pos., above.

4^ O


ehtyat, / . e t i /• evsz (ke), ôstpos. etyraz, m.

ay aytiak, / . aysa

ohho, oho, interj. ola, ra.

othna, frflws.

OS, / .

awr, c(w?'.

awrat, / .

ba-, bsccs, w. {/. bacci) bacna, intrans.

bacpsn, JK. bad- (in composition) bsdalna, trans, and

badsn, TO- II badawlat (ki), postposi

badia, «i. bsdle (ke), postpos.

bsdmaj, adj. n. badnasib badqysmat badsurat

(care, carefulness. IheeJ. ) in place of, in return for. objection.

0 (address). spectacles (used in singular), of this kind; ayse = thus.

oh! hailstone; ole paje = hail

stones fell. put on (shawl, etc.); carnal:

wi;hana, w^hvana. dew.

and; pron. adj.: other, more, different, someone else, other people.

woman.

with (Persian). , child, young one. escape from impending danger,

be left over; trans.: bacana. childhood. evil {adj. in Persian). change; causal: badlana. ,

body. thanks to, through (only in

good sense). vengeance, exchange. in place of, instead of, in ex

change for; -i, • bad man, scoundrel; i-. unfortunate; -i. unfortunate; -i. •ugly; -i.


bsggi, / . bsysyr (ke)

-. bshslna, intrans.

bahas, bshs, / . bahssna, intrans. bshna, intrans. bahr, m. bshn, bshan, / . bahyjti, see bhyjti. bshu, / . bsjae (ke), poslpos. baje bsjna, intrans.

bakss, m. bakna, intrans.

bgkra, m. ' bakrivala, m.

baxubi bal (ke), postpos.

bal, m.

b9l9nd bala,/. balky, conj.

bainujyb (ke), postpos, banana, see banna. banavst, / .

two-wheeled carriage. without, apart from. be amused, entertained; catisal:

bghlana (generally said of dyl = heart).

argument. argue. flow; trans.: bahana. sea, etc. sister ,'

daughter-in-law. in place of, o'clock. sound (of gong, metal, coin,

etc.); trans.: bajana, cause to sound, play instrument.

box, talk nonsense; causal: bakana,

bakvana. goat,/., bokri. goatherd. well, excellently, on, as in mwgh or ghwtnog ke

bal, fall (on one's face), kneel (on one's knees).

twist, kink; usually plural used with pai;na.

high, lofty; -i. calamity. not so, but on the contrary; e.g.

do nahii) balky car, not two but four; das kya, chay bhi n3hiri,ten? notevensix. Not a horse, but a mule, ghoja nshig, balky xaccar.

according to.

making, fashion, artificiality.


band k., irans. bandar, m. bandsrgah, m.f. bands, m.

bandhna, intrans.

bandobast, m. banduq, / . bangla, m.

bania, m. banna, intrans.

bar, postpos. barasna, intrans. barabar, adj.

baramda, m. barbad barf,/. barkat, / . barra, m. barsat, / . b art an, m. barxylaf (ke) baija bai;hai bafhna, inirans.

bas bas, m. basa basaya basna, intrans.

sbut ir

band h., be shut. ihonkey. harbour.. servant, usually servant of God, (i or self-depreciatory;/. bandi. be tied; trans.: bandhna, tie; [I causal: bandhana, band-|| hvana, cause to be tied. •îarrangement, land settlement. . [gun. tihouse (detached, in European i'l style). li shopkeeper. 'I be made; trans.: ' banana, ;l make; causal: . banvana, i; cause to be made.

upon. rain; causal: barsana. even, level, equal; adv.: cer

tainly, continuously. verandah. destroyed; -i. snow. blessing. Iamb; / . mada barra. the rains, continued rain, vessel for cooking, etc. against, in opposition to. big, great. carpenter. grow, increase, advance; trans.:

bafhana, cause to increase, stretch out (hand, etc.). •

enough, only. power. inhabited. dwell, be inhabited; basana,

cause to inhabit or be inhabited.

HINDUSTANI-ENGLISH GUOSSARY 233

batana (rarely batlana), irans.

batti, /. b^tna, intrans.

bsyan, m. ba babat {ki} baba, m. babu,m. bad (ke) badal, m. badjah, in. bay-bay baliar, adv. , baja, m.

bandi baijtna, sesbatna. bagyai) bapdada, m.fl. [indecl.) baqi, adj.

bat , / .

bayag, see bagyag. bazi, / . bazu, m. bays (ke) byah, m. by cars, see becars. bycchu, m. bychana, trans.

bygsfna, intrans.

tell, show.

lamp, wick. be distributed, shared; trans.:

bag tna, share, distribute; banana, bsfvana, cause to be shared, etc.

story, narrative, explanation. with (Persian). concerning. -old man, father (also bava). Indian clerk. after (of time). doud. king; -i. happy, delighted. outside; keb.,ôs(ôs.,outside. musical instrument; baja-gaja,

used jocularly for several instruments, a band.

maidservant.

left (not right). ancestors. remaining, left over; adv.: after

all, in any case. matter, thing (abstract), word,

saying.

competitive game, match. arm. on account of marriage.

scorpion. spread (bedding, carpets, etc.);

intrans.: bychna. be spoilt, quarrel; Irans.:

bygajna.

234 TEACH YOURSjELF HINDUSTANI

bygha, m. bykna, intrans.

bylkwl, adv.

byl, m. bylla, ni. byna., ôsif os, bystra,' m. bij, m. bimar bitna, intrans. bivi, / . Bwdh, m. bwîiha bwjhnft, inlra-ns.

bwxar, m.

bwland, see bslsnd. bwlana, Irans.

bwra, adj. bwrqa, m.

bwfbwfana, intrans. bwzwrg

bmha but, m. be, Persian postpos. becara

becna, see bykna. bed,/. begam, / .

behoj

acre. be sold; trans.: becna, sell;

caiisal: Bykvana, cause to be " sold.

j^ltogether; with negative, not I at all. [•small animal's hole. feat ; / , bylli. i; without.

bedding. seed. sick; - i . pass (of time); trans.: bytana. wife, lady. Buddha. old; same as bui;ha. be extinguished; trans.:

bwjhana. fever; b. csfhna (ko), get

fever.

call, cause to sound; causal: bwlvana; seehohm.

evil; -i. cloak covering whole body worn

by Muslim women. mutter, grumble. honourable or great by age or

position; -i. old; same as bw4<lha. boot, shoe of English pattern. without. mild term of commiseration, as :

poor ieHow; also 'oycara.

cane, either growing or cut. lady, wife (used of woman of

rank). unconscious; -i.


behtar

beinmn be/ak beta, MI.

bevaquf

bayl, m. baythna boma, intrans.

bona, Irans. botal, / . bahwt bahwtera bhsi {only in voc.)

bhaygs, / .

bhala

bhar

bhsma, trans, and' inirans.

bhajek, / . bhat^l^"^' intrans.

bhstija, m. bhai, m.

goo'd; in Persian this is comparative, with behtgrin, superlative; -i.

dishonest, untrustworthy; -i. certainly, without doubt. son; beti, daughter; be(;a is

sometimes addressed to daughter;

very foolish. The adjective in address is insulting. The abstract noun is weaker; -i.

ox, bull. sit; causal: bythana. speak, sound; causal: bwlana,

call, q.v.; bwlvana. sow; causal: bwana. bottle. much, many. much, a lot. my good sir, my good woman;

not addressed to superior. buffalo; much more common

than bhaygsa,«».,male buffalo. good, worthy; adv.: very well

then; bhglamangs, good or worthy fellow, etc.; / , bhgli-manas

used after noun meaning time, distance, amount, a s ; dyn bhar = a whole day, or as little as a day; ser bhar = a whole ser, or as little as a ser.

fill, be filled; causal: bhsrana, bharvana.

flaming up of flame. flame up; also metaphorical;

Irans.: bh&i;kana. brother's son; / . bhatiji. brother, chum, mate.


bhagna, intrans.

bhal, bhalna

bhalu, m. bhanja, m. bhao, m. bhari bhyjvana, see bhejna. bhyfti, m. W\ bhitar, adv. bhuk.bhukh,/ .

bhuka, bhukha bhul,/. bhulna

bhusa, m. bhejna, trans.

caca, m.

Cdla ana cslna, inlrans.

camak, / . csmakna, intrans.f

C9nica, m. cand

capati, / .

ca^hna, intrans.

run, run away; trans.: bha-1 gana. (used only, with dekhna, see, 1 look a t ; as : dekh bhalksr, 1 lookuig, looking at. bear (animal); no feminine. sister's son; / . bhanji. price-rate. heavy, important.

water-carrier; alsobahyjti. also; in negative clauses: even inside; fostpos. (ke), inside. hunger; bhukog marna = die

of hunger. hungry. act of forgetting; fault. forget, be forgotten; causal:

bhwlana. straw, chaff, etc. to send; causal: bhyjvana,

cause to send.

father's younger brother; csci, / . wife of C9ca,

come along; calajana, goaway. move, accompany (with sath),

function; trans.: calana, calvana; cal dena, go off.

shine, glitter. shine, glitter; causal: cam-

kana. spoon. some, a few; do-cand, double,

two-fold. fiat cake of flour, not containing

yeast. • ascend, climb; causal: caj;-

hana, ca^hvana.


ca/ma, m. C3tk. cstai,/. cafxani,/. ca, cae, / . cabi, / . cadar, / .

cahe . . . cahe, caho caho

cahie

cahna, irans.

cagd, m. cagdi,/. car

cyuQti,/-cyllana, intrans. cyray, m. cyiia, / . cytthi./-cil,/. cin e jybin (Persian) ciz,/. cwyli khana (ki) cwhia, / . cwkna

cwp, cwpcap, adj. cwrana, trans. cuha, m. cor, tn.

spring of water; spectacles. swallow up, gobble up. grass mat. bolt or catch of door. tea. key. shawl; psJang ki csdar, bed

sheet. whether . . . or.

is or are desirable, proper; also ought; see Grammar, p. 96, and Sentences, Lessons 12-14.

wish, desire; in certain constructions, to be about to ; see Gramma'r, p. 96.

moon. silver. four; (ke) carog tsraf, on all

sides. ant. cry out, shout. lamp. little bird, sparrow. letter, epistle. kite (bird). a frown; thing (generally tangible). slander, speak against. mouse. in composition, to finish, to have

finished; sometimes sense of " akeady " ; see Grammar, p. 69, and Sentences, Lesson 15.

silent. steal; causal: cwrvana. rat. thief.


cori, /.. co t / . CO[l,f. cawgwna, adj. C9wki, / . cawkidar, m. c&wki;i bharna

cawtha

chapna, intrafts.

chati, / .

.'theft. 'blow, wound.

• peak, summit of hill, etc. • fourfold. / wooden stool, police post.

watchman; -i. gallop drawing four feet to

gether. ', fourth; C9wthai, /. , a fourth

part. be printed; traits.: chapna;

catfsals: ch^pana, chspvana. breast.

chydna, chydvana, see chedna. chigkna, inirans. sneeze {takes ne with past

tenses); causal: chynkvana. chwlana, chwlvana , causals o/chuna. chwpna, wj/;-fl«3. hide; trans.: chwpana; causal:

chwpvana. chwri,/. knife. chwtana, chwprana, see choT;na. chwtti, /. chuna, trans. chu(;na, intrans. ched,m. chedna, trans.

clieijna, trans.

chotna, trans.

chofa

d3bna, intrans.

dsftar, m. dafa,/.

leave, holiday. touch. escape, get free; see chopia. hole. pierce; inirans.: chydna, be

pierced; causal: chydvana. tease, stir up; inirans.: chydna,

be teased, stirred up. leave, set free; causal: chw

lana, chw(y ana; se« chujna. small.

be pressed, squashed, oppressed; causals: dabna, dsbana, dab-vana.

office, study, register. time (as in four times), section of

book or legal enactment.


daya, / . dshi, m. Dshli, Dylli,/. dahna, adj. dakksn dar, Persian postpos. daraxt, m. daraz, adj. daryaft k., trans. darzi, m. dastana, ?«, dastur, m. dsva, m„ davai,/, dsya, / . dada, m.

daxyl k., trans.

dal,/ . dam, TO. dana, m. dana, (jif?, danyj, / . dava, m. dykhna, dikhna, iniraiis.

dylana, dylvana, see dena. dysambsr, m. dijie divans dwkan, dukan./. dwkandar, dukandar, m. dwnya, / . dwpstta, m. dwrwst, adj. dwjman, m.f.

deceit. curds, buttennilk. Delhi. right (not left). south, in. tree. long. inquire about. tailor; / , dsizsn. glove. custom. medicine. mercy, pity. father's father; dadi,/., father's

mother. enter someone in school, etc.,

or something in book; daxyl h., intrans., enter.

lentils, etc. price (generally plural). a grain. wise; feminine the same. wisdom. claim. be visible; dykhana, show;

d y k h v a n a , cause to be looked at or shown; see dekhna.

December. respectful imperative of dena. mad; / . dlvani. shop. shopkeeper. world. shawl. correct, in order; -i. enemy; -i.

240

dwa,/.

TEACH YOURSELF H INDUSTANI

prayer; d. maggna, pray; d. dena (witli ko), to învoke blessing on, i

dudh, tn. dur, adj.

dursnde|

dusra dehat, m.s. dehati dekhna, trans. dena, irans.

deota, m. der,/. devi, / . donog dopahr, / dost, m.f. dawlat, / dswlatmand dawf, / . d9wpia, iniram. dhsbba, tn. dhyan, m. ,

milk, far; / . distance; baj;! dur, very

far. farseeing, careful about the

future; -i. second, other. villages, the country. belonging to villages; villager. see, look a t ; seedykhna. give; causal .* dylana, dylvana,;

see Grammar, p. 61, 'and Sentences, Lesson 17.

god. lateness, delay, time. goddess. both. noon. friend; 4. wealth. wealthy; -i. race, running. run; causal: dswfana. stain. meditation, attention.

dhwlna, dhwlana, dh,wlvana, see dhona. dhup, / . |j dhobi, m. dhokha, m.

dhona, Irans.

d ar, m. qama, iiUrans. d a k . /

' sunshine. ' washerman; / . dhobsn. deceit; dhokha dena, deceive;

dhokha khana, be deceived. wash; intrans.: dhwlna, be

washed; catfsals: dhwlana, dhwlvana.

fear. fear; causal: d,9rana. the post for letters.


4alna, trans.

4aritiia, tram. <ybia, / . dubna, inlrans.

4erh (^hakna, trans. <^halna, mlrans. ^9n^0TB., m. 4hai 4hur|4na, trans. 4her, m. i^hona, iratis.

tstim, m.

faxr, m. f sqir, m.

farman, tn.

farmana, trans. farq, m. farj, >M. farvari, m.f. farz, OT.

fssl,/. fatsh,/.

faxta, / , Faisi. / . fasla, m. fatyha, / .

doctor; -i, dacoit. insert, put into; causal :•

43lana. rebuke, threaten. small box. sink (in water, etc.); causals :

i^wbona, 4wbana, cause to smk, drown.

one-and-a-half. cover; causal: 4b.9kana. sink (of sun), decline (of life). proclamation by town crier. two-and-a-half. look for, seek. heap. carry (bricks, earth, etc.);

causal: t]_hwana.

understanding. early morning. pride (may have good sense). beggar, holy man (generally

Muslim). command; farmagbardar, adj.

obedient; -i. command, say. difference. carpet, floor, etc. February, duty; see Grammar, p. 95,

and Sentences, Lessons 12-14. harvest. victory; fatah pana, gain vic

tory. dove. Persian, the Persian language. distance between two places, the first Sura of the Qwr'an.


fykr,/. fylfswr, adv. fyryfts, m. , fwlans, adj. fwrsat, / . fwt, m. fwzul fwzulxsrc fawran, adv.

gsdha. Hi.. gahra

gala, m. g9li,/-gsUs, fit. ganda, MI. Ganga, / . garm gagvana, iraws. j; g»ya, pasi pofUc. oi jana, gaz, »M. "

gahak, m. gali,/. gana gaog,m. gara, fij.

gaii , / . gavar, m.f., or aa;.-

^.ydh, JK. gyrd, yrd-gyrd (ke),f

posipos. gyrja, MJ. gyrna, (wfrtiMS. gidsi;, m.

anxiety. immediately. angel. a certain; / . fwlani. leisure. foot (measure of lengtii). useless, worthless. wasting money, spendthrift; -i. immediately. die.

donkey; / . gadhi. deep (also metaphorically);

strong (of tea). throat. lane in town or village. flock; gsllaban, m., shepherd. dirty; / . gandi. the River Ganges. warm, hot; -i. lose, waste, squander,

go-yard (measure of length). cow; plural: gaeg, gayog. purchaser, client, abuse (generally obscene). sing; causal: gavana. village, mud and water mixed for build

ing. carriage, train. illiterate or uncultured person'

(lit. viUager). vulture. round.

church (the building). fall; causal: gyrana, gyrvana. jackal.


git, m. gwana, see gana.

^gwl k., trans. gwnah, m, gwnahgar gwria,/. gwzama, inirans.

gehug,m. gegd, / . gegâ, m. go, go ky, conj. god. /• .

go], ad^. ,

goli./.

gora, adj.

•* go/t, m. goya ghabrahat,/,

ghabrana, intraiis.

ghsnfa, )M. ghar, )B. ghap, / .

,

ghasitna, trans. ghsta, / . ghafna, intrans.

song.

extinguish {lamp, fire, etc.). sin; gwnah k., to sin. sinner; -i. do]]. pass by, pass (of time), die;

causal: gwzama. wheat. bail (for playing). rhinoceros. although. lap and arms, as in " on his

lap," " in his arms". round, circular; go! kamra,

drawing-room. bullet, medicine pill. It does

not mean " ball ". fair (of person's complexion);

gora cytta, very fair; also British soliier or Tommy.

meat. as if. abstract noun from ghabrana:

confusion, excitement,, etc. See below.

he confused, worried, overexcited; also irans. (especially when compounded with dena).

gong, hour. house. (i) short indefinite period of

time, half-an-hour, etc.; (ii) clock, watch; ghsji ghap, adv.: frequently.

drag; causid: ghysa^vana. thick clouds of the rainy season. lessen,decrease; (r(iMs..'gha|;aoa.

2U

ghao, m. ghas,/ . ghysna, trans, and

iiitrans. ghi, m. ghwsna, intrans.

ghw^na, m. ghota, m.

yalti,/. yam, tn. yarib, adj.

TEACH YOUBJSELF H I N C I U S T A N I

wound. grass.

yayr, adj.

yazal, / .

rub, be nibbed against some- -• thing, be rubbed away.

clarified butter. enter (into, meg), especially in

haste or by force; causal : ghwsana.

knee. horse; gho[i,/., mare.

mistake, error. grief; yam bhana, be grieved. poor, wretched; docile (of

animal}. strange, foreign; negative sense

with another adjective, e.g. yayr-hazyr, not present, absent.

love lyric; yazal-go, writer of love l3Tics.

yalyban, adv. yayb, adj. vyza,/. ywlam, m. ywssa, m.

hagna

hsjamat,/,

hakim, m. halal, adj.

halka h9m hamara

probably out of sight; unseen. food. slave. anger; ywsse hone, ywssa ana

(ko), be angry.

to have a motion; takes ne with past tenses.

shaving, haircut; hajamat bsn-vana, get shaved, or have a haircut.

doctor. ceremoniously lawful (chiefly of

food); a Muslim word. light {not heavy). we. our.


haq, also haqq, m. _iiar, pron. adj.

hsrj, m. haram, adj.

harf, m.

hsrkat, / . hsrkara, m. hajap k., frflws. hsttal-, / .

ha1;na, intrans.

hava, / . havale ke, postpos. havass, m.pL hsveli, / ,

-"•hayran hazm k. hal, m. harjkna, trans.

hag, Hi.

hama, intrans.

hssna, inlrans. hath, )K.

hathi, «t. hazyr, adj.

hazyri, / .

always. truth, God, one's right. every. loss, injury. unlawful; the opposite of halal,

q.v. letter; harf ba harf, word by

word. ever, always; but used only

with negative in Urdu: never. movement, action. messenger, postman. gobble up. closing of shops as form of

strike, strike in general. move aside, get out of the way;

causal: hsfana. wind. See ab o hava. in or into the care of. senses (plural of hyss, »».). large house, etc. astonished, bewildered; -i. digest, eat up. condition, state,story, narrative. drive (animal, etc.); causal:

hankana. used like French chez: mere

hag = at my house. be defeated; irans.: lose (game,

bazi); see Grammar, p. 57; causal: harana.

laugh; causal: lissana. hand, forearm; hathkafi, / .

handcuff. elephant. present (said of or to an in

ferior). attendance (in school, etc.),

breakfast.

U6 TEACH YOUjRSELF HINDUSTANI

hazma, m. hyckiaxjif.pl. hydayat, / .

hyfaz9t, / .

hylna, intrans.

Hyndu, m. hyqar&t, / .

hjTsn, m. hysab, nt. hyssa, m. hug hwkm, m.

hwzur ho jana, inlrans. hona, intrans. hoj, m. hojyar, adj.

jsb

iagsh,/. jahag

jakapia, tram.

j elal, m. jaldi, / .

digestion. hiccup(l3gna, koj. instruction, advice; hydayet • dena (ko),'hydayet k. (ki),

give rehgious instruction to ; hydayat k. (ko), give orders

, to ; see Grammar, pp. 81-2. • I'protection; hyfazat k. (ki), pro-I tect. sbakft-, Qoî.'ial:. h- laujo.. become tame, become used to \ (generally of an animal); \ causal: hylana. Hindu; / . Hyndni. contempt; liyqarat k. (ki),

j despise. deer; / . hynii. account (money, etc.). part, share. I am. command; hwkm dena (ko),

'to give order to. your honour, his, her honour. become. be,! become. senses. alert, intelligent; -i.

when iêl.); jsb se, since; jsb tak, imtil; jab ksbhi, when-evier; jabhi, that is why.

plac'e; ki i»gab, in'place of. whej*e {rel.); jahag se, whence;

jshar) tsk, so .far as; jahag . kaliiri, wherever. fasten with chains, etc.; causal:

jskptna, jskafvana. glory|(as inspiring awe or fear)-. quickness, haste; adv., quickly.


jslna, intrans.

•f jalsa, m. •jama,/.

Jamna,/ . i anab, /

sngal, m.

angli

ianna, trans.

jsnvari, «;./. janub, m. F t , / . pta./.

^^javab, ,«t. javan, m.

jagna, inirans.

jal, w(. jan, / .

jana, intrans. jagghia, / . sing. janyb (ki), fostpos. janna, irans. janvar, m. jydhar, adv. jylana, see jina. jyn, jynbori jys ji, m. jim, m.

^ K

bum, be consumed; causals: jalana, jslvana.

meeting, assembly. total o: several items; jama k.,

collect, add up; jama h., be collected, added up.

the river Jumna. a great person's presence; usu

ally voc. form of address: Sirl

uninhabited or sparsely inhabited place, waste, forest.

belonging to the jangal, uncouth, unpolished in manner.

(of woman), give birth to (does not take ne),

January. south. root of tree, etc. person's long matted hair. answer. young man; adj.: young (man

or woman). wake up, be awake; causal:

jagana,jagvana. net, web. vital principle, life; jan tojna,

try very hard. to go; past tense, gaya. drawers, underclothing, in the direction of. to know, be of opinion. animal. whither, where {ret.).

oblique plural of jo. oblique singular of jo. heart, inclination. name of letter of the alphabet.

248 TEACH YCMRSELF HINDUSTANI

jina, intrans.

jwda, aaj.

jwlai, m.f. jwJna, see mylna. jwma, m. jwmerat, / . f! jwtna, intrans. of jotna'. ]un, m. '' jug, adv. • | u t i , / . }eb,/. li jaysa, jironom. adj., adj. jo, pron., pronom. adj:\

jo, enclitic }Oi;a, m.

jotna, irans.

jawnsa, pronom. adj. jhage^na, ifUrans.

jhslna, Irans., see pahkha. jhsp ia , intrans. 'j

]hs[, adv. jjiapn, m. jhaiji,/. jharu,/ . ihytki, / .

jhil,/. . jhwkna, tntrans.

live, be alive; ji w^hna, rise fromdea'd; trans.: jylana.

victory. : separate; feminine either jwda

or iwdi. July-

Friday. Thursday,

June. as. shoe, pair of shoes. ^t, pocket. as, like. who, which (rel); what {rel.

adj.); jo koi, whoever; jo kwch, whatever.

seeing that, since. a pair, suit of clothes, pair of

shoes. yoke /plough, oxen); harness*

(horses); plough (land); see jwtna.

whichever. quarrel; causals: jhsgjana,

jhsg5i;vana.

fall (leaves, fiuit); fall out (hair).

at once, immediately. duster cloth. bush. broom for sweeping, reproach, finding fault; jhytki

dena, to tell off. lake, laiê pond. bend, bow; causals: jhwkana,

jhwkvana.

HINPUSTANI-ENGLISH GLOSSARY

jhwlssna

jhumna, intrans.

kab

kabutar, m. kacca

kdhaii kahig, adv.

kahlaiia, intrans-kehlvana, see ksbna. kahna, trans.

kai, pron. adj., Îso colloquially pron.

kal kam, adj., adv.

k am in a, adj. kamra, m. kamtarin .

kapas, / . kspxa, m.

249

generally either jhwias jana, intrans., be scorched; or jhwlas dena, (mils., scorch.

swing; jhumna jhamna, , intrans., swing from side to side (e.g. elephant's trunk).

when? kabhi,sometimes; kabhi nahii), never; kabhina k»bhi, some time or other,

pigeon. raw, uncooked, undercooked.

unripe, imperfectly made, vacillating, etc. (opposite of pakka).

where? somewhere; kehii) nahig, no

where; kahig na kahir), somewhere or other. In comparison, kahig means " much ", as: kahir) behtar, much better.

be called.

tell, say; causals: kahlana, kahlvana.

a good many (always plural}.

to-morrow, yesterday. little, too little, less (refers to

amount, not size); kam se kam, kam az kam, at any rate, at least.

mean, base. room. in signing letters = your ser

vant, yours obediently. cotton wool. cJoth, a gaimeni; kapxe, m.^C:

clothes in general.

250 TEACH

kama, trans.

karot, ksfot, m. kasna, trans.

kstama, trans.

ka, postpos., adj. kabak, / . kafi, adj. kafi,/. kayaz, m. kahe kala, adj.

kam, m. •kamyab kampna, intrans. kan, m. kagta, m. kapi, / . kar^, m. kaj, kaj" ky katna, trans.

kafna, i?'fl»s.

kyn, kynhog kynars, m. kyraya, m. kyrks];, m. kyrpa, / .

YOURSELF H INDUSTANI ii

do; much used in composition with nouns or adjectives: jsldi karna, hasten; maf kama, forgive; causals: kerana, kaYvana,

ten milhon. tighten, assay (of metal); Ifssa

kssaya, ready tightened; I causals : kasana, kssvana. I snip, cut out, gnaw (of rat, 1 mouse, etc.); causals: ka-I trana, katarvana. ;of. ji pigeon house, dove-cote, ]i sufficient. I' cotfee. •1 paper. 5 oblique of kya. ijblack; kala syah, very black; !i kala bhatt, exceedingly f black. i.work. I| successful; -i. I tremble, shiver. linear. Ithorn, fork (for table). |notebook. postcard. would that. spin; intrans.: katna, be spun;

causals: katana, katvana. :ut; intrans.: kafna, be cut; 'I causals: katana, katvana; l! kat 4a-ina, cut down. 'oblique plural of kawn-^ g e , border. rent, fare. cricket (the game). mercy, pity.


kys kysi kysan, m. kyjti,/. kytab, / . kytna, pron. adj. kia kicsi:,/. kijie, kijiega

kiinia, / . kwch, pron., pron. adj.

kwl, adj.

kwlhai;i, / . kwrsi,/.

^^kwtta, m. • kuag, kugar), m. kuca, m. kud, / . kudna, intrans. kaysa, pron. adj.

kay, pron. adj. [indecl.) ko, postpos. koi, pron., pron. adj.

koiia, m. kos, in.

kof, tn, kothi,/.

oblique singular of kawn. oblique singular of koi. farmer. boat. book. how much ? or how many ? •past tense of kama, mud. ceremonious imperative of

kama = do. chemistry. something, anything; kwch

nahig, nothing; kwch na kwch, something or other; kwch with plural -noun: a few.

the whole of, all; adv.: all in, all included.

axe. chair. dog; f&m.: kwtya. well of water. lane in town or village. a leap. leap; causal: kwdana. of what kind? koyse, adv.:

how? how many ? to, for, with respect to, etc. someone, anyone; koi nohig,

no one; koi na koi, someone .or other; koi sa, any you like; koi,<j(fii.,approximately.

corner. distance of about one-and-a-half

miles. effort. coat. cottage, etc.


kothp, / . kawn, pron. kawnsa, pron. adj. kawfi, / . kya, pron.

kyog kyogkar kyogky khara khata-

, khana, trans.

small room. who ? pron. adj.: what ? which? little sheU. what? with adjective "how" ,

a s : kya xub, how fine. why? how ? because. pure, sound, genuine. standing. eat; with nouns often means

suffer ; yam khana = be, grieved; Jarm khana = be ashamed; mar khana = be beaten; juti khana = be beaten with a shoe; cwyli khana = slander (with ki); causal: khylana, give food to be eaten; also to nurse children, b9ce khylana; khyl-vana, cause food to be given.

cough. bud, blossom; causal: khylana.

khylana, see khana, khelna, khylna. khyocna, khycna, khycvana, see khegcna. khyrki, / . window. khwlna, khwlana, khwlvana, see kholna. khelna play; causal: khylana. khena,,/raws. row a boat; past, only/em;«s*(e

khei; causal: khyvana. khegcna, trans. puU, also khaygcna, khigcna

— less common; intratis.: khygcna, be pulled; causals : khicvana, khycvana. See panbha.

khet,Mi. field. khodna, iraws. . dig; causal: khwdvana.

khagsi, f. khylna, intrans.


kholna, trans. 253

khawlna. inirans,

xabar, / ,

xabsrdar xaccar, / . xafa, adj. xarab xsrc, m.

xarcna, trans. xarjdna, trans. X9t, m. xstm k., trans. xatra, wi. xatt, w.

X3h, CCMJ.

xahyj, / . xab, / .

xan

xansamai), in. xas3 xatyr (ki},î>s(;fos. xun, JM. xydmat, / . xydmstgar, m.

xwd, ^ron.

Xwda, m. xwrak, / .

open; inirans.: khwlna; causals: khwlana, khwl-vana.

boil, come to boil; causal : khawlana.

news; xabsr k., trans., inform.

cautious, careful; -i. mule. angry; feminine the same, bad, evil; -i. expenditure; xsrc k., trans.,

spend. spend. buy; causal: xsrydvana, epistle, letter. finish; inirans.: xatm h. danger. geometrical line, line of latitude

or longitude. whether; xab . . . xah, whether

. . . or. desire, wish. mother's sister; xalu, husband

of xala. Muhammadan title, often ap

plied to Pathans. cook, steward. pretty, very fair, for the sake of. blood, murder. service. servant, generally table servant;

-i. self, selves; used with subject,

not with object. God. food, dose of medicine.


xwj happy, pleased; -i. xwfbu,/. sweet smell, aroma.

Isdna, iiitrans.

bfz, m. (pronounced his) bgna, intrans.

lakir, / . bkr i , / . • Islcana, inlrans.

lamba, adj. lambardar, m-Isnc, m. Landan,)«. Lanka, / . langiâ , intrans. Urka, m.

la^na, intrans.

Lahawr, m. -layq

lal, aiij. laltayn, / . lana, trans. laparva, adj.

la thi , / lazym, ad^.

lyaqat, / .

be loaded; trans.: ladna, load; causals: ladana, Isdvana.

word. be attached, stick; hence beghi;

many other meanings, see Grammar, p. 70; causals: bgana, lagvana. See Grammar, p. 110, and Sentences, Lesson 16.

line. wood, piece of wood. long for; trans.: excite desire

in. long: -i-head man of village; -i. lunch = lyppsn. London. Ceylon. walk lame; bngja, lame. boy. girl-fight ; of .mosquito, bite; carnal :

Ispjia. Lahore. worthy, able, capable; ke layq,

postpos.." fit for, suitable to. red. lantern. bring (does not take ne). not caring, free from care, in

different; -i. big stick. used of duty, i.e. right, proper.

See Grammar, p. 95, and Sentences, Lessons 12-14.

ability, worthiness.


lykhna, irans.

255

write; causals: lykhana, lykh-vana.

cling to, se; causals: lyptana, lypefvana.

for the sake of, on account of, for; = ke vaste.

roll round and round; causals : Iwthkana, lwi;liskvana.

rob; intrans.: IwJTia, be robbed; causals: Iwtana, distribute alms (with psyse, etc.); Iwtvana, cause to be robbed.

leana = lana (does not take ne).

\yp9fna., tntrans.

lie [ke), fostpos.

Iwfhskna, intrans.

lutna, trans.

lejana, trans. lekyn, conj. lena, trans.

lejna, intraws.

log, m.pl. lomp,/. lawfna, intrans.

mscchli, / . macna, intrans.

madad, / . • madgdgar, »t,/, magar, conj. msyryb, m. mahakna, intrans. mehalls, m.

take away (does not take ne). but. take; also in composition, see

Grammar, p. 64; cattsal : lyvana, see Grammar, p. 66.

lie down; causals: lyfana, lytvana.

people. fox; no masculine. return; trans.: lawâna, give

something back, cause to go back.

fish. used with noun meaning noise

or disturbance; Jor maca = there was a noise, there arose a noise; causals : mocana, malce a noise, etc., ra»cvana.

help. helper; 4 . but. west. be perfumed, give forth scent. section of town.


mahina^ m. mshal, m. mahgga, adj. may, tn.f. msjal,/. makai, / . mskan, m, makkhan, m. malamat, / .

malka, / . . mallah, m. malna, trans. man, »M. mana k. mandyr, JM-mangal, m. manzur, adj.

maraz, marz, m. msrd, m.

mama

martaba, / .

marz,- see maraz. marzi, / . masalah, m.

masjyd,/. majin, / . ma/ryq, m. ' matba, m. mavayji, / . mazbah, m. mazdur, m.

month. palace. dear in price, expensive. May, power. Indian corn, maize. house, building. butter. reproach, rebuke; see Gram

mar, p. 81. queen. sailor. rub. maund (about 78 pounds). forbid. Hindu temple. Tuesday. aêed to, accepted; manzur

k., accept; agree to ; -i. disease. man (not woman; vtr, not

homo). die; causal: marna, beat,

kill. a time, as : pahli martaba, first

time; masculine: rank, dignity,

wish, desire. ingredients of mortar, pudding,

etc. / mosque; ' machine. _ ^ east. printing press. cattle. altar, place of sacrifice. workman, labourer (generally

unskilled); -i.

HINDUSTANI-ENGLISH GLOSSARY 257 ma, Arabic postpos. ma, mar),/. mads, / . maf, see under mwaf. mafl, see under mwafi. mafyq {ke),postpos.

mal, m. mala, / . ^maldar, adj. malum, adj.

malyk, m.f. maly/,/. •

mali, m. mamls, m.

mands mane, m.pl. maggna, trans.

manna, traits.

manynd (ki), postpos. mar,/ . mare i^&), postpos.

mama

mazi, m.f. mylansax, adj.

along with. mother.-female; plural: madaeg.

according to, similar to (occasionally pronounced mwafyq}.

property. necklace, garland. rich, possessing property; -i. known; malum hojana, be

come known; malum hona, appear, seem, be known.

owner, master, mistress. rubbing; malyj k., rub; see

Grammar, p. 80. gardener; feminine: malan. afiair, etc. (occasionally pro

nounced mwamla). weary. meaning, signification. ask for; causal: mangana,

send for (thmg). obey, pay attention to, acknow

ledge as great; causal: mgnana; xwji manana = make merry. ,

like. a heating; see khana. through, on account of (gener

ally of mental states, a s : 43r ke mare = through fear).

causal: beat, kill; jhut mama, tell lies; jutimama, beat with sUpper; mar (âlna, kill; in-irans.: rnema, die.

f iast tense. riendly, sociable; -i.

ass TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

mylna, iniram.

mynat. m. mynnat, / .

myskin mysl {ki), posipos. mysri, / . mys-sahab, mys-

sahyba, / .

mystri, m. mytna, intrans.

mytti,/-mim, m. minar, m. mwaf k., trans.

mwafi, / .

mwafyq, see mafyq. mwhafyzat, / . mwhas5T3, m. mwih mwjra, m. mwlaqat, / . mwlazym, m. ' mwlk, m. mwmkyn, adj. mwnasyb, adj.

accrue, meet, be like; see Grammar, p. 109; trans. : mylana = compare, intro-

, duce, mix; see Grammar, p. 110, and Sentences, Lesson 22. mylna jwlna, generally in past participles: myla jwla, all mixed together. "

a minute. entreaty; ki mj'nnst k., en--

treai. poor; submissive; -i. like. sugar. unmarried lady (usually Euro

pean) ; plural, generally my-seg (omitting sahab, etc.).

skilled workman. be blotted out; causals : my

lana, mj'tvana. earth, dust, mud, letter of the alphabet. minaret. forgive (occasionally pronounced

maaf or maf). forgiveness (occasionally pro

nounced maafi or mafi).

protection. siege. obhque of msyg, I. payment on account, meeting with someone. servant. a country. possible. suitable, proper; see Grammar,

p. 95, and Sentences, Lessons 12-14.


mwhia, / . mwgh, m.

•• mwqabyla, m. mwrabba, m. mwsalla, m. mwsafyr, m.f. mwjkyl, / . mwtasddi, m. mwtaallyq ipwtabyq (kej, postpos. mwtalea, m. mwxalyfst, / . mwamyla, see mamb. mutna, intrans. mehnst, / . mehngti, adj. mehrban, adj.

, mehtar, m.

."memsaheb, memsahyba

megf^ha, m. meg, fostpos. mev9, tA.

. mez, / . msydan, m. mayl, / . mayla, adj. mayna, / . mayi), pronoun mod, «!. mohr,/. mol, m. moti, m. mo[3r, m.f. mawjud, adj.

amadavat (Utile bird). face, mouth. comparison, opposition. a square, a prayer-mat, traveller; -i. difficulty; adj.: difficult. transitive or causal of verb. connected with, related to. according to, conformable to.

. reading, study. opposition, hostility.

make water {takes ne). labour, toil (not simply work). hard-working. kind; -i. scavenger; also as Mohamma-

dan title of certain great persons.

married lady (usually European) ; plural generally memeg (omitting sahsb, etc.).

ram. in, into, etc. fruit. table. a plain. dirt. dirty. mynah (kind of starling). I. shoemaker. seal. price; mol lena, trans., buy. pearl. motorcar present (said of anyone, high or

low); see hazyr.

260 TEACH

mswlvi, m.

mgwqa, wt.

niawza, m. mswzm), adj.

nadi, / . nafa, m. nahana, intrans.

nahig nsmsk, m. namaz, / .

nsnga, adj. nsnnha nsq/a, m. narsog (rare word)

nssihat, / .

naja, »K. nstija, «j. nsvasa,»».

nsya, nif;'. nazar, / , nszdik (ke), postpos. nazm, / . nacna, intrans,

nala, m. namswzug

nana, m,

YOURSELF HINDUSTANI

learned Mohammadan, especially one learned in religious matters. • •-

opportunity, place where something happens.

small town, large village. suitable, fitting.

river, stream. profit. bathe.; causals: nahlana, nsKl-

vana. no, not; n»hiri to = otherwise.' salt. prayer, especially recited prayer-;

nsmaz pa^hna = recite prayer.

naked, bare. \ small (child), map. four days ago, four days from

now. ^ advice; see Grammar, p. 81;

nasihat ki = gave him advice. intoxication, intoxicant. result. daughter's son; nsvasi, /. ,

daughter's daughter. new, sight; nazsr ana, be visible. near; 4. poem. dance; causals : nscana, nac-

vana. stream. unsuitable, improper; see maw-

zun. mother's father; nani, mother's

mother.

HINDUSTANI -ENGLISH GLOSSARY 261

nao, / . naraz naj"pati, naspati, / . naxwn, m. nycotna, tram.

nygalna, iram. nygahban, m.f. nygrani, / . nyhayat, adv. nykah, m.

nykalna,. tntrans.

nymbu, see nibu. nysbat (ki), postpos. nysf nyjan, m. nyvai;, m.

nibu, m. nice (ke), postpos. niz, adv. nwqsan, m. nek, adj. neola, m. nswksr, m.

boat. displeased; -i. pear. nail on finger or toe. squeeze out (lemon, etc.);

causal: nycwjvana. swallow; causal: nygalvana. protector; -i. taking care of, protection. very, extremely. marriage; nykab psi;hna = per

form the marriage ceremony. go out, come out, turn out;

causals : nykalna = eject, bring out; nykglvana : cause to be ejected.

concerning, than. half. sign, mark, trace. broad tape of which beds are

woven. lemon. under; adv.: below. also. loss, injury. good (of persons)'; -i. mongoose. servant; femimne : nawkami,

nswksrani.

palna, intrans.

Panjab, m. Pgnjabi, / .

psnkha, m.

par, conj.

be reared, be brought, be kept as pet; causal: palna.

the Panjab. the Panjabi language; adj.:

belonging to the Panjab. psnkha khegcna, pull punkha;

pankha jhalna, to use a fan. but.


par, m. pgrynda, m. pare, adv. pare/an parla, adj. parsaJ, adv., etc. persoi)

partal, / . parvaryj. / .

parva, / .

pafha lykha. psijhna, irans.

pasand k., trails.

pata, m. patta, m. patthar, m. patlun, / ,

pana,frfl«s.

pani, m. pao, m'. paoT|, m. par, adv.

pas, flrfti. p y ^ . / -

pychla, adv. pyghalna, inirans.

wing, feather. bird. to a distance, to the far side, anxious, distressed; -i. the further (one). last year. day after to-morrow, day before

yesterday. audit; partal k., to audit. -looking after, supporting; ki

parvaryf k., to support, etc. caring about something; ki

parva k., to care about or for. literate; feminine: paj;hilykhi. read, recite, study; causals :

p3[hana, pai;hvana. choose, like; pasand h., be

approved. trace, address. leaf. stone. trousers, especially of European

style; used in singular. (i) obtain, find; (ii) [cornpounded

with inflected gerund] manage to (in this case does not take ne); see Grammar, pp. 70-1, and Sentences, Lesson 17.

water. a quarter. foot. on or to the far side; ke par,

fostpos., on or to the far side of.

near; ke pas, posipos., near. thirst; pyas lagna (ko), become

thirsty. last, former. melt; causal: pyghlaha.


pylana, see pina. pynjra, m. pynsai, / . pytna, intrans.

piche, adv.

pina, trans.

pwkarna, trans. pwl, m. pwlis, / . pwrva, / . pw[ia, / .

puchna, trans.

puja,/.

purab, m. pe/gi, /• pet, m. peti,/. pobs. see pwlis. pogchna, trans.

pawda, m. pawn, pswna, pawne

phsl, m. phal, m. phagsna, inimm.

phatna, intrans.

pha^na, trans. phsylna, intrans.

cage. pencil. be beaten; causals: pi^na,

pytvana. behind; afterwards (rare); ke

piche, postpos., behind, afta". dnnk; eausals: pylana, pyl-

vana. call aloud to. bridge. the police. the east wind. paper in which medicinal pow

der is wrapped, or the powder itself.

ask (a question); causal: pwch-vana.

ivorship (especiaUy Hindu); ki puja k., to worship (something).

the east. advance of money. stomach. (i) wooden box; (ii) belt.

wipe; causals: pogchana, pog-chvana.

plant. . three-quarters; see Grammar

under Numerals. fruit. blade of knife, ploughshare, etc. be entangled, be ensnared;

causal: phasana. split, tear; carnal: phatna,

q.v. spht, tear; see phaliia. spread; causal: phaylana.


phatsk, m. phyma, intrans.

physslna, inlrans. phyfkar, / . phul, m. phegkna, trans. phema, tram.

qabilg, m. qabl {ke),ôslpos. qgbtilk., trans. qadsm, m. qaism, m. qsmiz, / . qand, / . qsrar pana, intrans. qgsbs, m. qybl3, m.

qyblagah, m. qysm,/. qysmat, / ; qimst, / . qwdrat, / . qwfi, m. qwli, m. qwsur,«(, qayd,/.

qsydi, m. qgwm, / ,

raddi rafta, adv.

gate. turn, walk about; causals:

pherna, q.v., phyrana, phyr-vana,

slip, slide; causal: physlana. abuse, reproof. flower. throw. turn; see phyma.

tribe. before (of time). accept; qsbul h., be accepted." footstep, pace. pen. shirt. sugar. be decided. small town. the place in Mecca (Makka)

to which Muslims turn in prayer.

ceremonious word for " father ". kind or sort (of thing). fate. price. glory, power (generally of God). lock (for key). coolie. fault. imprisonment; qayd k., im

prison. prisoner. race of people; people belonging

to one race or religion.

worthless. gone; rafta rafts, by aiid by,

gradually..


rgfu, m. ragapia-. irans. tahm, m. rahna, iniram.

rahnwma, m.f. rekhna, trans.

rapsf, / . raqam, / . rsssa, m. rasta, rasts, m. ravana hona, intrans. rais, >M. raiszada, m.

raiat, / . raja, m. rani,/. rat,/. razi, aif/.

ryayat, / . ryjta, m. ryjtedar, m.f. ryjvat, / . rich, m. rwkn, m. rwxsat,/.

darning; rafu k., to darn. rub hard; causal.; ragâna. pity, mercy. remain, dwell; rsh jana, be left

behind. leader, guide; -i. place, keep; rakh dena, put

down on table, etc.; rakh lena, keep for oneself; causal: rskhvana.

report. amount of money. rope. road. set out; ravana k., despatch. rich man, man of rank. [Hi.: son of rais] well-to-do

person; feminine : raiszadi. tenant, subject; jilural: ryaya. rajah. queen. night'; ratko,bynight, at night. pleased, content, satisfied; see

naraz. favour. relationship, connection. relation, relative. bribe. bear; feminine : richni. pUIar (chiefly metaphorical). leave of absence, permission to

go away. • Twiana, rwlvana: seevon^. rwpaya, rwpia, m.

rwmal, m. . rwpia, see rwpaya. rubaru (ke), posipos.

rupee; plural: rwpae, rwpaog; rwpia or rwpia paysa also means money in general.

handkerchief.

face to face with.


rel,/. reggna, intrans. rona, intrans.

rofi, / roz, m.

sab, adj., pron. ssbab, iti. sabsq, w. ssbha, / . sabr, m. ssbz, adj. ssbzi, / . sscca, ad /.

safed, adj. ssfedi, / . sahsr,/. • Sahara, m. saheli, / . / sshi, arfn.

sshn,)». S3)na, iwtrmw.

sakna, intrans.

saxt, dii/.

ssmaih, / . samajhna, (fuws. and

intrans.

samandar, m.

railway train or carriage. creep, crawl. weep, mourn for; causah :

rwlana, rwlvana. bread. day; see dyn.

all. cause, reason. Jesson. assembly, company. patience. green. vegetables. true, genuine {opposite of

jhufha); see asli. white. whitewash. morning. help, support. girrs female friend.

' granted, I admit, that's all very well; see Grammar, p, 122, and Sentences, Lesson 29,

courtyard. be adorned; causals : sajana,

saivana; saja ssjaya = be all ready adorned.

be able; see Grammar, p. 68, and Sentences, Lesson 15.

severe, hard (both of material things and of character); adverb : very (only of unpleasant thmgs); -i,

understanding. understand; causals: sam-

jhana, explain, and hence to comfort, calm; samajhvana.

sea.


ssmbhalna, inirans.

samet (ke), -postpos. S8nduq, m. saqqa, in. sara, sarae, / . sard, adj. sarkar, / .

sai;ak, / , saijna, inirans.

sasta, adj. sava

saval, m. savar, adj.

savari, / .

ssvere, adv. saza, / . sa

sabyt, adj.

sad a, adj.

sadhu, m.

saf, adj.

pull oneself together, be supported; causal: sambhalna, support, take care of, look after,

along with. box, water-carrier. inn, travellers' resthouse. cold. the government of a state or

country; also : Your honour (masculine If addressed to a man,-feminine if to a woman).

well-made road. become rotten, rot; causal:

sai;ana. cheap, quarter more than; see

numerals, question. nding (on horse, bicycle, in

carriage, train), (i) the act of riding; (ii) person

travelling in vehicle, early. punishment. used as affix or enclitic: (i) like;

(ii) as it were; (iii) often used without meaning; see Grammar, pp. 34^6, and Sentences, Lesson 29.

proved (to be true); sabyt k., prove; sabyt h., be proved.

simple (generally of human . beings).

Hindu holy man who has renounced the world.

clean; saf swthra = clean and tidy.

2es safa, m. sahsb, m.


sahabzads, m.

sahyba

sais, m. sal, m. salan, m. saman, m. samne (ke), postpos., adv.

samp, m. Sara, adj. saflie sath (ke), postpos. sathi,_»i. say a, m, syah, adj. 5'ahi, / . Syalkot, «»• syfaryj, / . E^ lna, sylana, sylvana, syla, sylaya: see sina.

turban. man in good position, a Euro-

-pean; as suffix may refer to a lady, see mem and mys; see also sahyba; baje sahsb = head of department or large district; the boss.

\lit.: son of sahab] ceremonious word for son; feminine : sahabzadi = daughter.

Aiahic femimne'ot sahyb, used as suffix; both sahyba and

. sahyb are nearly always sahab (q.v.) in Urdu; see mem, mys.

groom. year, curry, curried dish, also gravy. apparatus, necessaries. in front (of); amne samne, in

front, facing each other. snake. all, the whole of. half more than; see numerals. along with. companion. shadow, shade. black; see kala. blackness; ink of any colour, Sialkot.-recommendation, intercession.

sypahi, m. sypwrd (ke), postpos. syr, m. syra, m.

syrf, adv. syva (ke), syvae (ke),

postpos.

policeman, Indian soldier. in the care of, head. head or end of piece of wood,

. bar, bed, street, etc. only. apart from, except.


sikhna, Irans.

sina, trans.

sina, m. swal, see ssval. swbah, / . swlana, swlvana, see sona. swigana, irans. swluk, w;.

swnna, Irans.

swst swthra, adj. sukhna, intrans. surat, / . se, postpos. seb, m. sena, trans.

ser, adj.

sahih, adj. saykp, m. sayr,/.

so, adv. socna, trans. sona, m. sona, inlrans.

skul, >M.

learn (to do something); causal : sykhana, teach, put someone up to something,

sew; inirans.: syhia, be sewn; causals : sylana, sylvana; syla sylaya = ready sewn.

breast, chest.

morning.

kindle, light; intrans.: swlagna. treatment (good or bad), kind

treatment. hear, listen to; oausals: swnana

= relate; swnvana; swni swnai bat = hearsay.

lazy; -i. clean; see saf. become dry; causal: swkhana. appearance, form. than, with, from. apple. hatch {eggs}; past: sea, see;

feminine: sei, seig; causal: syvana.

satisfied, having had enough; -i.

correct, hundred; see numerals. a walk, diive, ride, any journey

however short or long which is for pleasure and not business.

so, therefore, it follows. think; no causal. gold. sleep; causals: swlana, swl

vana. school.


Jafajyfa,/ .

Jahr, m. /ahzads, m.

/ak, J9kk, m. fakar,»». r^ki,/. faxs, »i. /arab, / . J"3rar3t, / .

Jsrbst, Mt. jarir, drf?'.

larm,/ . Jgrmana, intrans. Jart,/ .

J"agyrd, wi. /ayr, m. Jam./. Jama, / . Jayad, adv. Jyfa, /., see Jafa. Jykam, «i. fykar, m. lykari, m. /ykayat, / . Jymal, m. fija, m. |wyl, m. jwru, )K. /er, m. Jer, m. fols, m,

cure (used of God, not oi the doctor),

city, town. prince; feminine: Jahzadi,

princess; occasionally fah-zada, Jahzadi, are found.

doubt. siâr. form, appearance, shape. person. wine, spirits. wickedness, naughtiness; see

farir. sweet, cool drink. {of boy, girl, animal) mis

chievous, naughty; (of grown-up person) wicked; see Jararat.

shame, shyness. be ashamed, feel shy. bet; condition (in conditional

sentence). pupil. poet. evening. magpie, robin. perhaps.

belly. prey, hunting; /ykar k., hunt. hunter. complaint. north, glass. occupation. beginning; Jwru k., begin. tiger; feminine: Jerni. verse. flame.


/swhsr, m. husband. Jswq, m. desire, liking for something.

tab, adv. then, hence; used of time when correlation of jab.

tshqir,/. contempt, despising, insult; see Grammar, p. 81.

tahsil, / . acquiring; headquarters of small district, or the district itself.

( i )up to ; {ii) adverb : even. trouble; teklifk., take trouble;

toklif dena, give trouble. desire, require. summon. search; see Grammar, p. 81. sword. desire, hope. all, the whole of. a " show ", performance, enter

tainment. place where tgmaja takes place, tent. salary, pay. side, direction; ki taraf, posl-

pos.: towards. manner; as, scchitarah r= well. progress, increase. long for {does not take ne);

carnal: tsrsana. bringing up, rearing, educating, translation; ka tsrjwmg k,,

translate. pity, compassion, mercy; tars

khana (par) = have pity on. arrangement; see Grammar, p.

82. be agitated, palpitate; causal:

tafpana.

tak, postpos. tsklif,/.

talab, / . tslsb k., trans. tala;,/ . talvar, / . tamanna, / . tamam, adj. tama/a, m.

tamajagah, m. tambu, M. tanxah, / . tarsf, / .

tar ah, / . taraqqi, / . tarasna, trans.

tarbiat, / . tarjwma, m.

tars, m.

tartib,/ .

t9i;»pna, inirans.


tasvir, / . tavsjjwh, / . tsvsqqw, / . tevazw, m. tssjjwb, m. ta, Persian postpos. tadib, / .

taham taky takid, / .

tala, tn. talab.m. talim, / . tamir, / .

taqet, / . tara, m. tarif,/.

taiTia, trans. • taviz, m. taza, adj. tazim, / . tygna, adj. tyhai, / . tynka, m. tisra, twjh, pron. twm twmhara twfana, twtvana; see tufan, m. tel, m. • tera tez, adj.

tsyrna, hiirans.

picture. attention to something. hope, expectation. courtesy. astonishment, up to. rebuke, punishment; see Gram

mar, p. 81. nevertheless. in order that. insistence, urging; see Gram

mar, p. 81. lock. tank, pond. teaching; see Grammar, p. 80. the act of building; tamir k., to

build; see Grammar, p. 80. power. star. praise, definition; see Grammar,

p. 80. see, take in; no causal. amulet. fresh. honour, respect, reverence. three times as much. a third part of anything. a httle bit of straw or grass. third; see numerals. oblique of tu. you. your.

to)Tia. storm. ' oU. thine swift, sharp (of knife, etc.),

pungent in taste. swim; causal: t»yrana.


to, taw

tofiia, trans.

taw tawba, / . tawbhi thakna, intrans. thamna, intrans.

tharthsrana, intrans. thukna, intrans.

thofa

tahalna, intrans. tang./-typsn, m. tu|;na, intrans. topi./

thaharna, ^hsymd., intrans.

(hanâ, adj. thik, adj.

theka, m. (hekedar, m. {hayma, see thaharna. [hokar, / .

vayayra, adv. vahag vaqt, m. varna, adv. varzyj,/.

participle of reasoning: then, in that case.

break; inirans.: t^tiia; causals: twfana, twi;vana; see Jan.

sometimes used for to, q.v. repentance; tawba k., repent. nevertheless. get tired; causal: thakana. stop (of wind, rain, etc.);

causal: thamna. tremble, shiver. spit ( tês ne with past parti

ciple tenses); trans.: despise. little in amount or time, etc.

walk about; causal: tîilana. leg. lunch (from English tiffin), break; see tofna. cap, skull cap; also hat either

small or big. stop, pause, be adjudged to be;

causals: ^hahrana, thayrana. cold. (of things) correct, accurate;

thik thai, in right order, correctly arranged.

contract. contractor; -i.

kick; {hoksT khana = to stumble; til okgr mama = to kick.

and so forth, et cetera. there; emphatic; vahir). time; ws vaqt = at that time. otherwise = nahirj to. physical exercise, drill.


vasile (ke), postpos. vazan, m. V9za, / .

vszir, m.

vada, m. vajyb, adj.

valyd, m. vaqe hona, intrans. vaqia, m. vaste (ke) vaysa, pron. voh, pTon., pron. adj.

yahag, «rfv, 5mg, adv.

yeh, pron., pron. adj.

zsbardast, «iiy.

zaban, / . zabani (ki), poslpos-Z9CCS,/. zahr, m. zahrila, adj. zakat, / . zaxm, m. zsxmi, adj. zamin, / .

zamindar, m. zanjir, / . zara, adv.

by means of, through. weight. manner, state, condition,

stylishness. minister of state; J&mimne. :

V8zimi (wife of vazir), promise; vada k., to promise. suitable, right, proper; see

Grammar, p. 95, and Sentences, Lessons 12-14.

father; valds,/., mother. happen, occur. occurrence. for, for the sake of. of such a kind. he, she, it, tliat.

here; emphatic : yahig thus; yughi, just like this, for

no reason at all. this, he, she, it.

firm, strong, autocratic, t3'ran-nical; -i.

tongue (in mouth), language. at the mouth of, by the mouth of. woman with a newly-born baby, poison. poisonous. relôus aims'. wound. wounded. earth, land (not country},

ground. landowner; -i. chain. just (as in "just th ink") ; zara,

zsra sa, adj., insignificant, trifling.


zarie (ke), postpos. zarxez, ad). zarur, adv,

zsmrst, / . zaniri, adj. ZBl.f. zalym, adj. zyada, adj., adv. zydd.f. zyddi, adj. zyla, m. zymmedar, adj. zymma, m.

zjmds, adj. zwkam, m. zwlm, m. zevar, m.

by means of. fertile; -i. . certainly, necessarily; see Gram

mar, p. 95, and Sentences, Lessons 12-14.

necessity. necessary. letter of the alphabet. tyrannical, cruel. more. obstinacy. obstinate. administrative district. responsible; -i. chaise, responsibility; ke

zjonme meg = in charge of. alive. a cold. tyranny, oppression. jewel, ornament.

ENGLISH-HINDUSTANI GLOSSARY

Further information about some words given here may be found in the Hindustani-English Glossary. I t should be consulted when there is any uncertainty.

a, an

ability able about, see concerning, abuse, M. accept accompany according to account of, on account (financial) accrue acknowledge acre across action add address, n. adorn

advance, intrans. advance, n. (money) advantage, profit advertisement advice affair afraid, see fear. after

omit or use ek = one, or koi = some, a certain.

lyaqat, / . layq.

approximately. gali,/.,.phytkar,/. qgbul k. sath calna, sath holena. bamujyb, mwafyq, mwtabyq. bays, badawlat, mare. hysab, m. mylna; see obtain. yqrar k. bygha, ni. par. hark at, / . jama k.

' psta, m. sajna, sajana; all ready adorned

= saja sajayu. • bafhna, or use ' age'. pe/gi,/.

- nafa, m. y/tyhar, m. • salah, / . mwamyla, m.

piche, bad. •270

ENGLrSH-HlNDUSTANI GLOSSARY 277

again against agitated, be agree, to air alas I alert i alive all allow alms also altar of sacrifice although altogether always am amadavat amazed, see bewildered. among amulet ancestors and angel anger angry animal

anna announce announcement annoy answer

ant any appearance approved

phyr, debars. bsrxylaf. tsijapna; agitate, tstpana. manna, msnzur k. hava,/ . * hae hae! hoJ"yar; alertness, hojyari. zynd^, jita. sab, sara, kwl, tamam, pura. dena, yjazst dena. zskat, / . bhi, niz, 9wr. mazbah, m. 3garcy,.go, goky. bylkwl. hsme/s. hug. mwnia, / .

meg, bic, apas mer|. taviz, m. • bapdada, m.pl.; bwzwrg, swr; see also. fyryjte, m. ywsss, m.; see displeasure. ywsse, xsfa;- see displeased. janvar, m.; wild animal =

dsryndg. ana, m. yttyla or yj"tyhar dena. yttyla, /., y/tyhar. chepia; sse trouble, irritate. javab, m.; to answer = jsvab

dena. cyuriti./-koi, kwch; jo koi. surat, / . pasand, manzur; approve,

pasand k., manzur k.


approximately

April argue argument arm

airangement

arrive as ascend ashamed, be

taqribsn; koi {indecl.) with numeral or quantity.

aprayl. m, bshas b. bahas, / . bazu, m.; in one's arms or

lap = god meg. bgndobast, m.- (w.k.); taTtib, / .

(with dena). pawhgcna. jDysa, jug; as if, goya. carhna. Jarmana, Jarm ksrna, nadym

bona. puchna; ask for = maggna. gsdha, m.; feminine : gadhi. kasna (gold, etc.). sabha, / .

ask (question) ass assay assembly astonished, see bewildered; attach lagana; j»<ra«s.: lagiia. attend, see attention. attendance haz jri , / . attention tavajjwh, /., dhyan, m.; kan

Isgakar swnna. audit partal,/. (withk.). . August 9g3St, m. • aunt xals, i.e. mother's sister;

phwppi, i.e. father's sister.-awake, adj. jagta hua; see wake. . axe kwlhafi, / .

bad ball (to play with) base, adj. bathe, intrans. be bear (animal) bear (child)

bwra, xarab; of coin, khofa. gegd, / . kamina. . nahana; trans.: nahlvana. hona. bhalu, rich. jsnna; see lift, carry-

ENGLISH-HINDUSTANI GLOSSARY 279

beat

because

become, be bed bedding before beg begin beginning behind below besides besiege bet, ^ . better, see good. between bewildered beyond big bind bird black blaclaiess blind, adj. blood blot out blow,)(. boat bodice body boil, V. bolt, n. book bookcase boot border both

marna, pi)Tia; be beaten = mar khana, pyJTia.

kyogky, ys lie ky; because of— see account:

bona, ho jana. pslang, m. bystra, m. pahyle, q8bl. see petition. Jwru k., lagna. Jwru. m., ybtyda, / . piche. nice. alava, syva, bgysyr. mwhasyra k. (ka). Jsrt,/.

dgrmyan, bic, bic meg. hayran, pare/an. par, pare, bsâ-bandhna (bandhna, etc.). cyfia, parynda. kala, syah. syahi {= ink). dndha. xun, Ishu. mytana (mytna, etc.). cot,/. kyjti, /. , nao, / . angia,/. badan,m. khawlna, etc. catxani. kytab, / . almari, / . juti , / . , but, m. kynara, m. ' Innoi).


bottle bow, V. box boy Brahman brave bravery-bread break breakfast breast bribe, «. brick .bridge bring broad broom brother buffalo building (the act of)

buU bullet • burn bush but butter buy buyer by

cage calamity call, irans.

camel cane cap . capacity

botal, / . jhwkna, etc. bakas, m., sanduq, m. lafka. Mi. brahman, m. dyler, bshadwr. dyleri, /. , bahadwri. i-oti,/. tofna, tut"^. etc. hazyri,/., najta. chad, / . ryJvst, / . in t , / . pwl, m. laria, leana. cavvfa. jhatu, / . • bhai. bhaygs,/. tamir, / . ; a building : ymarat ;

see house; makan, »«. •bayl, m. goli, /-jalna, jalana. etc.

. j hap , / . , . . lekyn, magar, par, balky. :makkhan, pt., ghi, m.

• mol lena, xaridna gahak. se; a book by someone = as,

. ' pynjfa, m. * bala,/. bwlana, pwkarna; be called or

named = kahlana. • . un(;, wj.; femimne •' untni. bed; to cane = bed mama. topi./-ystecmd, / .


car, see motor. care (taking care)

careless carelessness caretaker carpenter carriage carry cat cattle cause certain, a certain certainly

Ceylon chain, n. chair change, v. " chapatty "

^ charge, in charge of, cheap chemistry child

childhood choose civility claim clean, adj, clerk (Indian)-climb chng

, clock cloth cloud coat cobbler

ehtyat, / . ; xabardari; in the care of = hevale, sypwrd, z.ymme; take care, ixabardar.

laparva. laparvai,/. or laparvahi,/. cawkidar, m. bathsi, m. gari,/. , baggi,/. wthake lejana, c^hona. bylla, m.; feminine: bylli. m9vayj"i, / . bays, m., sabab, ni., Vsjsh,/. fwlana. befsk, Z8rur, sibstta; in nega

tive clause, hargyz. Lsnka, / . zsnjir,/.; to chain, jakatna. kwrsi, / . , cawki, / . badslna. capati, / .

see- care. sasta. kimia, / . bacca, baba; children, bscce,

balbacce. bacpan, m. pssand k, adabqaida, m. dava, m. , saf; to clean, saf swthra k. babu. cafhna, . lypa^na. ghsp//- ; see o'clock. ksp(;a, m.; clothes = kapT;e. badal, m., ghata,/ .

, kot, nv. irtQci, HI.


cold, adj.

collect come

comfort, w.

command

companion

comparison complaint complete composition (literary) compound (enclosed

ground) concerning condition confess confused, be

confusion connected, see concerning conquer contempt contract contractor contrary cook, n.

cooly coquetry corn

comer correct

thsniâ; noun: thsni^,/.,sardi, / . ; a cold, zwkam, m.

] 8ma k. ana, pawhgcna; come out,

nykalna; come down, wtama. dylas9, m.; to comfort, dylass

dena. hwkm, m., yrfad, m.; to cora-• mand, liwkm dena, yrjad k.

sathi, t».; girl's female companion, s^heii.f.

mwqabyl», m., nysbst, / . / lykayst,/ . tamam, pura. yn/a./-

yhata, m. babat, mwtssllyq, nysbat. hal; (stipulation), Jart. yqrar k. ghabrana, ghabra jana; con

fuse, ghabra dena ghsbrabat-

jitna, harana. hyqarat, / . ; tahqir. ^heka, m., {hekedari,/. (hekedar, m. baraks; on the contrary, balky xansamag, m.; verb: pakana;

intrans.: -pakna; cooked, pakka; ready.cooked, paka pakaya.

qwli, m. ada, / . gehug, m.; Indian corn, makai,-

•kona, m. sahih, thik, dwrwst^


correction cost, seejirice, rate. costly cotton, growing cough country, a course, of, see certainly. courtesy courtyard cover, V. cow cowry crawl, creep cricket, the game cry

cupboard, for clothes, crockery, linen, books

curds cure,»., treatment by

doctor curse (mild abuse) custom, habit of coiantry,

etc. cut

dacoit dance, v. danger dark, darkness daughter

day

deaf dear (beloved) deceit

yslah.

maligga, qimati. kapas, / . khansi, / . mwik.

adsb, m. sahn,m. d.hai)kna. gae,/ . kawri, / . reggna. kyrkst. *"•• rona, rwlana, etc.; cry out,

cyllana.

slmari, / . dahi, m. ylaj, m.; cure by God = fafa,

/ . phytkar,/. dsstur, m.; personal habit =

adst, / . kajTia; cut down, ka); iâlna;

snip, katama.

4aku, m. nacna. xatrs, m. sndhera, m. (also adjective). bet i , / . ; daughter-in-law, bahu,

dyn, m., roz, m.; dyn dahaê, in broad daylight; see aj, kal,. parsog.

bahra. pyara; costly, mahgga. daya, / . , dhokha, m.

284 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANf

December decide -

decision deed, sec action. deep deer defeat, n. deficient definition degrees, by delay Delhi deny

descend desire

desolation, see destroy,

dyssmbgr, m. f8ys9la k. ;• be decided, qarar

pana. fsysala, m. '

gahra. hyr3n,,?M. har, m.; verb : see conquer. kam.

. tarif,/. rafta rafta, der,/ . Dylli, DeMi,/. 5'nkar k. (ka); denial = ynkar,_

m.; see refuse. wtarna. . . J"3wq, m., xahyl, /., marzi, /. ,

t smanna, / . ; verb: cahna; ask for, marigna.

destruction. hyqarat k., hyqarat ki nazr se

dekhna, tghqir k. (ki); see contempt.

barbad k., wjaT;na; be destroyed, bsrbad hona, wjgfna.

barbadi, /-mama, f awt hona. f arq, m. awr. mwjkyl. mwjkyl, / . khodna. hazm k., hazm hona. hazms.

direction, see tarsf, ydhar, wdhar, Icydhsr, jydhar, and words north, south, east, and west; in all directions = carog taraf.

dirty ganda, mayla. disappear yayb hona.

despise

destroy

destruction die difference different difficult difficulty dig digest digestion


disciple disease disgrace, dishonour

displease displeasure distance distant distressed distribute district divide (= distribute)

doctor dog doil donkey dose, n. double doubt dove drag draw, see pull. drawers {for wearing) drawing-room drink dry, adj. duster duty

dwell

eagle ear early ease east

easy

mwrid, m. marz, maraz, m.; biraari,/. beyzzsti, / . ; disgraced, dis

honoured, beyzzat. naraz k.; displeased, naraz. narazi, / . fasla, m. dur. pare/an, dyqq, hayran. batj^na; intrans.: ba^na. zyla, m. taqsim k.; do hysse k., divide

into two parts. hakim, m., âkâr. kwtta, m.; feminine: kwtya. gwria,/. gadha, m.; feminine: gadhi, xwrak, /., dava, / . dwgna, do pand. Jsk, m. faxta, / . ghasitria; see pull.

jajghia,/. gol kamra,-7»., bai;a kamra. pina; see pylana. suldia; verb-: swkhana. jhai;an, m. farz, m.; lazym, mwnasyb,

cahie. .'basna, rahna.

uqab, m. kan, m. savere. aram, m., asani, / . purab, m., mafiyq, m.; east

wind = pwrva, / . asan.

TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI 2se

eat edge educate

effort eject elephant emerge employee empty end,«.

enemy, see oppose. Englishman enough entangled, be enter entertainment

equal erase error, see fault; escape (from something

impending) etcetem even

evening every evil, adj. (person)

exalt

examination examine (in school, etc.)

except

khana, khylana; see gobble. kynara, m. tarbist k. (ki); se$ teach,

' instruct.

nykalna. hathi, m. nykalna. mwlazym, nawksr; see servant. xali. yntyha,/.,sjTa,»».; verb: xotm

k.

sngrez, m. kafi, bss. phagsna. daknyl bona, ghwsna; ondar ana. tamaja, m.; place of entertain

ment, tama/agah, m. barabar. myâna.

bacna; (from a trouble one is already in) chutna.

vayayra. bhi, tak (as in: not even a

farthing; level, barabar). Jam,/, (about sunset). har, bwra, xsrab, bsdmaj, bsdxo;

noun: bwrai, xarabi, bad-ma|i, badxoi (aU feminine).

bai;ai k.; see praise, honour; exalted = ala.

ymtyhan. ymtyhan lena (ka.); be ex

amined, ymtyhan dena; look at, dekhna.

bayayr, syva, Slavs.

exchange

excited, be exercise, bodily expenditure, expense expensive extinguish

eye

face


badshia; in exchange, kebsdle, ke evaz.

ghsbrana; taâpna. vsizyiJ. khsTC; see price, rate, qimsti, mahgga. bwjhana; be extinguished,

bwjhna. agkh, / . .

factory fairly, good faU false family far fare, n. (railway, etc.) farmer farther

fashion, n. fasten, see tie. fate father fault

fear, n.

February feed female fertile fever few field fight, V.

mwrih, m., cehra, m.; face to face, mbaru.

karxans, m. xasa. gyma, jhatna, paijna. jhuta, jhutha, khota. xandan, m. dur. kyrays, m. kysan, zamindar. age, 3wr age, zyada dur; see

further. vaza, / . ; see custom,

qysmat, / . ; see fortune. bap, valyd. bhul, /. , qwsur, m., yslti, /. ,

X3ta, / , •\3Y, khawf; verb: i^^rna, i^sr

ana, xawf k. farvari, m.f. khylana; see graze. mada, / . zsrxez. bwxar, m. tlioi;e; see some. khet, m. lapia, jhsgatna; noun: l3t;ai,

/.,ih3g'[a.,m.


fill filthy final 'finger finish firm, overbearing firmness, overbearing

attitude fire, n. first fish . fittmg flame,«. flare up (flame) flat flock floor flour flow-flower fly, n. food fool, foohsh foolishness foot for, prep.

forbid forefathers foreign foresight forget forgive forgiveness fork, n. (table) form formerly fortune

bharna (both irmis. and tntrans.]. gonda. axyri; finally = axyr. wngU, / . xatm, K.; -cwkna. S9xt, zaberdast. -S9xti,/., zaberdssti,/.

ag, / . psbyla, 3vv3l, m-raacchh, / . mwnasyb; see duty. Jola, m. bh&t^â-c3Wi;a. galla, m, f arj", m. ata. bsbna. phul, m.' wpia. . khana, m., xwrak, /., yyza, / . • bevaquf, pag9l (lit, mad). bevaqufi, / . paog, m.; on foot, paydsl. ko, ke he, ke vaste; conjunc

tion : k'yor)ky. msna k. bapdada, bwzwrg, sjdad. V9yr, bydeji. dwrsndeji, / . bhulna; the wojfw is bhul,/ . mwaf k., bsx/na, dargwzar k. mwafi, / . kag (a, m. surot, / . pshyie. nasib, m., qysniat , / . ; see un

fortunate,

ENGLISH-HINDUSTANI GLOSSARY

forward fourfold, four times as

big, etc. fox free, get fresli Friday friend friendly friendsliip from front frown

fniit full • furniture further, furthermore, etc.

gallop game, Ganges gardener gate gear, apparatus generally gentleman genuine gift girl give glass glory go

goat goatherd gobble

age. cawgwna.

lomp, / , ; no masculine. chuâ; set free, chwjana, chotna. taz3. jwma, IK. dost, m.f. mylgnsar. dosti, / , • se, 3z, age, samne; rubaru. cin e jybin (jybig), cin bar

jybij {Pers.); ghurna. mev9, m., phgl, m. bhsrahua; -bhar. asbab, m. baqi, niz; see- farther.'

cawkp bhama. bazi, /. , khel. gsnga, / . mali. phatak ,« . saman, m. aksar, am tswr psr. sahab, janab. asli, xalys. ynam. bi;ki, / . dena, b9xj"na, Jifa, m. jalal, m. jana, cal dena, cala jana, nyka!

jana. bakra; feminine: bskri. bakrivala. hafapk., khajana, catkar jana;

see swallow, eat. L3

290

God

gold

good

goodness government gradually grain grandfather

grandmother

grandson grand-daughter grass graze, intrans. great. ^ green grief grieved, be groom grumble guide

gun

hibit hail, ». hair half hand handkerchief happen happy harbour hat


Xwda, m.; god, deota, m.: goddess, devi, / ,

sona, m. ghsnta, m. 9cch4, bh9la, nek, behtsr, xas9;

good fellow, bhalamanss; - feiniidne: bhslimanas.

neki, /. , bhslai, / . sarkar, / . rafts rafta. dang, m. father's father, dada; mother's

father, nana. father's mother, dadi; mother's

mother, nani. daughter's son, navasa. daughter's daughter, nsvasi. ghas, / . cama; irans.: carana. bsfa; greatness, baâi,/. sabz. yam, m. yam khana. sais, -m. bw[bwi:ana, rahnwma; guidance, rahnwmai,

banduq, / .

adat,/., xo , / . ; see custom. ola, m. bal, m.; matted, jaâ, / . adha, adh, nysf. hath, m. rumal, m. vaqe bona. xw/, bay bay. bandargah, m. topi, / . ; see cap.

+


he head, n. heap hear heart heat heavy heel help, ».

helper here hesitate hiccup hide, V. intrans. high hill Hindu hole (for animal} honour

honourable hope horn horse hospital hostile, see oppose. hot hour house

how humble humility hunger

hungry

yeh, voh. syr, m. 4her, m. swnna; hearsay, swni swnai bat. dyl, m., ji, m. garmi, / . bhari.

exlf. madad, /., ymdad, / . ; verb:

madad k. (ki), madsd dena (ko).

madadgar, yahag, ydhsr. at^kna. hycld,/. (Isgna). chwpna; irans.: chwpana. uijca, bwlaiid, ala. pahai;, m. hj^du. byl, m. yzzat,/., tazim,/.; your honour,

janab, hwzur, sarkar. bwzwrg, etc., yzzatvala. wmed,/., tavaqqw,/, sigg, m. ghota; feminine: ghop (mare). haspatal.

garm. ghsnta, m. ghar, kothi, makan, bangla, m.;

haveii, / . ; at my house, mere hai), etc.

kys tarsh, kyogkar. ajyz. ajyzi,/. bhuk, / . ; (die) of hunger,

bhukog mama. bhuka.

292

hunter (person) husband

I ill illness immediately imprison in

income increase, v. intrans.

India indifference indifferent inferior inform

ingredients inhabitant

inhabited injury ink inn inquire insert inside instruct

instrument, see tool, intelhgence intelligent intercede into irritate it


lykari, m. Jawhar, m.

mayo-bimar. bimari,/., marz; msraz, m. jhat. fawran, fylfawr. qayd k. meg; see between, middle;

inside, bhitar; into, merj. ' amdani, / . b3i;hna, tsraqqi k.; trans. :

bathana; noun: taraqqi, bs tht i , / .

Hyndwstan, m. laparvahi, / . laparva; laparvah. kamtar, kamdsrjs. khsbsr dena, bat ana, kshna,

swnana, yttyla dena. masalsh, m. bajynda, »t.; in the mass,

abadi, / . abad. nwqsan, m., cot , / . syahi, / . sarae, ssra, / . daryaft k. c[_alna. bhitsr, 9udar, bic meg, meg. hydayat dena; see educate,

teach, musical.

aq , / . , ho|yari,/., zyhanat. ho yar, aqlvala, zahin. sylaryik. (ki). meg. dyqq k,; s ^ annoy, trouble. voh, yeh; often omit.


jackal January jewel joke journey July jump June jungle

just, adv.

key kind, adj. kind, n.

kindle kindness king

kite (bird) knee knife know knowledge

known

lady Lahore lake lamb lame, adj. lamp

gidst, m. , jgnvari, m.f. zevar, m. dyllagi, niazaq. safar, m., sayr,/. jwlai, mj. kudna, jun, m. jsngsl, m.; adjecHve (wild,

etc.), jangli. zara.

cabi, / . mehrban. qysm,/.; what kind of, kaysa;

see also jaysa, vaysa, swlgana, jalana. mehrbani,/., kyrpa,/., daya,/. badfaJi, raja. The King of

England, etc, is badfah. cd,/. ghw^na, m. chwri, / . janna; see knowledge, loiown. y!m; I do not know anything

about it = ys bat ka mwjhe koi ylm nahig; also, xabar, / . ; I do not know = mwjhe xabar nahir).

malum; I laiow = mwjhe malum hay.

mem, mys-sahyb, sahyba. lahawr, m. j M , / . barra, m.f. langta; walk lame = langâna. batti, / . ; cyray, m.


land {as property) lane (in town, etc.) language lantern lap last

late lawful (food, etc.) laziness lazy leaf leap

least

learn leave, v. trans.

left (not right) leg leisure length lessen, inlrans.

lesson letter (epistle)

lie, n.

hfe, vital principle Hft, V. light, n.

like, adj.

z9Tnin, / . gali./. zsban, / . laJt^J'n, m. god,/.; see arms. axyri; last year = parsal; last

(week, month, year), gwzra, pychla.

• der,/. (lii.: lateness). halal. swsti, / . swst, pstta, m., patt i , / . chalagg marna, or chalaijg

Isgana. ssb se choJ_a, kam, etc.; at

least, ksm se kam, ksm sz ksm.

sikhna. cbo];na; noun: chw^Ji, / . ;

rwxsat, / . bayag; left over = baqi.' tang,/. fwrsat, / . lembai, / , gha^na, kam hona; Irans.:

gnetana, ksmk. ssbaq, m. cyttln,/., xst, JM.; of alphabet,

hsrf, m. jhut, m.; tell lie, jhut bolna;

lie down, letna. j a n , / wtnana. rswjni,f.; adjective: (colourand

weight) helka; verb : j slana, swigana; see kindle.

manynd,-sa; verb: see desire, choose.


line, n. listen little (size)

•live load, V. lock, n.

lofty London long, adj.

long for look, look at

lose

lakir, / . ; of poetry, mysra, m. swnna. chofa; (amount) thofa, zgra,

or Z9ra sa; too little, kgm, tho];a.

jina; see alive, dwell. ladna; intrants.: Isdna. tala, ni., qwfl, m.; verb: tala

or qwfl lagana. ugca, bwlsnd; see high. land an, m. lamba, daraz; so long as = jab

tsk. lalcana, tarasna; see desire. dekhna, dekhnabhalna; look

for, see search; look after, sambhalna.

khona, gagvana; be lost, kho jana; see defeat.

loss luggage • lyric

mad maize majority make, v.

man mango manner, see kind-mansion many

I

map mare mark

harj, m., nwqsan, m. asbab, m. yazal, / .

divans, pagal. makai,./. aksariat. banana; be made, banna; make,

M., banavat, / . ; ready-made, bona banaya. -

mard, admi, faxs. am, m.

haveli; see house. bahwt, bahwtere, kai; how

many? kytiie, kai; so many, ytne, wtne; as many, jytne.

nsq/s, m. ghofi,/. nyjan, m.


marriage master mat

May meaniog means

meat medicine meditation meet

meeting, interview

melt, intrans. mercy middle mile

mUk minaret minute, n. mistake, see fault, forget. moderately good mongoose monkey month, m. more morning mosque most people

' mother motion motor mountain mountainous

byah, »i.,nykah, m. malyk, m. catai , /- ; prayer-mat, mwsslla,

m. may. m./. mane, m.pl., also matloo. zeria, m., vssila, m.\ by means

of, ke zsrie, ke vasile se, gojt, in. dava, davai,/.; see dose, treat. dhyan, m. mykia (with se for interview,

' and ko for accidental meeting).

mwlaqat, / . ; assembly = ] slsa, •m., sabha, / .

pyghalna; trans.: pyghlana. daya,/ . ; karam, HI. dsrmian, bic; sea between. mil, m., kos, m, (kos is approxi

mately a mile and a half). dudh, m. minar, m. myna^, «J.

xasa. neola, m. bandar, m. mahina, m. zs'ada, awr, awi bhi. iajr, / . ; swbah, / . masjyd, / , • aksarlog; aksar is also an ad

verb meaning generally. mat], valyda. harkat, / . ; see move. mo tar, / . pahax, m. pahap.


mouse mouth

move

much

mud murder musical instrument

my

naU (hand or toe) naked narrative, see story. nation near necessary necessity necklace need nephew

net never

niece

night no noon north not notebook

cuhia, / . mwi)li, m.; by word of mouth,

mwgh zabani; through hearsay from, ws ki zsbani.

hyhia; trans.: hylana; (said of the bowels, have a motion), hsgna; move aside, hsfna; trans.: hajana.

bahwt, b^hwtera; how much = kytna; so much = ytna, wtna; as much = jytna.

gara, m., kicaf,/., myt t i , / . xun, m. baja, )B.; of various kinds, baje

gaje. mera. ,

naxwn, JK. iianga.

qawm, / . nazdik, pas. zsruri. zaruvet, / . ; see Grammar, p, 95. mala, / . ehtyaj,/., zerurat,/. brothersson = bhatija; sister's

son = bhagja. iai, in. k9bhi nabir); hargyz with nega

tive. brother's daughter = bhatiji;

sister's daughter = bhagji. rat, / . ; also Jab. nahii). dopshr, / . wttar, MI., Jymal, m. nahir]. kapi, / . •


November nsvambar, m. now 9b, sbhi. nowadays yn dynog met), ajkal.

0,i-nierj. o, ohho; SXQ {feminine: ari). oath qasm, / . ; take oath = qssm

khana. obedience fsnnagbardari, / . obedient farmagbardar. obey hwkm manna, bat laâna,

farmagbardari k. etyraz k. etyraz, m. pana; tnybia with ko = accrue

to, come to. vaqia, m. baje. aktubar, m. ka, ke, ki. dsftar, m. bahwt dafa, aksar; see re

peatedly, habit. tel, in. bw4d.ha, bufha, baba, bwzwrg, syrf, bas, hi. khwhia; trans.: khohia, khwl-

vana; adjective: khwla hua. dya d9hai;e. mawqa, m. mwxalyfat k.; mwxalyf hona,

dw/manik.; enemy: dwfman, mwxalyf.

mwxalyfat,/., dwjmsni,/. dabana, zabardasti k. bandobast, tartib, /., etc.; see

command. bandobastk.; tartib dena; see

coinmand. 9sl,/.; adjective: asli,

object, V. trans, objection obtain

occurrence o'clock October of office often

oU old only open, V. intrans.

openly opportunity oppose

opposition oppress order (arrangement)

order, v. trans', (arrange)

original, n.

ENGLISH^HINDUSTANI GLOSSARY 299

ornament other

, otherwise ' ought

our over, prep.

overbearing out, outside, adv. own

owner ox

pain pair Panjab paper part, n.

' pass (time and general use)

past tense patience pay, M. payment on account peak pear pearl pen pendl people perfume perhaps permission perplexed

zewsr dusra, 9wr; pron. adj.: y^yr' nahig to, vema. cahie, lazjTn, mwnasyb, vajyb,

Jarz; see duty. hsmara. ke upar; adverb: upar; see

upon. zabardsst; —ness, zabardssti, / . bahar; postpos.: ke bahar. apna; see Grammar, p. 33;

make one's own, apnana. malyk, m.f. bayl, m.

iza,/. jofa, m. Panjab, m. kaysz, m. hysss, m.; verb: see divide,

distribute. gvraarna; trans.: gwzarna;

(time alone) bytna, bitna; trems.: bytana.

mazi, / . sabr, m. tanxah, / . mwjra, m. coti,/ . na|pati, / . moti, m. qalam, m. pynsal, / . log, m.pl.; see nation. xwJT>u,/.; mshak,/. Jayad, yjazat,/. hsyran, pare/an; see agitated,

bewildered.

300

Persian petition pice picture pierce

pigeon

pity place, V.

plain, 11. plant, M. play, V.

pleased

plough, n. plough, V.

plum pocket poem poison poisonous police, the polite, see civil. politeness pond poor

populate . population possible post (letters, etc.) postman potato


farsi. arzi, /., darxast, / . psysa, jK. tasvir, / . chedna; be pierced = chydna;

cause to be pierced, chydana, chydvana.

kabutar, m.; pigeon-house = kabak, / .

see mercy; what a pity I afsos ! rakhna; noun: j sgah , / . ; in

place of = ke bsdle, ke evaz, kebsjae, ki jagah.

maydan, m. pawda, m. khebia; noun: khel, 'm., bazl,

razi, xwj"; to please = razi k.; xwf k.; see happy.

hal. jotna; intrans.: jwtna; see

harness, yoke. aluca, m. jeb,/ . Jer, m. zahr, m. zahrila. pwlis,/.; police post: cawki,/.

a dab, m. talab, m. myskin, yarib; poor fellow =

becara. abad k. abadi, / . mwmkyn;. or use sakna.

harkara, m. alu, m.


pound (weight) poverty powder (for medicine,

etc.) power

praise pray

present, adj. press (linen) press, V. traits.

price prince princess print, V. trans. printing press prisoner

'probably profit progress promise proper property protection

protect prove pull, V. trans..

pull oneself together

ser, m. (= 2 lbs.). ywrbgt, yar ibi , / , myskini, / . pwtia. / .

has, m.; majal, / . ; (of God) qwdrst, / .

tarif, /. , h^\Q.\, f.; see honour. dwa, /., nsmaz, / . ; prayer-mat,

mwsalla, m. hazyr, mawjud. almaii, / . dabana; intrans.: dabna; see

print. dam, «}., qimat, /., mol, m. Jahzads. Jahzadi. chapna; intram.: chapna, matba, m. qsydi. yalyban. nsfa, m. tarsqqi, / . vada, m. see duty, ought, suitable. mal, m. hyfazat, / . , nygshbani, /. , - mwhafyzat, /. , psrvaryj", / . ;

provide for, nygrani k. use the above words with k. sabyt k. khegcna (also Idiincna, kha-

yncna), gh3si(;na. sambhalna.

pungent (in taste or word) tez. punish saza dena. punishment saza, / . pupil fagyrd. purchase, see buy. purchaser gahak.

TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTANI 302

pursue put

quarrel, v.

quarter queen question

quiet, adj.

race (running) rain, intrans.

ram (animal) Tat rate (price, etc.) rather, adv. raw, not properly cooked read real reality, in rear, v. trans. ' reason

rebuke, ».

receive, see accept, recognise recommend red

darpay hona (ke), picha k. rakhna; put in = âlna; put on

(clothes) = pshjTina, oi;hna.

ihsgscna, lai;na; noun: jhagra, m.; latai (latter also battle, war).

pao, C9wthai, / . ; see numerals. rani, mslyka. s\V3.\, saval, m.; ask question,

puclina, swal k. cwp, cwp cap; to quiet, v.

trans.: cwp karana.

dawf,/.; -nation, etc., qswm,/. barasna, pani pa^na, bary/hona;

noun : baryj", / . ; the rains = barsaf, / .

meg(|ha- ^• cuha, in. bhao, Mj. kwch; but rather (COM/,), balky. kacca; see unripe. pat^hna; study, mwtalea k. asli, asl. asl meg. palna^ parvaryj" k. (Id). vajsh, vajeh, / . ; sabab, m.,

bays, m.; for this reason = j 's sabab se, ys vgjah se; for no reason, anyhow, yughi.

jhyxki, /., malamat, /., tambih, / . , tadib, / . ; verb trans. : âgtâ; or one of the above words with suitable verb.

pahcanna. syfaryj k. (ki). lal, swrx.


refuse relate, v. trans. relationship relative, n., relation, remain, inirans, remaining (left ox'er) remuneration rent repeatedly repent repentance report reproach, sec rebuke. reproof, reprove; see request, n.

resign

respect, n.

responsible responsibility rest, n.

restless, see agitate. result return

reward rhinoceros rich riches ride riding, n. right (not left)

ynkar k.; see deny. swnana. ry/tedari, ry/ta, -m.

n. ry/tedar. rghna baqi. wjrat, / . ; see pay. kyraya, m. gh9i;i ghsfi; see habit, often. pactitana, tawba k. tgwba, / . rapst,/.

rebuke. 3rz, /., darxast, /. , yltyja, / . ;

verb: these nouns with k.; see petition.

ystyfa (m.) dena (pronounced ystifa).

adab, m.; v. trans.: adsb k. (ka); see honour.

zymmedar. zymme (ke); zymmedari, / . aram, m., qsrar/ m.; verb :

aram k., qarar pana (find rest); rest, adj., pron.: baqi.

natijs, m. lawtna, p s U ^ a ; Irans.: law-

tana, paltajia. ynam, m. gegd.a, m. dswlatmand, amir, maldar. dawlat, / . S9var hona. \ savari, / , dahna; (not wrong) tîk,

dwrwst, sahih; noun: hsqq, m.


ripe rivet road

rob robin roll room root "rope rot, intrans. round, adj.

rouse' rub, V. tram.

run rupee

sadhu sailor sake (for the sake of) salary salt save say scavenger scent school sea seal

scorch scorpion search seat, V. trans. see

pgkka. ' .,d3rya, m., nadi,/. rasts, m., rasta, m., satak, / . ;

see way. lufna. /araa, / . Iwfhsfcna. kojhri,/., kamra, m. MJ-rassa, m. satna.

• gol; postpos.: ke gyrd;, all round, carog tsrsf, ke caw-gyrd.

jagana, cherna, ghysna, rggarna, mslna, malyj

k.; be rubbed, ghysna, ghys jana, ragai; khana.

dawpia; run away, bhagna. rwpaya, m.

sadhu, m. mallah. ke lie, ke vaste, ki xatyr. tanxab, / . nsmak, m. bacaria; be saved, bacna. kahna. mehtar, m. xwjbu, / . skul, m. samandar, samwndar, m. mohr, / . ; v. trans.: mohr

lagana. jhwlasna {irans. and inlr.). bycchu, m. 4hur|4hna, talaj" k. bytfiana. dekhna.

ENGLISH-HINDUSTANI GLOSSARY 305 seed seize sell

send senses separate, adj.

sepoy September servant

. service

severe sew shade

- shame shape share, n. sharp (edge or words) sharpness shave shawl sheep sheet sherbet shine, v. shirt shoe shoemaker shop .shqpkeeper shout show

bij, m. pakaiTia, becna; causal: bykvana; be

sold, bykna. bhejna. ho|, ffi. (alertness, intelligent). 3l8g, jwda; V. trans.: slsg k.,

jwda k. sypahi, m. sytambar, m. nawkar, niwlazym; servant of

God, Xwda ka bands {feminine : bandi, bandi); your servant, banda; in signing letter, ksmtarin; table servant, khydmatgar.

nawksri, /. , xydmatgari, / . ; see servant.

saxt, zabsrdast. sina; ready sewn = syla sylaya. saya, m., chaor),/. form, / . ; see ashamed. surat,/. (form, appearance). hyssa; see divide. tez. tezi, / . hajamat k. cadar, /., dwpatt^, m. . bher,/. cadar, / . • Jarbat, m. camakna; noun: camak, / . qamiz, / . jnti,/. , juta, m., buf, m. mod, m. dwkan, / . dwkandar, bania. . cyllana, pwkarna. dykhana.


shut

shy sick sickness side

sign silver simple sing sink

sir! sister ' sit

slander slave slavery sleep slip slowly small snake-snip snow, m. so, adv., thus

some sometimes somewhere son song sound, K.

south sow sparrow

band; v. trans.: bond k.; be shut, band hona.

Jarmila, m., Jarmili,/. bimar. bimari, / . taraf, / . ; on all sides, carog

taraf. ny/an, m. cagdi, / . sada. gana. 4«bna; of sun, moon, stars,

4iibna; of day, 4hSkia-ji, sahab, jsnab. bahn, / . baythna (i.e. assume sitting

posture). hatak, / . ; verb: h&tsk k. ywlam, m. ywlami. sona; go to sleep, so jana. physalna. ahysta. chota, nannha. samp, m. kstsrna. barf,/.; verb: barfpapia, see thus; adj. fron.: vaysa,

aysa. baz, kwch, koi, csnd, kai. kabhi, kabhi kabhi. kahiri. beta. git, m. avaz, / . ; verb: bajna; trans.:

bsjana. . dakan, m., janub, M.

bona. cyfla, / . ; see bird.

, ENGLISH-I

speak spend

k spendthrift ' spices

spit spite (in spite of}

spirits (intoxicating) split, intrans. spoil

spoon spring, see leap, jump. square squeeze (fruit) squirrel, / . stain standing

star starling start, set out stead, instead of steal step steward

stick, iJitrans.

stitch, see sew. stomach stone stoop stop, intrans.

storm story, narrative straw'

HINDUSTANI GLOSSARY _ 307

bolna. xarc k. fwzulxsrc. masalah, m. thukna (takes ne). bavwjude ky {conj.); ke bavw-

jud, posipos. Jarab, / . phs^na; trans.: phajna. bygapia; see destroy; be

spoiled = bygapa. camca, m.

mwrabba, in. nycoiTia. gylshri. dlisbba. khsfa; to stand, khaâ bona or

hojana. sytara, m. mayna, / . ravanahona; trans.-; rsvans k. kebgjae; see place. cori k. qsdam, m. xansaman, m. (usually used

for cook). , lagna; h-ans.: Isgana; noun:

lakxi,/., lathi,/.

pef, m. patthar, m. jhwkna. atakna, tâhama, thayma;

trans.: rokna, at^âna, ^hah-rana.

andhi, /., tufan, m. dastan, /., bayan, m. bhusa, m.; a straw = tynka, m.


stream strike, n. . . strike, v. trans. stumble stumbling-block style stylish subject

success successful such, adj. pron. sugar suitable summit summon. Sunday sunshine support, n.

swallow, V. trans. sweep sweeper, see scavenger. • sweet swift swiftness swim sword

table tailor take

tall tank tape (broad, for weaving • beds)

nala; see river. hartal,/ . marna. tilokar Idiana. {hokar, / . vsza, tgrah,/. (of dress,'etc.). tsrshdax, vszadar. laiat, / . (tenant, subject of

king)._ kamyabi, / . kamyab. aysa, vsysa; see so. mysri, / . mswzuij; see right, duty. coti, / . talsb k. ytvar, m. dhup, / , Sahara, m.;' v. trans.: samb-

halna, Sahara dena (ko); see rear.

nygalna. jhafu dena.

mi (ha. tez. tezi, / . tayrna. talvar, / .

mez,/. darzi, in. lena; take in, understand (by

seeing), ta]; jana; take off (clothes), wtarna.

ui)ca, lamba. talab, m. nyvai;, m.


tea teach teacher tear, trans. tease

tell temple tenant than thanks to (by means that, pron. adj.

the theft then (of time)

there thief thing (object)

think third

thirst thirsty this thorn though, see although. throw Thursday thus tie, V. trans. tiffin tighten tiger tigress tin, until

ca, cae, / . sykhana; see educate, instruct. wstad,' m. phajna; intrans.: phatna. chei;na; see annoy, irritate,

trouble. kshna, swnana, batana. msndyr, m.; see mosque. asami, f.m., raiat, / . se, kinysbst,,kemwqabylemer).

of) ki badawlat. voh; conj.: ki; in order that,

taky. voh or yeh; often omit. cori, / . ws vsqt; of reasoning, to, tab,

tab to. vshari, wdhar, ws taraf. cor, m. ciz, / , ; (matter) bat, /. ,

mwamyla, m. socna. tisra, m.; a tiiird part, tyhai,

pyas,/.. pyasa. yeh. kagln. «'-

pheijkna. jwmerat, / . yug, ys tarah, bandhna, kasna. typan, m. kasna; sec tie. Jei-, m. ferni,/. tab tak, jab tak ky, with

negative.

\

310 TEACH YOURSiLF HINDUSTANI

time .(general)

tire, trans. tired

to to-morrow

tongue

tool top, see surmnit. touch town trace, n. train, n. translation

treat treatment treble tree tremble trip (pleasure trip) trouble

trousers true Tuesday turban turn, inirans.

twice

ugly ugliness

vaqt, m.; as in four times, dsfa, /., martabs, / .

thakana. thaka hua, thaka mands; be

tired, thakna, ajyz ana. ko, ki tarsf. kst, m.; day after to-morrow,

parsog. zaban, / . (both part of body and

language). awzar, m.

chuna. mawza, m., qssba, m. p3ta, m. gaii,/ . , rel-gap,/. tarjwmg, m.;. translate, tar-

jwma k. swluk k.; (medically), ylaj k. swluk, m., ylaj, m. tygna; see numerals. darait, m. kampna, thsrthsrana. sayr,/.; see stumble. taldif,/.; v. trans.: tsklifdena;

talce trouble = taklif kama; see annoy, irritate, tease.

paejama, m. sing. sacca, sacc. mangal, m. safa, m. phyma, palatna, lawtna;

trans.: pherna, . phyrana, law tana.

do data, dogwna, dwgna, do martaba, do cand.

badsurat. badsurati, / .

ENGLISH-H unadulterated uncle

under understand

unfortunate unlawful unripe unseen unsuitable until, see till. up upside down urge

veil

vengeance verandah very

vessel (cooking) victory village villager visible, be vizier voice vulture

wages wait wake, inirans. walk, take a walk wanted warm wash

INDUSTANI GLOSSARY 311 xalys. father's brother, CBca; mother's

brother, mamug, ke nice. S9m9]hna; see intelligence, in

telligent, badnssib. badqysmat. mana, haram (Islam). kacca. yayb. namswzur).

upar, tale upar. takidk.

bwrqa, m. (from head to foot, see shawl).

badla, m. baramda, m. bahwt, ba];a, nyhayat; (for un

pleasant things), saxt. bsrtan, m. fatah, /., jit, / . ; see conquer. gaog, m. gavar. nazrana; dykhna, dikhna. V9zir. avaz, / . gydh, m.

mazduri, / . ; see pay. thaharna, fhayrna. jagna; trans.: jagana. sayr k.; on foot, paydal. cahie; see wish, desire. garm. dhona.

312 TEACH YOURSELF HINDUSTAN'

washerman waste (worthless)

1

1

wasteful wastefulness water watercarrier wave, V, (as elephant's

trunk) wealth wealthy, see rich. wear (clothes) Wednesday-weep well,». well, adv.

wheat where

whether

which, inter.

white whitewash who, inter.

whole why?

wicked wickedness wide width wife .:

dhobi. ... ! raddi; v. trans.: squand

gagvaiia, wfana; lay was wjajna; be laid was' wjatna; set; destroy.

fwzulxsrc. fwzulxarci,/. ' pani, m. bhyjti, m. .. jhumna.

., dswlat.

pahynna; see put on. bwddh, m. rona. kuar), «i- " i baxubi; acchi tarah se; inter^

xayr 1 gehug, m., gen. plur. kahag ? kydhar ?• relative: jaha

jydliar; wherever, jah kahig. ' f

ky, cabe, caho . . ; caho, x; . . . xah.

kawnsa; whichever, jayng koisa; relative: \o.

safed. safedi,/. kawn? relative: jo; whoev^

jo koi. J tamam; -bhar; see all. • kyog, kahe ko; see reasw

that's why — jabhi. | l badmaj", |arir; see bad, evil, ,. badmaji, /. , Jararat, / . cawfa. cawfai,/. bivi,

'S3.).-.5_3 B i ^ T

!î<hLL^— : ^

. . ^vC«*Aa£V j __

. -IJ^''/.-' , „ .-•

•.:!2SriJ6'5 •-. '•-.[ •

n OCT ae ^ ^ i ^ C ^ f ^ 1'

[I

j i

Ii ••

Date post:	05-May-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

HINDUSTANI - Digital Library

Documents